CS Professional

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 8 Voluntary Liquidation of Companies – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
WTC Ltd. had been incurring losses since inception and was decided to wind up. The company had several pending litigation and that claim against the company exceeded value of its assets and, thus, debt due to creditors could not be discharged in total. The company seeks your opinion for voluntary liquidation proceedings. Advise the company with the relevant provision under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
Voluntary Liquidation of Corporate Persons:
Section 59(3) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that voluntary liquidation proceedings of a corporate person registered as a company shall meet the following conditions:
(a) A declaration from majority of the directors of the company verified by an affidavit stating that (i) they have made a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and they have formed an opinion that either the company has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the voluntary liquidation; and (ii) the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person;

(b) The declaration under sub-clause (a) shall be accompanied with the following documents: (i) audited financial statements and record of business operations of the company for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later; (ii) a report of the valuation of the assets of the company, if any prepared by a registered valuer;

(c) Within four weeks of a declaration under sub-clause (a), there shall be
(i) a special resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator; or (ii) a resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its articles or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the articles provide that the company shall be dissolved, as the case may be and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator.

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
WTC Ltd. had been incurring losses since inception and was decided to wind up. The company had several pending litigation and that claim against the company exceeded value of its assets and, thus, debt due to creditors could not be discharged in total. The company seeks your opinion for voluntary liquidation proceedings. Advise the company with the relevant provision under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
Voluntary Liquidation of Corporate Persons:
Section 59(3) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that voluntary liquidation proceedings of a corporate person registered as a company shall meet the following conditions:
(a) A declaration from majority of the directors of the company verified by an affidavit stating that (i) they have made a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and they have formed an opinion that either the company has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the voluntary liquidation; and (ii) the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person;

(b) The declaration under sub-clause (a) shall be accompanied with the following documents: (i) audited financial statements and record of business operations of the company for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later; (ii) a report of the valuation of the assets of the company, if any prepared by a registered valuer;

(c) Within four weeks of a declaration under sub-clause (a), there shall be –
(i) a special resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator; or
(ii) a resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its articles or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the articles provide that the company shall be dissolved, as the case may be and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator.

The proviso appended to sub-section(3) of Section 59 lays down that if the company owes any debt to any person, creditors representing two thirds in value of the debt of the company shall approve the resolution passed under sub-clause (c) within seven days of such resolution.
Thus, as per Section 59(3) voluntary liquidation could only be undertaken if corporate debtor discharged its debts to satisfaction of creditors and if there was no litigation pending against corporate debtor. In the instant case since both these ingredients are not satisfied, hence the option for voluntary liquidation of the company could not be advised.

Question 3.
WTC Ltd. had been incurring losses since inception and decided to wind up. The company had several pending litigations and that claim against the company, exceeded the value of its assets and thus, debt due to creditors could not be discharged in total. The company seeks your opinion for voluntary liquidation proceedings. Advise the company the relevant provisions under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (Dec 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
Section 59 (1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that a corporate person who intends to liquidate itself voluntarily and has not committed any default may initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings.
Conditions for voluntary liquidation proceedings:
Section 59(3) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that voluntary liquidation proceedings of a corporate person registered as a company shall meet the following conditions:
a. A declaration from majority of the directors of the company verified by an affidavit stating that-

  • they have made a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and they have formed an opinion that either the company has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the voluntary liquidation; and
  • the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person;

b. The declaration under sub-clause (a) shall be accompanied with the following documents:

  • audited financial statements and record of business operations of the company for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later;
  • a report of the valuation of the assets of the company, if any prepared by a registered valuer;

c. Within four weeks of a declaration under sub-clause (a), there shall be-

  • a special resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator; or
  • a resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its articles or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the articles provide that the company shall be dissolved, as the case may be and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator.

The proviso appended to sub-section (3) of section 59 lays down that if the company owes any debt to any person, creditors representing two thirds in value of the debt of the company shall approve the resolution passed under sub-clause (c) within seven days of such resolution.
Thus, as per section 59(1) & (3) voluntary liquidation could only be done if corporate debtor discharged its debts to satisfaction of creditors and if there was no litigation pending against corporate debtor. In the instant case since both these ingredients are not satisfied, hence the option for voluntary liquidation of the company could not be advised.
The company could take steps to have recourse under section 271 of the Companies Act, 2013 or could take steps for compulsory liquidation by filing an application under section 10 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 4.
XYZ Ltd. was intending to initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings. A declaration was made by way of affidavit by some of the directors of XYZ Ltd. stating that the company will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds that may be realized from its assets sold during the process of Voluntary Liquidation.
(i) Can XYZ Ltd. initiate Voluntary Liquidation proceeding in compliance with the conditions given in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
(ii) What are the documents required to accompany the declaration?
(iii) What are the consequences, if the Articles of the Company fixed the
period or duration for which company may be active and that period expires? (Dec 2019, 2 marks each)
Answer:
(i) Section 59(1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that a corporate person who intends to liquidate itself voluntarily and has not committed any default may initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings under the provisions of the Code.
A corporate person registered as a company has to meet the following conditions to initiate a Voluntary Liquidation Process:
(a) A declaration from the majority of the directors of the company verified by an affidavit stating they have conducted a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and have formed an opinion that either the company has no debts or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the Voluntary Liquidation; and
(b) That the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person. In this case it is stated that some of the directors signed the declaration and it is not coming out clearly that the directors who signed were in the majority. Moreover, the declaration relating to fraud is not there. Therefore, in this scenario, XYZ Ltd. cannot initiate Voluntary Liquidation proceedings in accordance with the Code.

(ii) As per Section 59(3)(b) of the Code, the declaration shall be accompanied with the following documents:
(a) Audited Financial Statements and a record of business operations of the company for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later.
(b) A report of the valuation of the assets of the company, if any, prepared by a registered valuer.

(iii) If the articles of the company fixed the period of duration of continuation of the company and that period expires, XYZ Ltd. under section 59(3)(c)(ii) of the Code shall pass a resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its articles or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the articles provide that the company shall be dissolved, as the case may be and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator.

Question 5.
MNO Private Limited has stopped its business operations and management has no further intention to continue its business operations. The Company has Assets in excess of Liabilities and hence, proposed Voluntary Liquidation of the Company as perthe Provisions of IBC, 2016. You are proposed to be appointed as Liquidator for the Voluntary Liquidation. The Directors have approached you to know the prescribed time lines for completion of Voluntary Liquidation Process. The Extra-ordinary General Meeting to approve the Voluntary Liquidation is proposed on 1st July 2021. Prepare a time line mentioning the probable date for the following activities as perthe IBC, 2016 and Regulations made thereunder:
(i) Voluntary Liquidation Commencement date
(ii) Date of Public Announcement
(iii) Intimation of Special Resolution for Voluntary Liquidation to IBBI and RoC
(iv) Receipt of claims and preparing list of stakeholders
(v) Submission of Preliminary Report
(vi) Distribution of Assets. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
Date of EGM 1st July, 2021
(i) Voluntary Liquidation Commencement date – Date of EGM will be treated as Liquidation Commencement date – 1st July, 2021
(ii) Date of Public Announcement – Within 5 days from the date of Commencement-6th July, 2021
(iii) Intimation of Resolution to IBBI and Roc – within 7 days from the date of Commencement -8th July, 2021
(iv) Receipt of claims and preparing list of Stakeholders – 30 days from the date of Commencement- 31st July, 2021
(v) Submission of Preliminary Roport – Within 45 days from Commencement date-15th August, 2021
(vi) Distribution of Assets- Within six month from the receipt of amount to stakeholders.

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 6.
Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with voluntary liquidation of corporate person. Comment.
Answer:

  • Voluntary liquidation of a company is now governed by the provisions of section 59 of the Code and relevant regulations issued under the Code.
  • The corresponding provisions under the Companies Act, 2013 in this regard have been repealed.
  • A corporate person will be eligible to opt for voluntary liquidation under the Code provided it fulfills the two mandatory conditions i.e.
    • either the company has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the voluntary liquidation; and
    • the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person.
  • Code reduces the intervention of the regulatory authorities drastically that fasten up the process.
  • Once the liquidation process is completed, the liquidator has to make an application to the Tribunal for passing the order of dissolution of the company
  • Only solvent companies can file for voluntary liquidation and approval of creditors is mandatory.
  • With the removal of the concept of official liquidator, the onus of the entire process is on company liquidator.
  • The Code appears to be in harmony with the global practices removing overall obstacles which prevailed in older laws, due to which closure of solvent companies has become a lot smoother.

Question 7.
Explain the reasons for Voluntary Liquidation of companies.
Answer:
Reasons for Voluntary Liquidation of companies are as follows:

  • Not carrying business operations
  • Commercially unviable
  • Running into losses
  • No revenue
  • Promoters unable to manage affairs of the company
  • Purpose for which company was formed accomplished
  • Contract termination.

Question 8.
Who may initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings?
Answer:

  • According to sub-section (1) of section 59, a corporate person who intends to liquidate itself voluntarily and has not committed any default may initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings under the provisions of Chapter V of Part II of the Code.
  • Thus, in order to initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings under Chapter V of Part II of the Code, a corporate person who intends to liquidate itself voluntarily, must have not committed any default.

Question 9.
What are the conditions for voluntary liquidation proceedings of corporate person registered as company?
Answer:
Voluntary liquidation proceedings of a corporate person registered as a company shall meet the following conditions:
(a) a declaration from majority of the directors of the company verified by an affidavit stating that –

  • they have made a full inquiry into the affairs of the company and they have formed an opinion that either the company has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the voluntary liquidation; and
  • the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person;

(b) the declaration under sub-clause (a) shall be accompanied with the following documents:

  • audited financial statements and record of business operations of the company for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later;
  • a report of the valuation of the assets of the company, if any prepared by a registered valuer;

(c) within four weeks of a declaration under sub-clause (a), there shall be

  • a special resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator or
  • a resolution of the members of the company in a general meeting requiring the company to be liquidated voluntarily as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its articles or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the articles provide that the company shall be dissolved, as the case may be and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator.
    The proviso appended to sub-section (3) of section 59 lays down that if the company owes any debt to any person, creditors representing two thirds in value of the debt of the company shall approve the resolution passed under sub-clause (c) within seven days of such resolution.

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 10.
What are the key differences in the procedure to be followed for voluntary liquidation as compared to the procedure to be followed for insolvent liquidation?
Answer:
Though the procedure to be followed for voluntary liquidation proceedings under Chapter III is largely similar to the procedure to be followed for insolvent liquidation under Chapter III of the Code yet there are marked differences:

  1. To initiate voluntary liquidation proceedings, where the corporate debtor is a company, the directors have to provide a declaration of solvency and a declaration that the company is not being liquidated to defraud any person.
  2. The declarations have to be accompanied by (a) the audited financial statements of the company and (b) a record of its business operations for the previous two years or the period since its incorporation whichever is later.
  3. Further, a report of the valuation of the assets of the company prepared by a registered valuer has to be provided.
  4. A resolution in favour of the voluntary winding up of the company and appointment of an insolvency professional as the liquidator has to be passed within four weeks of the declaration under clause (a) of sub-section (3) of section 59.
  5. Where the company owes any debt to any person, creditors representing two-thirds in value of the debt of the company shall approve the resolution passed under sub-clause (c) within seven days of such resolution.

Question 11.
Discuss the salient aspects of “Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Voluntary Liquidation Process) Regulations, 2017”.
Answer:
These Regulations have come into force on 1st April, 2017. These Regulations shall apply to the voluntary liquidation of corporate persons under Chapter V of Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. Some of the salient provisions are as under:
Initiation of Liquidation:
1. Without prejudice to section 59(2), liquidation proceedings of a corporate person shall meet the following conditions, namely:
(a) a declaration from majority of
(i) the designated partners, if a corporate person is a limited liability partnership,
(ii) individuals constituting the governing body in case of other corporate persons, as the case may be, verified by an affidavit stating that-

  • they have made a full inquiry into the affairs of the corporate person and they have formed an opinion that either the corporate person has no debt or that it will be able to pay its debts in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in the liquidation; and
  • the corporate person is not being liquidated to defraud any person;

(b) the declaration under sub-clause (a) shall be accompanied with the following documents, namely:

  • audited financial statements and record of business operations of the corporate person for the previous two years or for the period since its incorporation, whichever is later;
  • a report of the valuation of the assets of the corporate person, if any prepared by a registered valuer.

(c) within four weeks of a declaration under sub-clause (a), there shall be:
1. (i) a resolution passed by a special majority of the partners or contributories, as the case may be, of the corporate person requiring the corporate person to be liquidated and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator; or
(ii) a resolution of the partners or contributories, as the case may be, requiring the corporate person to be liquidated as a result of expiry of the period of its duration, if any, fixed by its constitutional documents or on the occurrence of any event in respect of which the constitutional documents provide that the corporate person shall be dissolved, as the case may be, and appointing an insolvency professional to act as the liquidator:
Provided that the corporate person owes any debt to any person, creditors representing two-thirds in value of the debt of the corporate person shall approve the resolution passed under sub-clause (c) within seven days of such resolution.
2. The corporate person shall notify the Registrar and the Board about the resolution under sub-regulation (1) to liquidate the corporate person within seven days of such resolution or the subsequent approval by the creditors, as the case may be.
3. Subject to approval of the creditors under sub-regulation (1), the liquidation proceedings in respect of a corporate person shall be deemed to have commenced from the date of passing of the resolution under subclause (c) of sub-regulation (1).

Effect of liquidation:

  • The corporate person shall from the liquidation commencement date cease to carry on its business except as far as required for the beneficial winding up of its business.
  • Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-section (1), the corporate person shall continue to exist until it is dissolved under section 59(8).

Appointment of Liquidator:

  1. Subject to regulation 6, the corporate person shall appoint an insolvency professional as liquidator, and, wherever required, may replace him by appointing another insolvency professional as liquidator, by a resolution passed under clause (c) of sub-section (3) of section 59 or clause (c) of sub-regulation (1) of regulation 3, as the case may be.
    Provided that such resolution shall contain the terms and conditions of appointment of the liquidator, including the remuneration payable to him.
  2. The insolvency professional shall, within three days of his appointment as liquidator, intimate the Board about such appointment.

Eligibility for appointment as liquidator:

  1. An insolvency professional shall be eligible to be appointed as a liquidator if he, and every partner or director of the insolvency professional entity of which he is a partner or director is independent of the corporate person.
  2. An insolvency professional shall not be eligible to be appointed as a liquidator if he, or the insolvency professional entity of which he is a partner or director is under a restraint order of the Board.
  3. A liquidator shall disclose the existence of any pecuniary or personal relationship with the concerned corporate person or any of its stakeholders as soon as he becomes aware of it, to the Board and the Registrar.
  4. An insolvency professional shall not continue as a liquidator if the insolvency professional entity of which he is a director or partner, or any other partner or director of such insolvency professional entity represents any other stakeholder in the same liquidation.

Proof of claim: A person, who claims to be a stakeholder, shall prove his claim for debt or dues to him, including interest, if any, as on the liquidation commencement date.
Verification of claims:

  1. The liquidator shall verify the claims submitted within thirty days from the last date for receipt of claims and may either admit or reject the claim, in whole or in part, as the case may be, as per section 40 of the Code.
  2. A creditor may appeal to the Adjudicating Authority against the decision of the liquidator as per section 42 of the Code.

Manner of sale: The liquidator may value and sell the assets of the corporate person in the manner and mode approved by the corporate person in compliance with provisions, if any, in the applicable statute.

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 12.
Explain the provisions regarding Proceeds of Liquidation and Distribution of Proceeds as per “Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Voluntary Liquidation Process) Regulations, 2017”.
Answer:
Provisions regarding to proceeds of liquidation and distribution is as under:
Distribution:

  • The liquidator shall distribute the proceeds from realization within six months from the receipt of the amount to the stakeholders.
  • The liquidation costs shall be deducted before such distribution is made.
  • The liquidator may, with the approval of the corporate person, distribute amongst the stakeholders, an asset that cannot be readily or advantageously sold due to its peculiar nature or other special circumstances.

Completion of liquidation:

  1. The liquidator shall endeavour to complete the liquidation process of the corporate person within twelve months from the liquidation commencement date.
  2. In the event of the liquidation process continuing for more than twelve months, the liquidator shall hold a meeting of the contributories of the corporate person within fifteen days from the end of the twelve months from the liquidation commencement date, and at the end every succeeding twelve months till dissolution of the corporate person.

Preservation of records:
The liquidator shall preserve a physical or an electronic copy of the reports, registers and books of account referred to in Regulations 8 and 10 for at least eight years after the dissolution of the corporate person, either with himself or with an information utility.

Question 13.
Describe in brief the steps involved in Voluntary Liquidation process with the help of a flowchart.
Answer:
Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material 1
Voluntary Liquidation 0f Companies - CS Professional Study Material 2

Voluntary Liquidation of Companies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 14.
Draft a Resolution for Voluntary Winding up.
Answer:
RESOLUTION FOR VOLUNTARY WINDING UP RESOLUTION FOR VOLUNTARY WINDING-UP AS APPROVED BY THE MEMBERS OF ______________ (NAME OF THE CORPORATE PERSON) ATTHE EXTRA ORDINARY GENERAL MEETING HELD ON AT ______________ (DAY AND DATE) ______________ AT ______________ (PLACE)AT ______________ (TIME)
APPROVAL OF VOLUNTARY LIQUIDATION OF THE COMPANY AND APPOINTMENT OF INSOLVENCY PROFESSIONAL AS LIQUIDATOR RESOLVED THAT pursuant to the provisions of Section 59 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 read with Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board (Voluntary Liquidation Process) Regulations, 2017, any other legislations governing voluntary liquidation and the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 as may be applicable and subject to approval of creditors having atleast two-thirds in value of the debts of the corporate person within seven days of this resolution, the consent of the members of ……………………………….. (name of the Corporate Person) be and is hereby accorded to initiate voluntary liquidation of ……………………………….. (name of the Corporate Person). RESOLVED
FURTHER THAT Ms/Mr. Insolvency Professional holding Registration Number being eligible to be appointed as liquidator pursuant to the provisions of Regulation 6 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Voluntary Liquidation Process) Regulation, 2017, be and is hereby appointed to act as the liquidator of ……………………………….. (name of the Corporate Person) and subject to approval of creditors having atleast two-thirds in value of the debts of the corporate person within seven days of this resolution, on the remuneration of ₹ (Rupees in Words’) exclusive of costs of engaging other professionals, statutory expenses, expenses incurred on publication of notices, other incidental expenses and applicable taxes.
RESOLVED FURTHER THAT all the directors of the Company and Liquidator be and are hereby severally and/ or jointly authorised to and take such steps and to do all such acts, deeds and things as may be necessary to give effect to the aforesaid resolution.

Question 15.
Draft a format for Declaration of Solvency.
Answer:
DECLARATION OF SOLVENCY
We, Mr. X and Mr. P, only directors of ABC Private Limited do solemnly affirm and declare that we have made a full enquiry into the affairs of this company, and that having done so, we have formed the opinion that this Company has no debts or if claimed during the liquidation process, the company will be able to pay its debts/ claims in full from the proceeds of assets to be sold in liquidation within a period of six months from the date of commencement of liquidation, and we append a statement of the Company’s assets and liabilities as at ______________ being the latest practicable date before the making of this declaration. We also solemnly affirm and declared that no business and no transaction of any kind has been carried for the period from ______________ till the date of the Board Meeting to be held on xx.xx.xx17 in which Declaration of solvency has been placed, and we make this solemn declaration believing the same to be true.
The Declaration of solvency has been submitted to the Board Meeting not to defraud the Creditors. Government, any other company, firm and other person. Solemnly affirmed and declare at (PLACE) on (DATE), before me. ______________
Mr. X
DIN: xxxxx
Address:
______________
Mr. Y
DIN: xxxxx
Address:

Liquidation of Corporate Person – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 7 Liquidation of Corporate Person – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Liquidation of Corporate Person – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
‘Liquidation is the last process, when the resolution plan fails’. What are the triggers when there is no alternate except to move for the liquidation? (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
Section 33 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lists out the triggers for initiating the liquidation process for corporate persons. Section 33 of the Code provides as under:
1. Where the Adjudicating Authority,
(a) before the expiry of the insolvency resolution process period or the maximum period permitted for completion of the corporate insolvency resolution process under section 12 of the Code or the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process under section 56 of the Code, as the case may be, does not receive a resolution plan under sub-section (6) of section 30 of the Code; or
(b) rejects the resolution plan under section 31 for the non-compliance of the requirements specified therein, it shall

  • pass an order requiring the corporate debtor to be liquidated in the manner as laid down in this Chapter;
  • issue a public announcement stating that the corporate debtor is in liquidation; and
  • require such order to be sent to the authority with which the corporate debtor is registered.

2. Where the resolution professional, at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process but before confirmation of resolution plan, intimates the adjudicating Authority of the decision of the committee of creditors approved by not less than sixty-six per cent of the voting share to liquidate the corporate debtor, the Adjudicating Authority shall pass a liquidation order as referred to in sub-clauses(i), (ii) and (iii) of Clause (b) sub-section (1).

3. Where the resolution pan approved by the Adjudicating Authority is contravened by the concerned corporate debtor, any person other than the corporate debtor, whose interests are prejudicially affected by such contravention, may make an application to the Adjudicating Authority for a liquidation order as referred to in sub-clauses (i),(ii),(iii) of clause (b) sub-section (1).

4. On receipt of an application under sub-section (3), if the Adjudicating Authority determines that the corporate debtor has contravened the provisions of the resolution plan, it shall pass a liquidation order as referred to in sub-clauses(i),(ii) and (iii) of clause (b) of sub-section(l).

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
In an Insolvency Resolution Process, a secured creditor enjoys preferential treatment in the process when compared to other categories of creditors. What are the rights of a secured creditor? (Dec 2019, 4 marks)
Answer:
Section 31B of the Recovery of Debts and Bankruptcy Act, 1993: Priority to Secured Creditors.
Notwithstanding anything contained in any other law for the time being in force, the rights of secured creditors to realize secured debts due and payable to them by sale of assets over which security interest is created, shall have priority and shall be paid in priority over all other debts and government dues including revenues, taxes, cesses and other rates due to the Central Government, State Government or local authority. Explanation- For the purposes of this section, it is hereby clarified that on or after the commencement of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, in cases where insolvency or bankruptcy proceedings are pending in respect of secured assets of the borrower, priority to secured creditors in payment of debt shall be subject to the provisions of that Code.

  1. any amount due to Central Government and the State Government including the amount to be received on account of the Consolidated Fund of India and the Consolidated Fund of a State, if any, in respect of the whole or any part of the period of two years preceding the liquidation commencement date;
  2. debts owed to secured creditor for any amount unpaid following the enforcement of security interest;

Question 3.
What is the relevant period for avoiding any undervalued transactions? (Dec 2019, 3 marks)
Answer:
The relevant period for avoiding any undervalued transaction is contained in Section 46 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. It states that if in an application, the Liquidator or Resolution Professional demonstrates,
(a) That the transaction was entered with any person within the period of one year preceding the Insolvency Commencement Date; or
(b) That the transaction was made within a related party within a period of two years preceding the Insolvency Commencement Date.
The Adjudicating Authority may require an independent expert to assess evidence relating to the value of the transactions mentioned in this section.

Question 4.
You have been invited to ‘attend a Committee of Creditors meeting in which you are proposed to be appointed as Resolution Professional. At the Meeting, the Interim Resolution Professional has informed the Committee that certain ‘preferential transactions’ and ‘undervalued transactions’ might have taken place in the Corporate Debtor. Write a brief note to the Committee of Creditors about ‘preferential transactions’, ‘undervalued transactions’, relevant time of such transactions and exceptions to such transactions as per the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (Dec 2020, 12 marks)
Answer:
Preferential Transactions and Relevant Time
Related parties often possess information of the corporate debtor’s financial affairs and may collude with him to siphon off assets with the knowledge that the corporate debtor might become insolvent in the near future.
Section 43 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with Preferential Transactions and Relevant Time. Section 43(1) of the Code provides that where the liquidator or the resolution professional, as the case may be, is of the opinion that the corporate debtor has at a relevant time given a preference in such transactions and in such manner as laid down in sub-section (2) to any persons as referred to in sub-section (4), he shall apply to the Adjudicating Authority for avoidance of preferential transactions and for, one or more of the orders referred to in Section 44.

Exception: According to Section 43(2) of the Code, a corporate debtor shall be deemed to have given a preference, if- (a) there is a transfer of property or an interest thereof of the corporate debtor for the benefit of a creditor or a surety or a guarantor for or on account of an antecedent financial debt or operational debt or other liabilities owed by the corporate debtor; and (b) the transfer under clause (a) has the effect of putting such creditor or a surety or a guarantor in a beneficial position than it would have been in the event of a distribution of assets being made in accordance with Section 53.
Section 43(3) of the Code states that for the purposes of sub-section (2), a preference shall not include the following transfers- (a) transfer made in the ordinary course of the business or financial affairs of the corporate debtor or the transferee; (b) any transfer creating a security interest in property acquired by the corporate debtor to the extent that – (i) such security interest secures new value and was given at the time of or after the signing of a security agreement that contains a description of such property as security interest, and was used by corporate debtor to acquire such property; and (ii) such transfer was registered with an information utility on or before thirty days after the corporate debtor receives possession of such property: Provided that any transfer made in pursuance of the order of a court shall not, preclude such transfer to be deemed as giving of preference by the corporate debtor.

Explanation: For the purpose of sub-section (3) of this Section, “new value” means money or its worth in goods, services, or new credit, or release by the transferee of property previously transferred to such transferee in a transaction that is neither void nor voidable by the liquidator or the resolution professional under this Code, including proceeds of such property, but does not include a financial debt or operational debt substituted for existing financial debt or operational debt.
As per Section 43(4) of the Code, a preference shall be deemed to be given at a relevant time, if – (a) It is given to a related party (other than by reason only of being an employee), during the period of two years preceding the insolvency commencement date; or (b) a preference is given to a person other than a related party during the period of one year preceding the insolvency commencement date.
When transaction shall be considered undervalued: Section 45(2) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that a transaction shall be considered undervalued where the corporate debtor:
(a) makes a gift to a person: or
(b) enters into a transaction with a person which involves the transfer of one or more assets by the corporate debtor for a consideration the value of which is significantly less than the value of the consideration provided by the corporate debtor, and such transaction has not taken place in the ordinary course of business of the corporate debtor.
Relevant Period for Avoidable Transactions: Section 46 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 prescribes the relevant period during which a transaction must be entered into for it to be challenged as a transaction at undervalue. According to Section 46(1), in an application for avoiding a transaction at undervalue, the liquidator or the resolution professional, as the case may be, shall demonstrate that

  • such transaction was made with any person within the period of one year preceding the insolvency commencement date: or
  • such transaction was made with a related party within the period of two years preceding the insolvency commencement date.

Section 46(2) empowers the Adjudicating Authority to require an independent expert to assess evidence relating to the value of the transactions mentioned in Section 46.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 5.
A Financial Creditor filed an Application for a declaration that the Resolution Applicant. ABC Ltd. and its promoters have knowingly contravened the terms of the resolution plan, having failed to implement the same and for the reinstatement of the Committee of Creditors (CoC) to run the Corporate Debtor, as a going concern. Referring relevant case explain whether the Financial Creditor will succeed. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
In the case of Corporate Bank vs. Amtek Auto Ltd. & Ors. the Financial Creditors filed an Application for a declaration that the Resolution Applicant, Liberty House Group PTE Ltd. and its promoters have knowingly contravened the terms of the resolution plan, having failed to implement the same and for the reinstatement of the Committee of Creditors (CoC) to run the Corporate Debtor, as a going concern.
The NCLT held that the Resolution Applicant is not capable of implements of resolution plan. It allowed the application and excluded the time from the date when Decan Valuers Investors LP, the only other Resolution Applicant, submitted its plan up to the date of receipt of this order from the CIRP period. It observed: “No matter if the corporate debtor ultimately has to face liquidation, but the permission to restart process, make advertisement and invite fresh plans etc., would defeat the very mandate of Section 12 of the Code.”
The Committee of Creditors can only discuss the Resolution Plan which was submitted by DVI (Decan Valuers Investors LP) only by exculsion of certain period of time while calculating 270 days. “It, however, granted liberty to any member of the CoC or the Resolution Professional to file a complaint before the IBBI of the Central Government with a request to file a criminal complaint.“

Question 6.
Read the following carefully and answer the questions given at the end:
Pine Food Industries Limited (“PFIL”) is one of the top FMCG player and listed entity in India. It is a leading manufacturer and marketer of various edible oils, food products and eatables. Its Authorized Capital is ₹252.00 crore and Paid-up Capital is ₹65.00 crore. PFIL has borrowed from various Banks and Financial institutions in India and its borrowings were around ₹12,000 Crore.
Due to unprecedented crash in global prices of the oil seeds coupled with falling revenues in the oil business gave a crippling blow to PFIL.
AB Bank and BC Bank filed an application under section 7 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (“Code”) for initiating the insolvency resolution process against PFIL (hereinafter called as the Corporate Debtor (“CD”)). After hearing both the parties, National Company Law Tribunal (“NCLT1) admitted the petition filed. The Financial Creditor proposed the name of Kapoor to act as Interim Resolution Professional (“IRP”).
An application was filed before NCLT by one of the creditors who made a claim before the Resolution Professional (“RP”) stating that the CD owed to pay USD 10.00 crore, based on the Bills of Exchanges, ordering the CD to pay this creditor for the goods supplied by another party. On making of such claim before the RP, it has been rejected by him saying that it is not a Financial Debt as it is an Operational Debt therefore, it could not be considered as Financial Debt as claimed by applicant therein.
Vijay Kumar Jain, suspended Director of the CD, filed an application before the NCLT under section 60(5) of the Code seeking an order for setting aside the decision taken by the Committee of Creditors (“CoC”) disallowing the erstwhile representatives of the Corporate Debtor including Vijay to participate in the CoC meetings; declare that the CoC meeting is non est; direct the RP to ensure active participation of the applicant in the meetings of CoC; provide all the documents and information to the applicant.
RP filed application in NCLT under section 43(1) of the Code for seeking reversal of the amounts that were debited from the current accounts of the CD maintained with XYZ Bank which had been debited by the XYZ Bank before the insolvency commencement date and were utilized against the payment of the dues owed by the CD to a Bank in relation to the Letter of Credit issued by them.
The RP submits that the payment of the impugned amount lead to preferential treatment towards XYZ Bank by the CD as such payment has the effect of putting Respondents (i.e. XYZ Bank) in a beneficial position than it would have been in liquidation of the CD in accordance with Section 53 of the Code. It is further stated by the RP that the payments of the impugned amount by the Corporate Debtor were not in the “ordinary course of business” of the CD.
NCLT, vide its order, held that the respondent Bank, which had debited an amount aggregating to ₹65.98 crores from the current accounts of the Corporate Debtor is directed to reverse the said amount within 30 days from the date of the said order. Since the resolution plan is already submitted and under examination of the CoC without consideration of this amount, therefore the appropriation of this amount will be decided by the CoC. XYZ Bank filed appeal in NCLAT against the order of NCLT.
The main plea taken by the Appellant Bank is that the RP before filing an application under Section 43(1) of the Code formed no independent opinion nor afforded an opportunity to the Appellant to explain about the transactions in question.
The RP called for Expression of Interest (“EOI”). 28 prospective resolution applicants showed their interest out of which two prospective resolution applicants were rejected as one was disqualified under Section 29 A of the Code (being related party) and the other was a financial investor who did not meet the criteria in the EOI evaluation parameters. The applicant reviewed the four Resolution Plans submitted by the Resolution Applicants and found that only the plans submitted by 2 Resolution Applicants (RAI and RA2) provided for the corporate insolvency resolution of the Corporate Debtor as a whole and on a going concern basis.
The RP filed application under section 30(6) of the Code, seeking order for approval of the resolution plan for the Corporate Debtor submitted by the consortium led by PAL. (RA2) as approved by the members of Committee of Creditors (CoC). The said resolution plan was approved by a vote share of 96.85%. RP filed application in NCLT for approval of Resolution Plan. While the said application was pending for consideration before the NCLT, Hon’ble Supreme Court, in Vijay Kumar Jain Vs. Standard Chartered Bank & Ors pronounced the judgment. Under the Judgment of Hon’ble Supreme Court, the approval of the NCLT to the resolution plan of RA2 was interdicted. In compliance of the above-mentioned Hon’ble Supreme Court order, NCLT by its order directed as follows :
“Resolution Professional is directed to comply with the directions of the Hon’ble Supreme Court and submit the report within the stipulated time as provided by the Hon’ble Supreme Court.”
Thereafter, NCLT approved the Resolution Plan submitted by RA2 and passed orders and directions on the reliefs and concession sought.
Since in Para 38, NCLT in their order rejected some of the relief sought, RA2 moved to NCLT for modification of order of NCLT.
In the application filed, RA2 had sought substitution of Para 38 of the order of NCLT approving the Resolution Plan of RA2 as under:
Existing Para
“38. Any relief sought for in the Resolution Plan, where the contract/agreement/understanding/ proceedings/actions/notice etc is not specifically identified or is for future and contingent liability, is at this moment rejected.”
Proposed Para
“All claims that were either not filed or not admitted during CIRP in terms of the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 shall stand extinguished. Further, claims admitted/ verified by the Resolution Professional shall stand settled and extinguished as per the Resolution Plan.”
Resolution Plan approved by NCLT of RA2 leads to a 60% haircut for the lenders. RA2 completed its acquisition of PFIL. Referring decided case and relevant provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), 2016 and Rules and Regulations made thereunder, answer the following questions:
(a) Whether formation of Joint Lender Forum will have any bearing over filing of this case or not ? Brief, referring the provisions of IBC, 2016, who can initiate the case under the Code. (Aug 2021, 10 marks)
(b) In the instant case explain whether Vijay Kumar Jain succeeded in his contention. Referring Supreme Court’s decision, discuss the role and position of suspended Board of Directors in the Committee of Creditors. (Aug 2021, 10 marks)
(c) Explain the decision of NCLAT in the aforesaid case filed by XYZ Bank for Section 43 transactions. Referring relevant provisions, brief against whom the application under Section 43 of the IB Code can be filed and what orders can be passed thereunder. (Aug 2021, 10 marks)
(d) Whether Resolution Applicant has powers to request for modification of NCLT’s Order on Resolution Plan. Discuss whether NCLT has powers to modify or revise its own order made under the IB Code. (Aug 2021, 10 marks)
Answer:
(a) It has already been held by the Hon’ble NCLAT in the case of Innoventive Industries Ltd.vs. ICICI Bank Ltd. that Joint Lender Forum proceeding pending against the corporate debtor will not have any bearing on the cases initiated under Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), therefore, this plea is hereby dismissed without having any further consideration on this point.
The corporate debtor counsel relied upon IDFC Bank Ltd vs. Ruchi Soya Industries (Bom HC Com. Petition 570/2016, Central Bank of India vs. Ravindra (2002) 1 sec 367, Essar Steel India Ltd. vs. RBI (SCA 12434 of 2017 dated 31.07.2017) to say that when a scheme is proposed for settlement of the creditors dues, the creditors will have to wait for settlement of their dues, it is not correct proposition of law as against IBC proceedings for two reasons, one-a mechanism recommended by RBI Circular will not have any bearing on IBC proceedings owing to non-obstante clause present in Insolvency and
Bankruptcy Code, it has been settled by Hon’ble NCLAT as well as Hon’ble Supreme Court in Innoventive Industries Ltd. vs. ICICI Bank Ltd. (SC dated 31.08.2017) and this Bench in between Indian bank vs. Varun Resources Ltd. (NCLT Mumbai dated 14.06.2017) that RBI Circulars will not have any binding nature on the proceeding under IBC.
Based on the above, Joint application made by the Financial Creditors are allowed. Section 7(a) of the IBC also allows filling of joint application by the Financial Creditors.

The following persons can initiate the case under IBC, in case of default:
Financial Creditors: Financial creditors may either be secured creditors or unsecured creditors. The main difference between secured and unsecured financial creditors is that in the event of liquidation and asset distribution proceedings, secured creditors are given a higher priority than unsecured creditors.
When compared to operational creditors, the procedure for financial creditors to initiate insolvency proceedings is a lot easier.
The IBC allows financial creditors to make an application to the NCLT directly and such financial creditors will only need to show that there is a default.
It is also important to note that only financial creditors constitute the committee of creditors, and no operational can be part of this committee.

Operational Creditor: The term operational creditor has been defined under Section 5(20) of the IBC as any person to whom operational debt is owed or to whom such debt has be’en assigned.
Operational debt has been defined in the IBC as a claim in respect of the provision of goods or services, inculding employment or dues payable of any governmental authority.
An operational creditor, while filling an application for corporate insolvency resolution before the NCLT against an operational debtor, in addition to the requirements of proving default, will also have to prove that there is no dispute which exists between the operational creditors and the debtor with respect to the amounts due.
Corporate Debtor: Under Section 6 of the IBC, the Company itself (being a corporate debtor) can initiate the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process.

(b) In the case of Vijay Kumar Jain vs.Standard Chartered Bank and others 2019 SCC online SC103, The Hon’ble NCLT held that the directors have the right to attend the Committee of Creditor (COC) meetings as per Section 24 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC).
However, the directors could not receive information that is considered confidential by the resoluation professional or the COC, including the resolution plans.
In the first appeal, the decision of the NCLT was upheld by the Appellate Tribunal. The Director then moved the Supreme Court, challenging the decision of the Appellate Tribunal.
The Hon’ble Supreme Court held that the scheme of the code makes it clear that the directors, thought not members of the COC, have a right to participate in every meeting of The COC. Ind addition, for effective participation as vitally interested parties in discussion on resolution plans, they have the right to receive copies of the resolution plans presented to the COC.
The Hon’ble Supreme Court also clarified that under Regulation 21 (3)(iii) of the CIRP Regulations, the notice of the CoC meeting, which is required to be given to the directors as well must contain copies of all the documents relevant for matters to be discussed, including the resolution plans.
The Hon’ble Supreme Court considered the directors to be vitally interested on two counts:
1. Such directors are often guarantors and bound by the approved plan, which may scale down their own debts.
2. The directors, being well versed in the affairs of the company, may be able to assist the CoC, on determining whether the resolution plan addresses the cause of default by the company (a mandatory requirement for resolution plans).

The Hon’ble Supreme Court also clarified that any concerns over breach of confidentiality may be alleviated by the resolution professional obtaining a confidentiality undertaking from the directors, which may also contain an indemnity to the resolution professional against any breach.
Of course, this judgement operates along with the judgements of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Swiss Ribbons Pvt. Ltd. & Anr. Vs. Union of India and K. Sashidharvs. indian Overseas Bank & Ors., that have established the finality and non-justifiability of the decisions of the CoC as regards commercial feasibility and viability of a resolution plan. On a positive note, this will enhance transparency and openness in CoCs. For now, the Suspended directors, though they have no vote, have a seat on the table.

(c) In the case of Shailendra Ajmera, R.P. of RuchiSoya Industries Ltd. vs. ICICI Bank & Others, Resolution Professional filed an application in NCLT, Mumbai Bench under section 43(1) of the Code for seeking reversal of the amounts that were debited from the current accounts of the Corporate Debtor (CD) maintained with ICICI Bank which had been debited by the ICICI Bank before the insolvency Commencement date and were utilized against the payment of the dues owed by the CD to the ICICI in relation to the Letter of Credit issued by ICICI.
The Applicant submitted that the payment of the impugned amounts lead to preferential treatment towards it by the Corporate Debtor as such payment has the effect of putting Respondents in a beneficial position that it would have been in liquidation of th e Corporate Debtor in accordance with Section 53 of the insolvency and Bnakruptcy Code (IBC). It was further stated by the Resolution Professional that the payments of the impugned amount by the Corporate Debtor were not in the “ordinary course of business” of the Corporate Debtor.
The Respondent submitted that the said three transactions, like all other LC transactions involving the Corporate Debtor, were carried out by the Respondent, as per the aforesaid ordinary course of conduct. It was hence submitted by the Respondent that the LC transactions are excluded from the provisions of Section 43 since they were in the “ordinary course of business.”
NCLT vide its order directed the respondent ICICI Which had debited ₹ 27.35 crore, ₹ 10.63 crore and ₹ 28 crore aggregating of ₹ 65.98 crores from the current accounts of the Corporate Debtors to reverse the said amount within 30 days from the date of order. Since the resolution plan is already submitted and under examination of the CoC without consideration of this amount, therefore, the appropriation of this amount will be decided by the CoC.
The appellant Bank filed appeal in NCLAT against the order. The proceeding were related to transactions were the transaction undertake by the Appellant pursuant to the ‘Working Capital Consortium Agreement’ entered into between the Appellant and the ‘Corporate Debtor’ and the ‘Renewal Credit Arrangement’ executed between the Appellant and the ‘Corporate Debtor’ providing overall limit of ‘Letter of Credit’ facility for the period ending 15th December 2017.
The main plea taken by the Appellant Bank is that the ‘Resolution Professional’ before filling an application under Section 43(1) of the insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) formed no opinion independently nor afforded an opportunity to the Appellant to explain about the transactions in question.
NCLAT after hearing both the parties held that NCLT failed to notice that fact that all the transactions were not made on or after the date of commencement of the ‘Corporate insolvency resolution process’ and in ordinary course of business and in View of such position set aside the impugned order and allowed the appeal.

(d) In the case of M/s Ruchi Soya Industries Limited vs. Patanjali Ayurveda Ltd, NCLT clarified that no party had any right to dictate the terms of order. There was no need to substitute Para 38 with the proposed para as mentioned in the application.
Anyone who had not filed its claim then he would not have any right to agitate the same after the approval of the resolution plan. Resolution Applicants accepted the terms of the modified resolution plan as had been approved by this Bench by submitting an affidavit in compliance of the order.
The NCLT has got powers to review its own orders as given below: Section 420(2) of the Companies Act, 2013:
The tribunal may, at any time within two years from the date of the order, with a view to rectifying any mistake apparent from the record, amend any order passed by it, and shall make such amendment, if the mistake is brought to its notice by the prices:
Provided that no such amendment shall be made in respect of any order against which an appeal has been preferred under this Act.
Rule 11 of the NCLT Rules, 2016:
Nothing in these rules shall be deemed to limit or otherwise affect the inherent posers of the Tribunal to make such orders as may be necessary for meeting the ends of justice or to prevent abuse of the process of the Tribunal.
Rule 155 of the NCLT Rules, 2016:
The Tribunal may, within a period of thirty days from the date of completion of pleadings, and on such terms as to costs or otherwise, as it may think fit, amend any detect or error in any proceeding before it; and all necessary amendments shall be made for the purpose of determining the real question or issue raised by or depending on such proceeding.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
A Resolution Professional appointed under Insolvency & Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC, 2016), placed before the Committee of Creditors (CoC), a Consortium of Banks, a Resolution Plan submitted to him. The CoC approved the Resolution Plan and National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), sanctioned it. As the Liquidation Value is not sufficient and there is a hair-cut involved in the dues payable to the secured financial creditors, nothing is provided for the Operational Creditors under the Resolution Plan. The Operational Creditor aggrieved by the decision of the NCLT filed Appeal before National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT). The contention of the Operational Creditor is that the Resolution Plan approved is not in compliance with the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 and the Regulations made thereunder:
(a) Referring suitable case law answer whether the contention of Operational Creditor is Correct. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
(b) Will your answer be different if it is a Liquidation case, listing out the order of priority in case of corporate persons, explain the position of the unsecured Financial creditor and unsecured Operational creditor of a Corporate Debtor under Liquidation? (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
(a) In case of Hammond Power Soluation Pvt. Ltd. vs. Sanjit Kumar & ORS, the Hon’ble NCLAt has set aside the Resolution plan and Matter remitted back to NCLT and observed that:
If the above minutes are perused, it can be hardly said that there are any reasons given by the Committee to demonstrate that it has taken care of interest of all stakeholders. Para-46 of the Judgement in the matter of “Committee of Creditor of Essar Steel India Limited vs. Satish Kumar Gupta & Ors.” (Civil Appeal No. 8766-67 of 2019) in the judgement dated 15th November, 2019 [“Essar Steel”] requires to see “the reasons given by the Committee of Creditors while approving a resolution plan” from point of view stated in the paragraph.

The reasons for giving NIL to operational Creditors is not reflected from record. We have already reproduced portion from Part-B Financial Proposal with regards to what the approved Resolution Plan states regarding dues to the Operational Creditors. The proposal is based on the assessment that there is no liquidation value due to Operational Creditors. Although it is not stated but there is reason to doubt that the Resolution Applicants were aware of the liquidation value. There is no dispute that so many of the Operational Creditors have been left high and dry giving them nil amount which Hon’ble Supreme Court has observed that giving NIL to Operational Creditors “would certainly not balance the interest of all stakeholders of maximise the value of assets of the Corporate Debtor if it becomes impossible to continue running its business as a going concern.”
For these reasons, we find that the impugned Order accepting the Resolution Plan cannot be upheld. The Resolution Plan does not appear to have taken care of interest of all stakeholders including Operational
Creditors and the decision of the CoC also does not reflect that it has taken into account the fact that the Corporate Debtor needs to be kept as a going concern and that there is need to maximise the value of the assets and that the interest of all the stakeholders including Operational Creditors has to be taken care of.
For the above reasons, we set aside the impugned Order and remit the matter back to the Adjudicating Authority with a direction to send back the Resolution Plan to the Committee of Creditors to resubmit the Plan after satisfying the parameters as laid down by the Hon’ble Supreme Court in the Judgement in the matter of “Essar Steel”, portions of which have been reproduced above, and IBC.
The Adjudicating Authority may give specific time period of the Resolution Professional to place matter before Committed of Creditors for resubmitting the Resolution Plan satisfying the parameter laid down by the Hon’ble Supreme Court and IBC. Further incidental Orders may also be passed. On resubmission of the Resolution Plan, the Adjudicating Authority will deal with the same in accordance with law.

(b) In case of Liquidation the order of Priority as set out in Section 53 of the Insolvency andl Bankruptcy Code (IBC) have to be followed. In case no amount is left with after satisfaction of Secured Creditors, Operational Creditors cannot claim any amount.
Order of priority-Sub-section (1) of Section 53 provides that notwithstanding any thing to the country contained in any law enacted by the Parliament of any State Legislature for the time being in force, the proceeds from the sale of the liquidation assets shall be distributed in the following order of priority and within such period as may be specified, namely: –
(a) the insolvency resolution process costs and the liquidation costs paid in full
(b) the following debts which shall rank equally between and among the following:
(i) Workmen’s dues for the period of twenty-four mnonths proceding the liquidation commencement dat; and
(ii) debts owed to a secured creditor in the event such secured creditor has relinquished security in the manner set out in section 52
(c) wages and any unpaid dues owed to employees other than workmen for the period of twelve months preceding the liquidation commencement date
(d) financial debts owed to unsecured creditors
(e) the following dues shall rank equally between and among the following:
(i) Any amount due to the Central Government and the State Government including the amount to be received on account of the Consolidated Fund of India and the Consolidated Fund of a State, If any, in respect of the whole or any party of the period of two years preceding the liquidation commencement date
(ii) debts owed to a secured credit or for any amount unpaid following the enforcement of security interest
(f) any remaining debts and dues
(g) preference shareholders, if any; and
(h) equity shareholders, or partners, as the case may be. As per the order of priority as mentioned above, unsecured Financial Creditors ranks above the Operational Creditors.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 8.
Liquidation of corporate person is considered to be the last resort in order to recover money. Comment.
Answer:

  • Liquidation of corporate person is considered to be the last resort in order to recover money.
  • When the resolution plan has failed and no other way could be adopted then dissolution of company is the only resort.
  • An auction is conducted where the assets of the company is sold to realize money to return it to the lenders.
  • The provisions dealing with the liquidation of corporate persons are covered in the chapter III of the Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy code.
  • Sections 33 to 54 in Chapter III of Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lays down the law relating to liquidation process for corporate persons.

Question 9.
When can the process of liquidation of corporate person can be initiated?
Answer:
Section 33 of the Code lists out the triggers for initiating the liquidation process for corporate persons. Section 33 of the Code states that:
1. Where the Adjudicating Authority,
(a) before the expiry of the insolvency resolution process period or the maximum period permitted for completion of the corporate insolvency resolution process under section 12 or the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process under section 56, as the case may be, does not receive a resolution plan under sub-section (6) of section 30; or
(b) rejects the resolution plan under section 31 for the non-compliance of the requirements specified therein

2. Where the resolution professional, at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process but before confirmation of resolution plan, intimates the Adjudicating Authority of the decision of the committee of creditors approved by not less than sixty-six per cent, of the voting share to liquidate the corporate debtor, the Adjudicating Authority shall pass a liquidation order

3. Where the resolution plan approved by the Adjudicating Authority is contravened by the concerned corporate debtor, any person other than the corporate debtor, whose interests are prejudicially affected by such contravention, may make an application to the Adjudicating Authority for a liquidation order and if the Adjudicating Authority determines that the corporate debtor has contravened the provisions of the resolution plan, it shall pass a liquidation order.
Thus, Section 33 provides for the liquidation of the corporate debtor in following four scenarios:

  • Where the Adjudicating Authority does not receive a resolution plan
  • Where the Adjudicating Authority rejects the resolution plan
  • Where, at any time before confirmation of resolution plan, the committee of creditors resolve to liquidate corporate debtor
  • Where the corporate debtor violates the terms of the resolution plan.

Question 10.
Briefly explain the provisions related to appointment of liquidator?
Answer:
Section 34(1) provides that where the Adjudicating Authority passes an order for liquidation of the corporate debtor under section 33, the resolution professional appointed forthe corporate insolvency resolution process under Chapter II shall, subject to submission of a written consent by the resolution professional to the Adjudicatory Authority in specified form, shall act as the liquidator for the purposes of liquidation unless replaced by the Adjudicating Authority under subsection (4).

Question 11.
Explain the list of powers and duties of the liquidator as per Section 35 of the Act.
Answer:
Section 35(1) provides that subject to the directions of the Adjudicating Authority, the liquidator shall have the following powers and duties:
(a) to verify claims of all the creditors;
(b) to take into his custody or control all the assets, property, effects and actionable claims of the corporate debtor;
(c) to evaluate the assets and property of the corporate debtor in the manner as may be specified by the Board and prepare a report;
(d) to take such measures to protect and preserve the assets and properties of the corporate debtor as he considers necessary;
(e) to carry on the business of the corporate debtor for its beneficial liquidation as he considers necessary;
(f) subject to section 52, to sell the immovable and movable property and actionable claims of the corporate debtor in liquidation by public auction or private contract, etc.
(g) to draw, accept, make and endorse any negotiable instruments including bill of exchange, hundi or promissory note in the name and on behalf of the corporate debtor.
(h) to take out, in his official name, letter of administration to any deceased contributory and to do in his official name any other act necessary for obtaining payment of any money due and payable from a contributory or his estate which cannot be ordinarily done in the name of the corporate debtor.
(i) to obtain any professional assistance from any person or appoint any professional, in discharge of his duties, obligations and responsibilities;
(j) to invite and settle claims of creditors and claimants and distribute proceeds in accordance with the provisions of this Code;
(k) to institute or defend any suit, prosecution or other legal proceedings, civil or criminal, in the name of on behalf of the corporate debtor;
(l) to investigate the financial affairs of the corporate debtor to determine undervalued or preferential transactions;
(m) to take all such actions, steps, or to sign, execute and verify any paper, deed, receipt document, application, petition, affidavit, bond or instrument and for such purpose to use the common seal, if any, as may be necessary for liquidation, distribution of assets and in discharge of his duties and obligations and functions as liquidator;
(n) to apply to the Adjudicating Authority for such orders or directions as may be necessary for the liquidation of the corporate debtor and to report the progress of the liquidation process in a manner as may be specified by the Board
(o) to perform such other functions as may be specified by the Board.
(p) the liquidator shall have the power to consult any of the stakeholders entitled to a distribution of proceeds under section 53.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 11.
Section 36 provides for the creation of a liquidation estate comprising the assets of the corporate debtor. Briefly explain the meaning of liquidity estate?
Answer:
Meaning of Liquidation estate:

  • Section 36 provides for the creation of a liquidation estate comprising the assets of the corporate debtor
  • Section 36(1) provides that for the purpose of liquidation, the liquidator shall form an estate of the assets mentioned in sub-section (3), which will be called the liquidation estate in relation to the corporate debtor
  • Section 36(2) further provides that the liquidator shall hold the liquidation estate as a fiduciary for the benefit of all the creditors.

Question 12.
Which are the assets that will form part of Liquidation estate?
Answer:
Section 36(3) provides that subject to sub-section (4), the liquidation estate shall comprise all liquidation estate assets which shall include the following:
(a) any assets over which the corporate debtor has ownership rights, including all rights and interests therein as evidenced in the balance sheet of the corporate debtor or an information utility or records in the registry or any depository recording securities of the corporate debtor or by any other means as may be specified by the Board, including shares held in any subsidiary of the corporate debtor;
(b) assets that may or may not be in possession of the corporate debtor including but not limited to encumbered assets;
(c) tangible assets, whether movable or immovable;
(d) intangible assets including but not limited to intellectual property, securities (including shares held in a subsidiary of the corporate debtor) and financial instruments, insurance policies, contractual rights;
(e) assets subject to the determination of ownership by the court or authority;
(f) any assets or their value recovered through proceedings for avoidance of transactions in accordance with this Chapter;
(g) any asset of the corporate debtor in respect of which a secured creditor has relinquished security interest;
(h) any other property belonging to or vested in the corporate debtor at the insolvency commencement date;
(i) all proceeds of liquidation as and when they are realised. What shall not be included in the liquidation estate assets.

Question 13.
Which are the assets that will not form part of Liquidation estate?
Answer:
According to section 36(4), the following shall not be included in the liquidation estate assets and shall not be used for recovery in the liquidation:
(a) assets owned by a third party which are in possession of the corporate debtor, including –

  • assets held in trust for any third party;
  • bailment contracts;
  • all sums due to any workmen or employee from the provident fund, the pension fund and the gratuity‘fund;
  • other contractual arrangements which do not stipulate transfer of title but only use of the assets;
  • such other assets as may be notified by the Central Government in consultation with any financial sector regulator;

(b) assets in security collateral held by financial services providers and are subject to netting and set-off in multi-lateral trading or clearing transactions;
(c) personal assets of any shareholder or partner of a corporate debtor as the case may be provided such assets are not held on account of avoidance transactions that may be avoided under this Chapter;
(d) assets of any Indian or foreign subsidiary of the corporate debtor;
(e) any other assets as may be specified by the Board, including assets which could be subject to set-off on account of mutual dealings between the corporate debtor and any creditor.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 14.
Explain the procedure to be followed by liquidator with regards to claims of creditors.
Answer:

  • Section 38(1) provides that the liquidator shall receive or collect the claims of creditors within a period of thirty days from the date of the commencement of the liquidation process
  • According to section 38(2), a financial creditor may submit a claim to the liquidator by providing a record of such claim with an information utility.
  • An operational creditor may submit a claim to the liquidator in such form and in such manner and along with such supporting documents required to prove the claim as may be specified by the Board
  • According to section 39(1), the liquidator shall verify the claims submitted under section 38 within such time as specified by the Board.
  • The liquidator may, after verification of claims under section 39, either admit or reject the claim, in whole or in part, as the case may be
  • The liquidator shall communicate his decision of admission or rejection of claims to the creditor and corporate debtor within seven days of such admission or rejection of claims.
  • Section 41 provides that the liquidator shall determine the value of claims admitted under section 40 in such manner as may be specified by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India.

Question 15.
Explain the provisions of preferential transactions as per Section 43 of the Act.
Answer:

  • Related parties often possess information of the corporate debtor’s financial affairs and may collude with him to siphon off assets with the knowledge that the corporate debtor might become insolvent in the near future.
  • Section 43 invalidates transfer of property or an interest thereof given during the relevant time to a person for the benefit of a creditor, surety or guarantor on account of antecedent debt or other liabilities which have the effect of putting such creditor, surety or guarantor in a better position than the position which he would have been in if such transfer had not been made.
  • Section 43(1) lays down that where the liquidator or the resolution professional, as the case may be, is of the opinion that the corporate debtor has at a relevant time given a preference in such transactions and in such manner as laid down in sub-section (2) of section 43 to any persons as referred to in sub-section (4), he shall apply to the Adjudicating Authority for avoidance of preferential transactions and for, one or more of the orders referred to in section 44.
  • According to section 43(2), a corporate debtor shall be deemed to have given a preference, if-
    • there is a transfer of property or an interest thereof of the corporate debtor for the benefit of a creditor or a surety or a guarantor for or on account of an antecedent financial debt or operational debt or other liabilities owed by the corporate debtor; and
    • the transfer has the effect of putting such creditor or a surety or a guarantor in a beneficial position than it would have been in the event of a distribution of assets being made in accordance with section 53.
  • Section 43(3) provides that for the purposes of sub-section (2), a preference shall not include the following transfers:
    • transfer made in the ordinary course of the business or financial affairs of the corporate debtor or the transferee;
    • any transfer creating a security interest in property acquired by the corporate debtor to the extent that –
      (i) such security interest secures new value and was given at the time of or after the signing of a security agreement that contains a description of such property as security interest, and was used by corporate debtor to acquire such property; and
      (ii) such transfer was registered with an information utility on or before thirty days afterthe corporate debtor receives possession of such property.
  • Section 43(4) lays down that a preference shall be deemed to be given at a relevant time, if –
    • It is given to a related party (other than by reason only of being an employee), during the period of two years preceding the insolvency commencement date; or
    • a preference is given to a person other than a related party during the period of one year preceding the insolvency commencement date.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 16.
Explain the power of Adjudicating Officer with regards to preferential transactions.
Answer:
Section 44 lays down that the Adjudicating Authority, may, on an application made by the resolution professional or liquidator, by an order:
(a) require any property transferred in connection with the giving of the preference to be vested in the corporate debtor;
(b) require any property to be so vested if It represents the application either of the proceeds of sale of property so transferred or of money so transferred;
(c) release or discharge (in whole or in part) of any security interest created by the corporate debtor;
(d) require any person to pay such sums in respect of benefits received by him from the corporate debtor, such sums to the liquidator or the resolution professional, as the Adjudicating Authority may direct;
(e) direct any guarantor, whose financial debts or operational debts owed to any person were released or discharged (in whole or in part) by the giving of the preference, to be under such new or revived financial debts or operational debts to that person as the Adjudicating Authority deems appropriate;
(f) direct for providing security or charge on any property for the discharge of any financial debt or operational debt under the order, and such security or charge to have the same priority as a security or charge released or discharged wholly or in part by the giving of the preference; and
(g) direct for providing the extent to which any person whose property is so vested in the corporate debtor, or on whom financial debts or operational debts are imposed by the order, are to be proved in the liquidation or the corporate insolvency resolution process forfinancial debts or operational debts which arose from, or were released or discharged wholly or in part by the giving of the preference:

Question 17.
Explain the provisions of “Application by Creditor in Cases of Undervalued Transactions”.
Answer:

  • According to section 47(1), where an under valued transaction has taken place and the liquidator or the resolution professional as the case may be, has not reported it to the Adjudicating Authority, a creditor, member or a partner of a corporate debtor, as the case may be, may make an application to the Adjudicating Authority to declare such transactions void and reverse their effect in accordance with this Chapter
  • the Adjudicating Authority, after examination of the application is satisfied that
    (a) undervalued transactions had occurred; and
    (b) liquidator or the resolution professional, as the case may be, after having sufficient information or opportunity to avail information of such transactions did not report such transaction to the Adjudicating Authority,
  • the Adjudicating Authority shall pass an order-
    (a) restoring the position as it existed before such transactions and reversing the effects;
    (b) requiring the Board to initiate disciplinary proceedings against the liquidator or the resolution professional as the case may be.

Question 18.
Explain the provisions of Extortionate Credit Transactions.
Answer:

  • Section 50(1) lays down that where the corporate debtor has been a party to an extortionate credit transaction involving the receipt of financial or operational debt during the period within two years preceding the insolvency commencement date, the liquidator or the resolution professional as the case may be, may make an application for avoidance of such transaction to the Adjudicating Authority if the terms of such transaction required exorbitant payments to be made by the corporate debtor.
  • The Board may specify the circumstances in which a transactions which shall be covered under sub-section (1).
  • Any debt extended by any person providing financial services which is in compliance with any law for the time being in force in relation to such debt shall in no event be considered as an extortionate credit transaction.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 19.
Explain the powers of Adjudicating Authority in Respect of Extortionate Credit Transactions.
Answer:
Section 51 provides that where the Adjudicating Authority after examining the application made under sub-section (1) of section 50 is satisfied that the terms of a credit transaction required exorbitant payments to be made by the corporate debtor, it shall, by an order – (a) restore the position as it existed prior to such transaction;
(b) set aside the whole or part of the debt created on account of the extortionate credit transaction;
(c) modify the terms of the transaction;
(d) require any person who is, or was, a party to the transaction to repay any amount received by such person;
(e) require any security interest that was created as part of the extortionate credit transaction to be relinquished in favour of the liquidator or the resolution professional, as the case may be.

Question 20.
Briefly explain the rights of secured creditor in case of liquidation.
Answer:

  • According to section 52(1), a secured creditor in the liquidation proceedings may
    (a) relinquish its security interest to the liquidation estate and receive proceeds from the sale of assets by the liquidator in the manner specified in section 53; or
    (b) realise its security interest in the manner specified in this section.
  • A secured creditor may enforce, realise, settle, compromise or deal with the secured assets in accordance with such law as applicable to the security interest being realised and to the secured creditor and apply the proceeds to recover the debts due to it.
  • Where the enforcement of the security interest yields an amount by way of proceeds which is in excess of the debts due to the secured creditor, the secured creditor shall- (a) account to the liquidator for such surplus; and (b) tender to the liquidator any’surplus funds received from the enforcement of such secured assets.
  • Where the proceeds of the realisation of the secured assets are not adequate to repay debts owed to the secured creditor, the unpaid debts of such secured creditor shall be paid by the liquidator in the manner specified in clause (e) of sub-section (1) of section 53.

Question 21.
Explain the order of priority with regards to distribution of assets in case of liquidation.
Answer:
Sub-section (1) of section 53 provides that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in any law enacted by the Parliament or any State Legislature for the time being in force, the proceeds from the sale of the liquidation assets shall be distributed in the following order of priority and within such period as may be specified, namely:
(a) the insolvency resolution process costs and the liquidation costs paid in full;
(b) the following debts which shall rank equally between and among the following:
(i) workmen’s dues for the period of twenty-four months preceding the liquidation commencement date; and
(ii) debts owed to a secured creditor in the event such secured creditor has relinquished security in the manner set out in section 52;
(c) wages and any unpaid dues owed to employees other than workmen for the period of twelve months preceding the liquidation commencement date;
(d) financial debts owed to unsecured creditors;
(e) the following dues shall rank equally between and among the following:
(i) any amount due to the Central Government and the State Government including the amount to be received on account of the Consolidated Fund of India and the Consolidated Fund of a State, if any, in respect of the whole or any part of the period of two years preceding the liquidation commencement date;
(ii) debts owed to a secured creditor for any amount unpaid following the enforcement of security interest;
(f) any remaining debts and dues;
(g) preference shareholders, if any;
(h) equity shareholders or partners, as the case may be.
For the purpose of this section-
(i) at each stage of the distribution of proceeds in respect of a class of recipients that rank equally, each of the debts will either be paid in full, or will be paid in equal proportion within the same class of recipients, if the proceeds are insufficient to meet the debts in full; and
(ii) the term “workmen’s dues” shall have the same meaning as assigned to it in section 326 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Liquidation of Corporate Person - CS Professional Study Material

Question 22.
Explain the provisions of dissolution of corporate debtor.
Answer:

  • Section 54 provides that after the affairs of the corporate debtor have been wound up and its assets are completely liquidated, the liquidator shall make an application to the adjudicating authority for the dissolution of the corporate debtor.
  • Where the assets of the corporate debtor have been completely liquidated, the liquidator shall make an application to the Adjudicating Authority for the dissolution of such corporate debtor.
  • The Adjudicating Authority shall on application filed by the liquidator that the corporate debtor shall be dissolved from the date of that order and the corporate debtor shall be dissolved accordingly.
  • A copy of an order shall within seven days from the date of such order, be forwarded to the authority with which the corporate debtor is registered.

Purpose of Valuation – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 2 Purpose of Valuation – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Purpose of Valuation – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material

Question 1.
What do you mean by business valuation? Explain the purpose of valuation.
Answer:
Business Valuation is the process of determining economic value of a business or company. It assesses a variety of factors to determine the fair market value in a sale, but there is no one way to verify the worth of a company. Business valuation can depend on the values of the assessor, tangible and intangible assets, goodwill and varying economic conditions. Business valuation provides an expected price of sale; however, the real price of sale can vary.

It is to be noted that the topic of business valuation is frequently discussed in corporate finance. Business valuation is typically conducted when a company is looking to sell all or a portion of its operations or looking to merge with or acquire another company. The valuation of a business is the process of determining the current worth of a business, using objective measures, and evaluating all aspects of the business. A business valuation might include an analysis of the company’s management, its capital structure, its future earnings prospects or the market value of its assets. The tools used for valuation can vary among valuators, businesses and industries. Common approaches to business valuation include review of financial statements, discounting cash flow models and similar company comparisons.

A business valuation requires a working knowledge of a variety of factors, and professional judgment and experience. This includes recognizing the purpose of the valuation, the value drivers impacting the subject company, and an understanding of industry, competitive and economic factors, as well as the selection and application of the appropriate valuation approach /(es) and method(s).

Some of the significant considerations for undertaking valuation are as under:

  1. What is the purpose of the valuation?
  2. What basis of value should apply?
  3. What premise of value should be used?
  4. What is the subject of the valuation?
  5. How has the business performed historically?
  6. What is the future outlook for the business?
  7. Which valuation approaches should be utilized?
  8. How do you arrive at a conclusion of value?

Business Valuation Purposes
The primary purpose of business valuation is preparing a company for sale, there are many purposes. -The following are a few examples:

Shareholder Disputes: Sometimes a breakup of the company is in the shareholder’s best interests. This could also include transfers of shares from shareholders who are withdrawing.

Estate and Gift: A valuation would need to be done prior to estate planning or a gifting of interests or after the death of an owner. This is also required by the IRS for Charitable donations.

Divorce: When a divorce occurs, a division of assets and business interests is needed.
Mergers, Acquisitions, and Sales: Valuation is necessary to negotiate a merger, acquisition, or sale, so the interested parties can obtain the best fair market price.

Buy-Sell Agreements: This typically involves a transfer of equity between partners or shareholders.
Financing: Have a business appraisal before obtaining a loan, so the banks can validate their investment.

Purchase price allocation: This involves reporting the company’s assets and liabilities to identify tangible and intangible assets.

Question 2.
Discuss reasons and important consideration for merger and acquisition?
Answer:
Mergers and Acquisition
Mergers and acquisitions (M&A) are defined as consolidation of companies. Differentiating the two terms, Mergers is the combination of two companies to form one, while Acquisitions is one company taken over by the other. M&A is one of the major aspects of corporate finance. The reasoning behind M&A generally given is that two separate companies together create more synergy than being existing separately. With the objective of wealth maximization, companies keep evaluating different opportunities through the route of merger or acquisition.

Mergers & Acquisitions can take place:

  • by purchasing assets
  • by purchasing common shares
  • by exchange of shares for assets
  • by exchanging shares for shares

Reasons for Mergers and Acquisitions:

  • Financial synergy for lower cost of capital
  • Improving company’s performance and accelerate growth
  • Economies of scale
  • Diversification for higher growth products or markets
  • To increase market share and positioning giving broader market access
  • Strategic realignment and technological change
  • Tax considerations
  • Undervalued target
  • Diversification of risk

Three important considerations for merger and acquisition that should be taken into account:

  • The company must be willing to take the risk and vigilantly make, investments to benefit fully from the merger as the competitors and the industry take heed quickly
  • To reduce and diversify risk, multiple bets must be made, in order to narrow down to the one that will prove fruitful
  • The management of the acquiring firm must learn to be resilient, patient and be able to adapt to the change owing to ever-changing business dynamics in the industry

Purpose of Valuation - CS Professional Study Material

Question 3.
Discuss the stages of Mergers and Acquisition. What are the reasons for failure of Mergers and Acquisitions.
Answer:
Stages involved in any M&A:
Phase 1: Pre-acquisition Review: This would include self assessment of the acquiring company with regards to the need for M&A, ascertain the valuation (undervalued is the key) and chalk out the growth plan through the target.

Phase 2: Search and Screen Targets: This would include searching for the company that is appropriate for acquisition. This process is mainly to scan for a good strategic fit for the acquiring company.

Phase 3: Investigate and valuation of the Target: Once the appropriate company is shortlisted through primary screening, detailed analysis of the target company has to be done. This is also referred to as due diligence.

Phase 4: Acquire the target through Negotiations: Once the target company is selected, the next step is to start negotiations to come to consensus for a negotiated merger or a bear hug. This brings both the companies to agree mutually to the deal for the long term working of the M&A.

Phase 5: Post Merger Integration: If all the above steps fall in place, there is a formal announcement of the agreement of merger by both the participating companies.

Reasons for the failure of M&A – Analyzed during the stages of M&A: Poor Strategic Fit: Wide difference in objectives and strategies of the company.

Poorly Managed Integration: Integration is often poorly managed without planning and design. This leads to failure of implementation

Incomplete Due Diligence: Inadequate due diligence can lead to failure of M&A as it is the crux of the entire strategy

Overly optimistic: Too optimistic projections about the target company leads to bad decisions and failure of the M&A.

Question 4.
What is the purpose of valuation at the time of mergers and acquisition?
Answer:
Purpose of Valuation in Merger and Acquisition
Business combinations which may take shapes of mergers, acquisitions, amalgamation and takeovers are critical facets of corporate structural changes. They have played a crucial role in the external growth of a number of leading companies across the globe.

Valuation during merger and acquisition is important as it is observed that at times, the merger and acquisition is given a go ahead without enquiring whether there is any potential benefit out of the merger or acquisition.

In a merger or acquisition transaction, valuation is essentially the price that one party will pay for the other, or the value that one side will give up to make the transaction work. Valuations can be made via appraisals or the price of the firm’s stock if it is a public company, but at the end of the day valuation is often a negotiated number.

The most common method is to look at comparable companies in an industry, but deal makers employ a variety of other methods’ and tools when assessing a target company. Here are just a few of them:

1. Discounted Cash Flow (DCF): A key valuation tool in M&A, discounted cash flow analysis determines a company’s current value according to its estimated future cash flows. Forecasted free cash flows (net income + depreciation/amortization – capital expenditures – change in working capital) are discounted to a present value using the company’s weighted average costs of capital (WACC). Admittedly, DCF is tricky to get right, but few tools can rival this valuation method.

2. Comparative Ratios: The following are two examples of the many comparative metrics on which acquiring companies may base their offers:

Price-Earnings Ratio (P/E Ratio) – With the use of this ratio, an acquiring company makes an offer that is a multiple of the earnings of the target company. Looking at the P/E for all the stocks within the same industry group will give the acquiring company good guidance for what the target’s P/E multiple should be. Price-to-Earnings Ratio (P/E) = Market value per share / Earnings Per Share (EPS)

3. Replacement Cost: In few cases, acquisitions are based on the cost of replacing the target company. For the sake of simplicity, suppose the value of a company is simply the sum of all its equipment and staffing costs. The acquiring company can literally order the target to sell at that price, or it will create a competitor for the same cost. Naturally, it takes a long time to assemble good management, acquire property and get the right equipment. But this method of establishing a price certainly wouldn’t make much sense in a service industry where the key assets – people and ideas – are hard to value and develop.

Purpose of Valuation - CS Professional Study Material

Question 5.
What are the reasons for sale of Business?
Answer:
Sale of a Business
The sale of a business usually is not a sale of one asset. Instead, all the assets of the business are sold. Generally, when this occurs, each asset is treated as being sold separately for determining the treatment of gain or loss. A business usually has many assets.

Reasons for Sale of Business:

1. Partnership interests
An interest in a partnership or joint venture is treated as a capital asset when sold. The part of any gain or loss from unrealized receivables or inventory items will be treated as ordinary gain or loss.

2. Corporation interests
Your interest in a corporation is represented by stock certificates. When you sell these certificates, you usually realize capital gain or loss.

3. Corporate liquidations
Corporate liquidations of property generally are treated as a sale or exchange. Gain or loss generally is recognized by the corporation on a liquidating sale of its assets. Gain or loss generally is recognized also on a liquidating distribution of assets as if the corporation sold the assets to the distribute at fair market value.

In certain cases in which the distribute is a corporation in control of the distributing corporation, the distribution may not be taxable.

4. Allocation of consideration paid for a business
The sale of a trade or business for a lump sum is considered a sale of each individual asset rather than of a single asset. Except for assets exchanged under any non-taxable exchange rules, both the buyer and seller of a business must use the residual method to allocate the consideration to each business asset transferred. This method determines gain or loss from the transfer of each asset and how much of the consideration is for goodwill and certain other intangible property. It also determines the buyer’s basis in the business assets.

5. Consideration
The buyer’s consideration is the cost of the assets acquired. The seller’s ‘ consideration is the amount realized (money plus the fair market value of property received) from the sale of assets.

Question 6.
Explain key facts for doing valuation for voluntary Assessment.
Answer:
Voluntary Assessment
The key facts for doing valuation for Voluntary Assessment are:

1. Price is not the same as Value
The Value of a business, by whatever valuation method it is obtained, is not the selling price of the business. Value is an economic concept based on certain data & assumptions, however Price is what a Buyer is willing to pay keeping in consideration the Economic and Non Economic factors like Emotions, Perception, Greed Etc which cannot be valued as such.

2. Value varies with Person, Purpose and Time
The Value is a subjective term and can have different connotations meaning different things to different people and the result may not be the same, as the context or time changes.

3. Transaction concludes at Negotiated Prices
Though the value of a business can be objectively determined employing valuation approaches, this value is still subjective, dependent on buyer and seller expectations and subsequent negotiations and the Transaction happens at negotiated price only.

4. Valuation is Hybrid of Art & Science
Valuation is more of an art and not an exact science. The Art is Professional Judgment and Science is Statistics. Mathematical certainty is neither determined nor indeed is it possible as use of professional judgment is an essential component of estimating value.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 6 Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
General Car Company (GCC) is a manufacturer of passenger cars. It sells the cars through single brand dealerships across different cities. Because of its inability to compete in the market and continuous losses, GCC has decided to exit the passenger car business and notified its dealers about shutdown of passenger car manufacturing and sales in India.
PoineerCars Ltd. is a passenger car dealer for GCC in Kanpur with an office cum, showroom and having three service centers in Kanpur. Pioneer Cars Ltd. has Bank Loan from ABC Bank (B1) and DEF Bank (B2) for 110 Crores and ₹ 7 Crores respectively. The promoters cum directors of Pioneer Cars Ltd. have also given their Personal Guarantee to the bankers along with mortgage charge on the office premises cum showroom of PoineerCars Ltd. Pioneer Cards Ltd. failed to repay the amount borrowed from the Banks. The banks have issued notice to Pioneer Cars Ltd. On receipt of the notice makes the representation that due to the present market conditions, the company is not able to repay the loan amount to the Banks.
One of the Operational Creditors, M/s Radha Automobiles Private Ltd. having an outstanding payment of ₹ 1 Crore has filed an application to initiate insolvency process under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
The NCLT has admitted the Insolvency Application and appointed Ranjeev Kumar Singh, Insolvency Resolution Professional as Interim Resolution Professional. The NCLT has declared moratorium under Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Subsequently, M/s Radha Automobiles Private Ltd. was informed by the consultant about the Fast Track Insolvency Process. M/s Radha Automobiles Private Limited want to convert the existing Resolution Process to Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process.
Poineer Cars Ltd. has contested the application for ‘Conversion of the Corporate Insolvency Process’ into ‘Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’. The promoters and directors have taken a stand that Resolution Process cannot be initiated against them before the NCLT for Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process and it should be filed before Debt Recovery Tribunal.
Question:
Examine whether the NCLT has power to convert the ‘Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ as a ‘Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’, under Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 as request by M/s Radha Automobiles Ltd. Explain with the help of decided case law(s). (Dec 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
The Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process is different from Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process.
As per sub-section (2) of Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, an application for fast track corporate insolvency resolution process may be made in respect of the following corporate debtors, namely:
(a) a corporate debtor whose assets and income is below a level as may be notified by the Central Government.
(b) The corporate debtor with such class of creditors or such amount of debt as may be notified by the Central Government.
(c) Such other category of corporate persons as may be notified by Central Government.

In the question the level of assets of the corporate debtor has not been given and therefore the only conclusion that can be made is that the Corporate Debtor does not come within the category of corporate debtor in terms of clauses (a), (b) or (c) of sub section (2) of Section 55 of the Code. Therefore, Section 55 of the Code cannot be invoked against the corporate debtor. The Adjudicating Authority has no power to convert Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process as Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process under Section 55 of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
The NCLAT in the matter of Sanjay Kumar Ruia v. Catholic Syrian Bank Ltd & Anr. held that the Adjudicating Authority has no power to convert the ‘Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ into a ‘Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ Under Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
Read the following carefully and answer the questions given at the end:
BSC Bank filed an application for initiating Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) against one of its borrower company M/s Moon Storm Pvt. Ltd., in the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT). The NCLT allowed the application and passed order for commencement of CIRP. Rohit has been appointed as Interim Resolution Professional (IRP) and moratorium was declared.
The Committee of Creditor (CoC) was constituted and Rohit was appointed as Resolution Professional by CoC. Meetings of the CoC was convened from time to time and expression of interest for Resolution Plan was invited from various parties via public notice. However, no Resolution Plan was received during the currency of 180 days period. Hence, NCLT on the recommendation of RP extended the initial time period from 180 days to 270 days. Since, no one had shown the expression of interest even during the extended period of 270 days, the CoC appointed another Resolution Professional (RP) after the expiry of 270 days.
When the matter of resolution could not be completed within the extended time. NCLT, extended the period of CIRPty further period of 90 days after the expiry of 270 days by exercising the power conferred under Section 55 of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 by treating the matter as ‘Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ and also determined the ‘Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process fee’ and the ‘Cost’ incurred and payable to the Resolution Professional.
Aggrieved from the said order of the NCLT, the Resolution Professional preferred appeals against the order of the NCLT. In light of the above facts, answer the following questions:
(a) Whether the NCLT has power to convert the CIRP as a ‘Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process’ under Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
(b) Whether Committee of Creditors has jurisdiction to replace the Resolution Professional after completion of 270 days.
(c) Whether the NCLT is empowered to decide the resolution cost, including the resolution fee payable to the Resolution Professional.
(d) How is the fast track process different from the Corporate Insolvency
Resolution Process under Chapter II of Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (Dec 2020, 10 marks each)
Answer:
(a) Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with the Fast track corporate insolvency resolution process. According to Section 55 a Corporate Insolvency Resolution process carried out in accordance with this Chapter IV of Part II of the Code be called as fast track corporate insolvency resolution process. An application for fast tract corporate insolvency resolution process may be made in respect of the following corporate debtors, namely:
(a) a corporate debtor with assets and income below a level as may be notified by the Central Government: or
(b) a corporate debtor with such class of creditors or such amount of debt as may be notified by the Central Government, or
(c) Such other category of corporate persons as may be notified by the Central Government.
Section 57 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with the manner of initiating fast track corporate insolvency resolution process. An application forfast track corporate insolvency resolution process may be filed by a creditor or corporate debtor as the case may be, along with-
(a) the proof of the existence of default as evidenced by records available with an information utility or such other means as may be specified by the Board; and (b) such other information as may be specified by the Board to establish that the corporate debtor is eligible for fast track corporate insolvency resolution process.
Manner of initiating fast track corporate insolvency resolution process. The given case is similar to Sanjay Kumar Ruia v. Catholic Syrian Bank Ltd. & Anr. (Company Appeal (AT) (Insolvency) No. 560 of 2018) where it was held that the NCLT cannot exercise its power under sub-section (2) of Section 55 of the Code, which was not applicable, and therefore the Adjudicating Authority has no power to convert the ‘Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ into a ‘Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ under Section 55 of the Code.
Section 55 of the Code clarifies that Fast Track CIRP is only limited to certain class of corporate Debtor.
In the present case, the application itself was not filed under Section 55 but filed under Section 7 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. Therefore, Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 may not be invoked by NCLT against the Corporate Debtor i.e. NCLT will not have any power or Jurisdiction to convert the CIRP initiated under Section 7, 9 or 10 of IBC as a Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process under Section 55 of the IBC.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

(b) Section 12 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, which deals with the time limit for completion of insolvency resolution process and provides that:
1. The corporate insolvency resolution process shall be completed within a period of one hundred and eighty days from the date of admission of the application to initiate such process,
2. The resolution professional shall file an application to the Adjudicating Authority to extend the period of the corporate insolvency resolution process beyond one hundred and eighty days, if instructed to do so by a resolution passed at a meeting of the committee of creditors by a vote of sixty-six per cent, of the voting shares.
3. On receipt of an application, if the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that the subject matter of the case is such that corporate insolvency resolution process cannot be completed within one hundred and eighty days, it may by order extend the duration of such process beyond one hundred and eighty days by such further period as it thinks fit, but not exceeding ninety days:
Provided that any extension of the period of corporate insolvency resolution process under this Section shall not be granted more than once.
In terms of Section 27 of the Code, where, at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process, the Committee of Creditors (COC) is of the opinion that a resolution professional appointed is required to be replaced, it may replace him with another resolution professional.
In terms of Section 30, 31 & 33 of the Code, after completion of 270
days NCLT may either approve the Resolution Plan, if any, as approved by COC or if there is no plan approved, the NCLT pass an order of liquidation.
The given case is similar to Sanjay Kumar Ruia v. Catholic Syrian Bank Ltd. & Anr. (Company Appeal (AT) (Insolvency) No. 560 of 2018) where it was held that the NCLT had no jurisdiction to proceed with the ‘Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’ beyond the period of 270 days. After completion of 270 days, the Committee of Creditors ceased to exist and thereby they have no jurisdiction to replace a Resolution Professional. Therefore, Committee of Creditors has no jurisdiction to replace Resolution Professional after 270 days in the present case.

(c) Insolvency resolution process costs under Section 5(13) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 means- (a) the amount of any interim finance and the costs incurred in raising such finance; (b) the fees payable to any person acting as-a resolution professional; (c) any . costs incurred by the resolution professional in running the business of the corporate debtor as a going concern; (d) any costs incurred at the expense of the Government to facilitate the insolvency resolution process; and (e) any other costs as may be specified by the Board; Regulation 31 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process of Corporate Persons) Regulation, 2016 states that insolvency resolution process costs under Section 5(13)(e) shall mean-
(a) amounts due to suppliers of essential goods and services under Regulation 32;
(aa) fee payable to authorised representative under sub-regulation (8) of regulation 16A;
(ab) out of pocket expenses of authorised representative for discharge of his functions under section 25A,
(b) amounts due to a person whose rights are prejudicially affected on account of the moratorium imposed under section 14(1 )(d);
(c) expenses incurred on or by the interim resolution professional to the extent ratified under Regulation 33;
(d) expenses incurred on or by the resolution professional fixed under Regulation 34; and
(e) other costs directly relating to the corporate insolvency resolution process and approved by the committee.
Regulation 34 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process of Corporate Persons) Regulation, 2016 the committee shall fix the expenses to be incurred on or by the resolution professional and the expenses shall constitute insolvency resolution process costs.
Explanation – For the purposes of this Regulation, “expenses” mean the fee to be paid to the resolution professional and other expenses, including the cost of engaging professional advisors, to be incurred by the resolution professional.”
Keeping in view Regulation 31 read with Regulation 34 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process of Corporate Persons) Regulation, 2016, NCLT had no jurisdiction to decide the resolution cost including the fee payable of the ‘Resolution Professional.

(d) The aim of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 is to conclude the fast track resolution procedure within half of the default time period specified under the Code. The person or entity seeking the fast track relief must support that the case is fit for the Fast-track. Therefore, whosoever files the application for fast track process under Chapter IV of Part II (Section 55) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code will have to file the application along with the proof of the existence of default as evidenced by records available with an information utility or such other means as may be specified by the Board to establish that the corporate debtor is eligible for fast track corporate insolvency resolution process.

Fast track Process under Chapter IV of Part II Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process(CIRP) under Chapter II of Part II
Corporate debtor with assets and income below a level as may be notified by the Central Government No such restrictions.
A corporate debtor with such class of creditors or such amount of debt as may be notified by the Central Government No such restrictions.
Time limit for corporate insolvency resolution process be completed within is 90 days from the insolvency commencement date Time limit is for corporate insolvency resolution process be completed within is 180 days (Maximum 330 days) from the insolvency commencement date
Can be extended beyond the Initial period 90 days up to 45 days Can be extended beyond the initial period of 180 days up to 90 days.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 3.
Under which Section of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, fast track corporate insolvency resolution process ? Who can make application for fast track corporate insolvency resolution process?
Answer:

  • According to Section 55 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, a corporate insolvency resolution process carried out in accordance with this Chapter IV of Part II of the Code shall be called as fast track corporate insolvency resolution process.
  • An application forfast track corporate insolvency resolution process may be made in respect of the following corporate debtors, namely:
    • a corporate debtor with assets and income below a level as may be notified by the Central Government; or
    • a corporate debtor with such class of creditors or such amount of debt as may be notified by the Central Government;
    • such other category of corporate persons as may be notified by the Central Government.

Question 4.
What is the rationale behind introduction of Fast Track process for insolvency resolution of corporate persons?
Answer:
Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides for ‘Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process’. It aims to expedite the insolvency resolution process of certain categories of corporate debtors with lesser complexities. The fast track process which can be initiated by a creditor or the corporate debtor cuts down the time taken to complete an insolvency resolution to almost half as compared to the regular process under the Code.

Question 5.
What is the time period for completion of fast track corporate insolvency resolution process? If the process cannot be completed within stipulated time, then what is the process of extension?
Answer:

  • Section 56(1) provides that subject to the provisions of sub-section (3), the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process shall be completed within a period of ninety days from the insolvency commencement date.
  • Section 56(2) states that the resolution professional shall file an application to the Adjudicating Authority to extend the period of the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process beyond ninety days if instructed to do so by way of a resolution passed at a meeting of the committee of creditors and supported by a vote of seventy-five per cent, of the voting share.
  • As per Section 56(3) on receipt of an application under sub-section (2), if the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that the subject matter of the case is such that fast track corporate insolvency resolution process cannot be completed within ninety days, it may, by order, extend the duration of such process beyond the said period ninety days by such further period, as it thinks fit, but not exceeding forty-five days.
  • Any extension of the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process under this section shall not be granted more than once.

Question 6.
Briefly explain the eligibility criteria for the appointment as a resolution professional for a fast track process of a corporate debtor?
Answer:
The eligibility criteria for the appointment as a resolution professional for a fast track process of a corporate debtor is as under:

  • An insolvency professional shall be eligible to be appointed as a resolution professional for a fast track process of a corporate debtor if he, and all partners and directors of the insolvency professional entity of which he is a partner or director are independent of the corporate debtor.
  • An insolvency professional shall not.be eligible to be appointed as a resolution professional if he, or the insolvency professional entity of which he is a partner or director, is under a restraint order of the Board.
  • An insolvency professional shall make disclosures at the time of his appointment and thereafter in accordance with the Code of Conduct.
  • An insolvency professional shall not continue as a resolution professional if the insolvency professional entity of which he is a director or a partner, or any other partner or director of such insolvency professional entity represents any other stakeholders in the same fast track process.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
Briefly explain the provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2017?
Answer:
Some of the brief provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2017 is as under:

  • Regulation 3 prescribes the eligibility criteria for Resolution Professional for a fast track process of a corporate debtor
  • Regulation 4 prescribes the powers of interim resolution professional to access the books of account, records and other relevant documents and information
  • An insolvency professional shall make a public announcement immediately on his appointment as an interim resolution professional as per Regulation 6
  • An operational creditor, other than workman or employee of the corporate debtor, shall submit proof of his claim to the interim resolution professional in person in Form B as per Regulation 7
  • A financial creditor shall submit proof of claim to the interim resolution professional in electronic form in Form C as per Regulation 8.
  • A workman or an employee of the corporate debtor shall submit proof of claim to the interim resolution professional in person, by post or by electronic means in Form D as per Regulation 9
  • A person claiming to be a creditor, other than those covered under regulations 7, 8, or 9, shall submit proof of its claim to the interim resolution professional or resolution professional in person, by post or by electronic means in Form F of the Schedule as per Regulation 9A
  • Regulation 17: The interim resolution professional shall file a report certifying the constitution of the committee to the Adjudicating Authority on or before the expiry of twenty-one days from the date of his appointment.
  • Regulation 18: A resolution professional may convene a meeting of the committee as and when he considers necessary, and shall convene a meeting if a request to that effect is made by members of the committee representing thirty-three per cent of the voting rights.
  • Regulation 26: The resolution professional shall within seven days of his appointment, appoint one registered valuer to determine the fair value and the liquidation value of the corporate debtor.
  • Regulation 36: A resolution plan shall provide for the measures, as may be necessary for insolvency resolution of the corporate debtor for maximization of value of its assets.
  • Regulation 37: Regulation prescribes the content of Resolution plan.
  • Regulation 38: A resolution applicant shall submit resolution plan(s) prepared in accordance with the Code and these regulations to the resolution professional within the stipulated time.

Question 8.
Explain the meaning of “Fast track process costs”?
Answer:
“Fast track process costs” shall mean

  • the amount of any interim finance and the costs incurred in raising such finance;
  • the fees payable to any person acting as a resolution professional;
  • any costs incurred by the resolution professional in running the business of the corporate debtor as a going concern;
  • any costs incurred at the expense of the Government to facilitate the process;
  • amounts due to suppliers of essential goods and services under Regulation 31;
  • amounts due to a person whose rights are prejudicially affected on account of the moratorium impose of under section 14(1 )(d);
  • expenses incurred on or by the interim resolution professional to the extent ratified under Regulation 32;
  • expenses incurred on or by the resolution professional fixed under Regulation 33;
  • other costs directly relating to the fast track process and approved by the committee.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 9.
Explain the meaning of “Resolution plan” as per provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2017?
Answer:
A resolution plan shall provide for the measures, as may be necessary for insolvency resolution of the corporate debtor for maximization of value of its assets, including but not limited to the following:

  • transfer of all or part of the assets of the corporate debtor to one or more persons;
  • sale of all or part of the assets whether subject to any security interest or not;
  • the substantial acquisition of shares of the corporate debtor, or the merger or consolidation of the corporate debtor with one or more persons;
  • satisfaction or modification of any security interest;
  • curing or waiving of any breach of the terms of any debt due from the corporate debtor;
  • reduction in the amount payable to the creditors;
  • extension of a maturity date or a change in interest rate or other terms of a debt due from the corporate debtor;
  • amendment of the constitutional documents of the corporate debtor;
  • issuance of securities of the corporate debtor, for cash, property, securities, or in exchange for claims or interests, or other appropriate purpose;
  • change in portfolio of goods or services produced or rendered by the corporate debtor;
  • change in technology used by the corporate debtor;
  • obtaining necessary approvals from the Central and State Governments and other authorities

Question 10.
What are the contents to be covered in Resolution Plan?
Answer:
Contents to be covered in Resolution Plan includes:
1. A resolution plan shall identify specific sources of funds that will be used to pay the:

  • fast track process costs and provide that the fast track process costs will be paid in priority to any other creditor;
  • liquidation value due to operational creditors and provide for such payment in priority to any financial creditor which shall in any event be made before the expiry of thirty days after the approval of a resolution plan by the Adjudicating Authority; and
  • liquidation value due to dissenting financial creditors and provide that such payment is made before any recoveries are made by the financial creditors who voted in favour of the resolution plan.

2. A resolution plan shall include a statement as to how it has dealt with the Interests of all stakeholders, including financial creditors and operational creditors, of the corporate debtor.

3. A resolution plan shall provide

  • the term of the plan and its implementation schedule
  • the management and control of the business of the corporate debtor during its term; and
  • adequate means for supervising its implementation.

4. A resolution plan shall contain details of the resolution applicant and other connected persons to enable the committee to assess the credibility of such applicant and other connected persons to take a prudent decision while considering the resolution plan for its approval.

Fast Track Corporation Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 11.
Briefly explain the process of Approval of Resolution Plan as per Regulation 38 of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2017?
Answer:

  1. As per Regulation 38, a resolution applicant shall submit resolution plan prepared in accordance with the Code and these regulations to the resolution professional within stipulated time.
  2. The resolution professional shall submit to the committee all resolution plans which comply with the requirements of the Code and regulations made thereunder
  3. The committee may approve any resolution plan with such modifications as it deems fit.
  4. The committee shall, while approving the resolution plan under sub-section (4) of section 30, specify the amounts payable from resources under the resolution plan for the purposes under sub-regulation (1) of regulation 37.
  5. The Resolution professional shall submit the Resolution plan approved by the committee to the Adjudicating Authority, at least fifteen days before the expiry of the maximum period permitted under section 56 for the completion of the fast track corporate insolvency resolution process.
  6. The resolution professional shall forthwith send a copy of the order of the Adjudicating Authority approving or rejecting a resolution plan to the participants and the resolution applicant.
  7. A provision in a resolution plan which would otherwise require the consent of the members or partners of the corporate debtor, as the case may be, under the terms of the constitutional documents of the corporate debtor, shareholders’ agreement, joint venture agreement or other document of a similar nature, shall take effect notwithstanding that such consent has not been obtained.
  8. No proceedings shall be initiated against the interim resolution professional or the resolution professional, as the case may be, for any actions of the corporate debtor, prior to the fast track commencement date.
  9. A person in charge of the management or control of the business and operations of the corporate debtor after a resolution plan is approved by the Adjudicating Authority, may make an application to the Adjudicating Authority for an order seeking the assistance of the local district administration in implementing the terms of a resolution plan.

Resolution Strategies – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Chapter 5 Resolution Strategies – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Resolution Strategies – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
(a) ‘Corporate Restructuring is an inorganic business strategy where one or more aspects of a business are redesigned to improve commercial efficiency, manage competition effectively, drive faster pace of growth, ensure effective utilization of resources, and fulfilment of stakeholders’ expectations. It serves different purposes for different companies at different points of time and may take up various forms.’ – Brief on External and Internal Restructuring through Resolution Plans. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
(b) Whether the promoters can claim that ‘they should have been given an opportunity to settle the dues, if Committee of Creditors did not find any resolution plan as viable and feasible.’ Citing relevant decision whether the claim of the promoters is tenable and within the objects of the IBC, 2016. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
(a) External Restructuring :
It consists of merger, and amalgamation of one company with another or demerger of one or more undertakings of a company into another company, acquisition of controlling stake in acompany through purchase of majority stake in it, conversion of debt into equity, etc. The same are briefly explained hereunder.
1. Restructuring through mergers, amalgamation and demerger:
A company merged, amalgamated or demerged to achieve improvement in efficiency in operational and financial performance of the company. In the insolvency proceedings of a corporate debtor, the resolution plan may provide for merger, forward or reverse of the corporate debtor with the resolution applicant (company) or any of its group companies to maximize the utilization of the assets of the corporate debtor. Similarly, the resolution applicant may provide to demerge one or more units of the corporate debtor to gain operational and financial efficiency.

2. Restructuring through acquisition of controlling stake/purchase of Shares: The resolution applicant may, through a resolution plan, acquire the controlling stake in the corporate debtor by either reducing or cancelling existing paid-up shares capital and recapitalizing it by infusing further equity capital. Alternatively, the resolution applicant may acquire the existing equity share capital of the company party or fully by making payment of some nominal consideration to the shareholders of the Corporate Debtor and for meeting the requirement of funds of the Corporate Debtor, the Resolution Applicant may infuse the funds partlty in equity of partly in the form of debt or fully in the form of debt only. The management of the Corporate Debtor including its Board is also changed by the Resolution Applicant by appointing his nominee directors on the Board and by appointing other key managerial personnel.

3. Restructuring through conversion of debt for issuance of securities: It can be understood that the insolvency of a Corporate Debtor is mainly due to default in its debt, whether financial debt or operational debt. Where it could not fulfil its repayment obligation. The Resolution Applicant on the basis of the assessment of the Corporate Debtor, may purpose the conversion of debt of the Corporate Debtor into securities of the Corporate Debtor issued in favour of the creditors, thereby, changing the nature and terms of the debt. The said securities may be in the form of equity share, preference share or debentures/ bonds. As a result of the said restructuring, the existing debt of the Corporate Debtor is reduced to a sustainable level by conversion of the same into equity and by waiving substantial part of the unsustainable debt.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Internal Restructuring:
The internal restructuring includes operational and financial restructing.
These are discussed in detail as follows:
1. Operational Restructuring:
Operational Restructuring involves improving the operational efficiency of the corporate debtor so as to increase its business receipts and profitability. It may consists of creation of new departments to serve growing markets or downsizing of eliminating departments to serve growing markets or downsizing or eliminating departments to conserve overheads. A company may undertake restructuring to focus on a particular market segment leveraging its core competencies or may undertake restructuring to make the organization lean and efficient. This type of restructuring affects employees and involves layoffs or collaboration with third parties to upgrade skills and technical knowhow.

2. Financial Restructuring:
Financial restructuring is the process of reorganizing the financial structure, which primarily comprises of equity capital and debt capital. There may be several reasons (financial and non-financial) that trigger the need for financial restructuring. Financial restructuring is undertaken either because of compulsion (to recove from financial distress) or as, part of comapany’s financial strategy to achieve better financial performance. Financial restructuring is done for various business reasons such as to overcome poor financial performance, to gain market share, or to seize emerging market opportunties.

(b) In the matter of Y. Shivram Prasad & Ors. vs. S. Dhanapal & Ors, the NCLAT passed the impugned order of liquidation as Committee of Creditors did not find any resolution plan viable and feasible. The promoters submitted that they should have been given an opportunity to settle the dues.
While rejecting the said submission, the NCLAT clarified that settlement can be made only at three stages, i.e., before admission, before constitution CoC and in terms of Section 12A of the insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) and such stages were over in this instant matter.
It, however, observed that during the liquidation process, it is necessary to take steps for revival and continuance of the Corporate Debtor by protecting it from its management and from a death by liquidation.
Wherein this Appellate Tribunal having noticed the decision of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in “Swiss Ribbon Pvt. Ltd. & Anr. vs. Union of India & Ors where Hon’ble Supreme Court observed that “What is Interesting to note is that the Preamble does, not, in any manner, refer to liquidation, which is only availed of as a last resort if there is either no resolution plan or the resolution plans submitted are not up the mark. Even in liquidation, the liquidator can sell the business plans submitted are not up the mark. Even in liquidation, the liquidator can sell the business of the Corporate debtor as a going concern” and NCLAT in its matter further held that “In view of the provision of Section 230 and the decision of the Hon’ble Supreme Court in ‘Swiss Ribbons Pvt. Ltd’, We direct the Liquidator to proceed in accordance with law.”

He will verify claims of all the creditors; into custody and control of all the assets property, effect and actionable claims of the ₹ corporate debtor’, carry on the business of the t corporate debtor’ for its beneficial liquidation, etc. as prescribed under Section 35 of the Code.
If the members or the ₹ Corporate Debtor’ or the ₹ creditors’ of a class of creditors like ₹ Financial Creditor’ or ₹ Operational Creditor’ approach the company through the liquidator for compromise or arrangement by making proposal of payment to all the creditors(s), the Liquidator on behalf of the company will move an application under Section 230 of the Companies Act, 2013 before the Adjudicating Authority i.e. National Company Law Tribunal, in terms of the observation as made in above. On failure, as observed above, steps should be taken for outright sale of the ‘Corporate Debtor’ so as to enable the employees to continue.”

Question 2.
Financial Creditors initiated Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) against a corporate debtor and invited the expression of interest (EOI) of Resolution Plan from the eligible persons. One company, showed interest and submitted the EOI, which was agreed upon by the Committee of Creditors (CoC) and proposal was submitted by the CoC with the Adjudicating Authority (AA). As per the Resolution Plan, the Resolution Applicant agreed to pay in cash to acquire the controlling stake in the Corporate Debtor to tune of 75% and the Operational Creditors will be paid in instalments in settlement of their claims stretchable upto the next 12 months.
The AA accepted the Resolution Plan. However, the promoters of the Corporate Debtors and other Operational Creditors objected and appealed before the NCLAT raising the following points :
(i) The promoters of Corporate Debtor contended that the Resolution Applicant is not eligible to submit the Resolution Plan, since its subsidiary company in the UK was fined by the English court under the provisions of UK Act, which provides for imprisonment for a term not exceeding 12 months or a fine or both. Hence in terms of Section 29A(d) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC) the Resolution Applicant is ineligible to submit the Resolution Plan.
(ii) The Operational Creditors also objected taking the plea that there was unfair distribution of settlement amount in instalments for their claims under the provisions of the IBC.
Explain with relevant case law, whetherthe Resolution Applicant was eligible to submit the Resolution Plan? (Dec 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
Yes, the Resolution Applicant will be succeeded in the NCLAT. The facts of the case are similar to that of the case of acquisition of Bhushan Steel Ltd by Bamnipal Steel Ltd (BNL), a subsidiary of Tata Steel Ltd, which is as under:
The acquisition of Bhushan Steel Ltd (BSL) for ₹ 35,200 crore by Bamnipal Steel Ltd (BNL), a subsidiary of Tata Steel Ltd. in May 2018, has been the first major case of acquisition of a major stressed asset under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code. BNL completed the acquisition of controlling stake of 72.65 per cent in BSL in accordance with the approved resolution plan under the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) of the IBC. Tata Steel has paid ₹ 35,200 crore in cash to acquire Bhushan Steel. It would pay another ₹ 1,200 crore over next 12 months to operational creditors.

The promoters of BSL approached the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) over issue of ineligibility of Tata Steel to acquire BSL. L&T, an operational creditor also approached the Hon’ble NCLAT over issue of unfair distribution of settlement amount for its claim under the provisions of IBC, 2016.
NCLAT upheld the acquisition of Bhushan Steel, rejecting allegations of its ineligibility by the promoters of the company. The NCLAT also rejected the claims of L&T, an operational creditor of Bhushan Steel Ltd, opposing Tata Steel’s resolution plan seeking a higher priority in debt settlement.
The NCLAT said that Tata Steel UK, a foreign subsidiary of Tata Steel, which was fined by an English Court in February 2018 under UK Act, had a provision of ‘imprisonment for a term not exceeding twelve months, or a fine, or both’. While, the provision in section 29A(d) of the Code, which deals with eligibility, stipulates “has been convicted for any offence punishable with imprisonment for two years or more”, cannot be equated with Section 33(1)(a) of the U.K Act, said NCLAT. Section 29A of the IBC mandates that a person convicted for any offences punishable with imprisonment for two years or more is ineligible for submitting a resolution plan.
Over the claims of L&T, which had supplied goods and machineries over ₹ 900 crore, NCLAT said that Tata Steel’s resolution plan was fair towards operational creditors of Bhushan Steel which has a total demand of 11,422 crore. The NCLAT observed that the company has allotted ₹ 1,200 crore for them and L&T plea for a higher priority could not be accepted.
Moreover, it also declined the plea of the promoters family, contending Tata Steel’s Resolution Plan’ was illegal as it purports to transfer shares’ of the ‘preference shareholders’ of Bhushan Steel without their consent for a fixed consideration of ₹ 100 as against ₹ 2,269 crore.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 3.
M/s ABC through Ankit, the proprietor, approached you as professional, to seek direction about its business. He says, that the business is in distress and there are heavy debts, thus unable to run the business. He wants to find solution to the debts, so that he can run the business smoothly. He shares following details about his business :
(i) Gross annual turnover ₹ 50,000
(ii) Aggregate Value of Assets ₹ 20,000
(iii) Value of Debts incurred in last two months ₹ 32,000
(iv) There is no dwelling unit owned by him
(v) There is no insolvency resolution process, bankruptcy process or fresh start process subsisting against him.
Based on above details, advise him to get rid of his debts and to re-start his business smoothly. (June 2022, 6 marks)

Question 4.
What is an Insolvency Resolution Plan?
Answer:

  • Insolvency Resolution Plan is a unique combination of financial, legal, management and technical features which would provide a reasonable assurance of sustainable viability over the period of recovery from internal or external stresses.
  • A plan could involve the purchase of the equity or assets of the corporate debtor, the infusion of additional debt, the de-merger of debtor’s businesses, financial “haircuts” taken by creditors, or the extinguishment of some liabilities.
  • It is a procedure for restructuring encompasses, schemes of reconstruction, takeovers, mergers, transfer of undertakings and restructuring of debts.

Question 5.
Explain the legislative framework for insolvency and bankruptcy proceedings in India.
Answer:

  • It provides for a wide range of resolution strategies, viz. re-organisation through a scheme for compromise, arrangements and reconstruction or financial, capital and business restructuring.
  • The procedure for restructuring encompasses, schemes of reconstruction, takeovers, mergers, demergers, transfer of undertakings and restructuring of debts as provided in Sections 230-240 of the Companies Act, 2013 by way of which the liabilities of the distressed companies can be restructured.
  • Further, in the event of initiation of a Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process against the Corporate Debtor under IBC 2016, the Resolution Professional shall invite resolution plans from the prospective Resolution Applicants, subject to the compliance of the conditions as laid down under Section 30(2) of the IBC, 2016.
  • Debt-for-equity swaps can be used as a tool for restructuring as duly recognised/provided for in restructurings undertaken under sections 230-231 of the Companies Act, 2013 as well as the resolution plans that may be submitted by the Resolution Applicants to the Resolution professional for onward consent of the Committee of Creditors and thereafter the approval of the Adjudicating Authority.
  • The same is done to bring the debt to a sustainable level either by waiver of excess debt or conversion into equity, or a combination of both. Apart from the above, the Asset Reconstruction Companies (ARCs) set-up under the provisions of SARFAESI Act, 2002 may also acquire the debts of the Corporate Debtor from the lending Banks/ Financial Institutions (FIs) and subsequently restructure the same in post discussions and arrangement with the debtor.
  • The provisions of SARFAESI Act, 2002 also empower the lenders/ARCs to effect a change in management as a restructuring mechanism.

Question 6.
What is Corporate Restructuring?
Answer:

  • It is an inorganic business strategy where one or more aspects of a business are redesigned to improve commercial efficiency, manage competition effectively, drive faster pace of growth, ensure effective utilization of resources, and fulfilment of stakeholders’ expectations.
  • It serves different purposes for different companies at different points of time and may take up various forms.
  • Restructuring typically occurs to address challenges or it can be driven by the necessity to make financial adjustments to its assets and liabilities.
  • Mergers, amalgamations, acquisitions, compromises, arrangement or reconstruction are various forms of corporate restructuring exercises.
  • The purpose of each of these restructuring exercises may be different but each of these exercises attempts to bring in more efficiency in the system.
  • Corporate Restructuring process in India is governed by the Companies Act, 2013, the Companies (Compromises, Arrangements and Amalgamations) Rules, 2016 and various other regulatory laws such as the Income Tax Act, 1961, the Competition Act, 2002, the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999, the Indian and State Stamp Acts and Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. Chapter XV of the Companies Act, 2013 (comprising sections 230 to 240) regulates compromises, arrangement and amalgamations.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
Explain the types of Corporate restructuring.
Answer:
Corporate restructuring may be broadly categorised as:
1. Organisational Restructuring
2. Financial Restructuring

1. Organisational Restructuring

  • It may involve creation of new departments to serve growing markets or downsizing or eliminating departments to conserve overheads. ‘
  • A company may undertake restructuring to focus on a particular market segment leveraging its core competencies or may undertake restructuring to make the organisation lean and efficient.
  • This type of restructuring affects employees and involves layoffs or collaboration with third parties to upgrade skills and technical know-how.

2. Financial restructuring

  • It is the process of reorganizing the financial structure, which primarily comprises of equity capital and debt capital.
  • There may be several reasons (financial and non-financial) that trigger the need for financial restructuring. Financial restructuring is undertaken either because of compulsion (to recover from financial distress) or as part of company’s financial strategy.
  • Financial restructuring is done for various business reasons such as to overcome poor financial performance, to gain market share, or to seize emerging market opportunities.
  • Financial restructuring undertaken to recover from financial distress involves negotiations with various stakeholders such as banks, financial institutions, creditors in order to reduce liabilities.

Question 8.
When can Corporate financial restructuring be adopted by any business?
Answer:
It involves a considerable change in the company’s financial structure and is undertaken for various business reasons such as:

  • To overcome poor financial performance
  • To address external competition
  • To regain market share
  • To seize emerging market opportunities
  • Risk reduction
  • Development of core competencies.

Question 9.
Explain the components of financial restructuring.
Answer:

  • Debt Restructuring (restructuring of the secured long-term borrowing, long-term unsecured borrowings, short term borrowing)
  • Equity Restructuring (alteration or reduction of capital, buy backs).

Question 10.
Explain Debt restructuring.
Answer:

  • Debt restructuring is the process of reorganizing the whole debt capital of the company in negotiation with bankers, creditors, vendors.
  • Debt capital of the company includes secured long-term borrowing, unsecured long-term borrowing, and short-term borrowings.
  • Debt restructuring involves a reduction of debt and an extension of payment terms or change in terms and conditions.
  • Debt restructuring is more commonly used as a financial tool than compared to equity restructuring.
  • Restructuring includes alteration of repayment period, repayable amount, the amount of instalments, rate of interest, roll over of credit facilities, sanction of additional credit facility, enhancement of existing credit limits, compromise settlements.
  • Debt restructuring involves:
    • Restructuring of secured long-term borrowings – It is undertaken for reducing the cost of capital, improving liquidity and increasing the cash flow.
    • Restructuring of unsecured long-term borrowing – It depends on the type of borrowing which can be in form of public deposits, private loans (unsecured), unsecured bonds or debentures.
    • Restructuring of short-term borrowings – These borrowings are generally not restructured and but can be renegotiated with new terms.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 11.
Explain the provisions regarding the formal restructuring and insolvency proceedings.
Answer:

  • The legislative framework in India now provides only for formal restructuring and insolvency proceedings. Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with the insolvency resolution and liquidation for corporate persons.
  • Section 4 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that Part II of the Code shall apply to matters relating to the insolvency and liquidation of corporate debtors where the minimum amount of the default is one lakh rupees.
  • The proviso to section 4 empowers the Central Government to specify, by notification, the minimum amount of default of higher value but it shall not be more than one crore rupees.
  • Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lays down the following two independent stages:
    (i) Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process [Sections 4 and 6 to 32] and
    (ii) Liquidation [Sections 33 to 54 and Section 59] Chapter II of Part
    II deals with corporate insolvency resolution process while Chapter
    III together with Chapter V of Part II govern the liquidation process for corporate persons.
  • Under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, the resolution professional, during the corporate insolvency resolution process, invites resolution plans from prospective Resolution Applicants.
  • Such plans may be based on one or more mechanisms outlined in Chapter XV of the Companies Act, 2013 as well as in accordance with various mechanisms laid under Regulation 37 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons), Regulations, 2016 subject to the compliance of conditions as laid down under Section 30(2) of the IBC, 2016.

Regulation 37 provides that a resolution plan shall provide for the measures, as may be necessary, for insolvency resolution of the corporate debtor for maximization of value of its assets, including but not limited to the following:
(a) transfer of all or part of the assets of the corporate debtor to one or more persons;
(b) sale of all or part of the assets whether subject to any security interest or not;
(c) the substantial acquisition of shares of the corporate debtor, or the merger or consolidation of the corporate debtor with one or more persons;
(ca) cancellation or delisting of any shares of the corporate debtor, if applicable;
(d) satisfaction or modification of any security interest;
(e) curing or waiving of any breach of the terms of any debt due from the corporate debtor;
(f) reduction in the amount payable to the creditors;
(g) extension of a maturity date or a change in interest rate or other terms of a debt due from the corporate debtor;
(h) amendment of the constitutional documents of the corporate debtor;
(i) issuance of securities of the corporate debtor, for cash, property, securities, or in exchange for claims or interests, or other appropriate purpose;
(j) change in portfolio of goods or services produced or rendered by the corporate debtor;
(k) change in technology used by the corporate debtor; and
(l) obtaining necessary approvals from the Central and State Governments and other authorities.
One of the best methods for corporate debt restructuring is debt-equity swap where specified shareholders have right to exchange stock for a predetermined amount of debt (ie, bonds) in the same company.

Question 12.
What is Equity Restructuring?
Answer:

  • It involves reorganization of equity capital. The following comes under
    equity restructuring:
  • Alteration of share capital
  • Reduction of share capital
  • Buy-back of shares.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 13.
Explain the provisions related to compromise or arrangement between the creditors /members and a company.
Answer:
The Tribunal may, on the application of the company or of any creditor or member of the company, or in the case of a company which is being wound up, of the liquidator appointed under this Act or under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, as the case may be, order a meeting of the creditors or class of creditors, or of the members or class of members, as the case may be, to be called, held and conducted in such manner as the Tribunal directs.

Upon hearing the application under sub-section (1) of section 230 of the Act, the Tribunal shall, unless it thinks fit for any reason to dismiss the application, give such directions as it may think necessary in respect of the following matters:
(a) determining the class or classes of creditor or of members whose meeting or meetings have to be held for considering the proposed compromise or arrangement; or dispensing with the meeting or meeting for any class or classes or creditors in terms of sub-section (9) of section 230;
(b) fixing the time and place of the meeting or meetings;
(c) appointing a Chairperson and scrutinizerfor the meeting or meetings to be held, as the case may be and fixing the terms of his appointment including remuneration;
(d) fixing the quorum and the procedure to be followed at the meeting or meetings, including voting in person or by proxy or by postal ballot or by voting through electronics means;
(e) determining the values of the creditors or the members, or the creditors or member of any class, as the case may be, whose meetings have to be held;
(f) notice to be given of the meeting or meetings and the advertisement of such notice;
(g) notice to be given to sectoral regulators or authorities as required under sub-section (5) of section 230;
(h) the time within which the chairperson of the meeting of the meeting is required to report the result of the meeting to the tribunal; and
(i) such other matters as the Tribunal may deem necessary.

Question 14.
What disclosures have to be made to the Tribunal by the company or any other applicant?
Answer:
The applicant shall disclose to the Tribunal by affidavit the following:
(a) all material facts relating to the company, such as the latest financial position of the company, the latest auditor’s report on the accounts of the company and the pendency of any investigation or proceedings against the company;
(b) reduction of share capital of the company, if any, included in the compromise or arrangement;
(c) any scheme of corporate debt restructuring consented to by not less than seventy-five per cent, of the secured creditors in value, including:
(i) a creditor’s responsibility statement in the prescribed form;
(ii) safeguards for the protection of other secured and unsecured creditors;
(iii) report by the auditorthat the fund requirements of the company after the corporate debt restructuring as approved shall conform to the liquidity test based upon the estimates provided to them by the Board;
(iv) where the company proposes to adopt the corporate debt restructuring guidelines specified by the Reserve Bank of India, a statement to that effect; and
(vi) a valuation report in respect of the shares and the property and all assets, tangible and intangible, movable and immovable, of the company by a registered valuer. [Section 230(2)]

Question 15.
What are the provisions regarding the documents to be submitted and the advertisement of the notice of the meeting?
Answer:

  • Where a meeting is proposed to be called in pursuance of an order of the Tribunal under sub-section (1), a notice of such meeting shall be sent to all the creditors or class of creditors and to all the members or class of members and the debenture-holders of the company, individually at the address registered with the company.
  • It shall be accompanied by a statement disclosing the details of the compromise or arrangement, a copy of the valuation report, if any, and explaining their effect on creditors, key managerial personnel, promoters and non-promoter members, and the debenture-holders and the effect of the compromise or arrangement on any material interests of the directors of the company or the debenture trustees, and such other matters as may be prescribed.
  • Provided that such notice and other documents shall also be placed on the website of the company, if any, and in case of a listed company, these documents shall be sent to the Securities and Exchange Board and stock exchange where the securities of the companies are listed, for placing on their website and shall also be published in newspapers in such manner as may be prescribed.
  • Provided further that where the notice for the meeting is also issued by way of an advertisement, it shall indicate the time within which copies of the compromise or arrangement shall be made available to the concerned persons free of charge from the registered office of the company. [Section 230(3)]
  • Provided that an advertisement of the notice of the meeting (Rule 7) shall be given in Form No. CAA.2 in at least one English newspaper and in at least one vernacular newspaper having wide circulation in the state in which the registered office of the company is situated, or such newspaper as may be directed by the Tribunal and shall also be placed, not less than thirty days before the date fixed for the meeting, on the website of the company of the SEBI and the recognized stock exchange where the securities of the company are listed.
  • Provided that where separate meetings of classes of creditors or members are to be held, a joint advertisement for such meetings may be given.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 16.
Who is allowed to take part in voting in the meeting and what is the procedure of voting through proxy or through postal ballot?
Answer:

  • The person who receives the notice as a shareholder or creditor may within one month from date of receipt of the notice, vote in the meeting either in person of through electronics means to the adoption of the scheme of compromise and arrangement.
  • A notice under sub-section (3) shall provide that the persons to whom the notice is sent may vote in the meeting either themselves or through proxies or by postal ballot to the adoption of the compromise or arrangement within one month from the date of receipt of such notice.
  • Provided that any objection to the compromise or arrangement shall be made only by persons holding not less than ten per cent of the shareholding or having outstanding debt amounting to not less than five per cent of the total outstanding debt as per the latest audited financial statement. [Section 230(4)]

Question 17.
What matters have to be covered under the Order of the tribunal?
Answer:
An order made by the Tribunal under sub-section (6) shall provide for all or any of the following matters, namely:
(a) where the compromise or arrangement provides for conversion of preference shares into equity shares, such preference shareholders shall be given an option to either obtain arrears of dividend in cash or accept equity shares equal to the value of the dividend payable;
(b) the protection of any class of creditors;
(c) if the compromise or arrangement results in the variation of the shareholders’ rights, it shall be given effect to under the provisions of
section 48;
(d) if the compromise or arrangement is agreed to by the creditors under sub-section (6), any proceedings pending before the Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction established under section 4 of the Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985 shall abate;
(e) such other matters including exit offerto dissenting shareholders, if any, as are in the opinion of the Tribunal necessary to effectively implement the terms of the compromise or arrangement.
Provided that no compromise or arrangement shall be sanctioned by the Tribunal unless a certificate by the company’s auditor has been filed with the Tribunal to the effect that the accounting treatment, if any, proposed in the scheme of compromise or arrangement is in conformity with the accounting standards prescribed under section 133. [Section 230(7)]

Question 18.
Explain the provisions related to merger and amalgamation of companies.
Answer:
Section 232 corresponds to section 394 of the Companies Act, 1956. It provides that –
Where an application is made to the Tribunal under section 230 for the sanctioning of a compromise or an arrangement proposed between a company and any such persons as are mentioned in that section, and it is shown to the Tribunal –
(a) that the compromise or arrangement has been proposed for the purposes of, or in connection with, a scheme for the reconstruction of the company or companies involving merger or the amalgamation of any two or more companies; and
(b) that under the scheme, the whole or any part of the undertaking, property or liabilities of any company (hereinafter referred to as the transferor company) is required to be transferred to another company (hereinafter referred to as the transferee company), or is proposed to be divided among and transferred to two or more companies, the Tribunal may on such application, order a meeting of the creditors or class of creditors or the members or class of members, as the case may be, to be called, held and conducted in such manner as the Tribunal may direct and the provisions of sub-sections (5) to (6) of section 230 shall apply mutatis mutandis. [Section 232(1)]
Where an order has been made by the Tribunal under sub-section (1), merging companies or the companies in respect of which a division is proposed, shall also be required to circulate the following for the meeting so ordered by the Tribunal, namely:
(a) the draft of the proposed terms of the scheme drawn up and adopted by the directors of the merging company;
(b) confirmation that a copy of the draft scheme has been filed with the Registrar;
(c) a report adopted by the directors of the merging companies explaining effect of compromise on each class of shareholders, key managerial personnel, promotors and non-promoter shareholders laying out in particular the share exchange ratio, specifying any special valuation difficulties;
(d) the report of the expert with regard to valuation, if any;
(e) a supplementary accounting statement if the last annual accounts of any of the merging company relate to a financial year ending more than six months before the first meeting of the company summoned forthe purposes of approving the scheme. [Section 232(2)]

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 19.
How merger and amalgamation takes place in the case of certain companies as per Section 233?
Answer:
Notwithstanding the provisions of section 230 and section 232, a scheme of merger or amalgamation may be entered into between two or more small companies or between a holding company and its wholly-owned subsidiary company or such other class or classes of companies as may be prescribed, subject to the following, namely:
(a) a notice of the proposed scheme inviting objections or suggestions, if any, from the Registrar and Official Liquidators where registered office of the respective companies are situated or persons affected by the scheme within thirty days is issued by the transferor company or companies and the transferee company;
(b) the objections and suggestions received are considered by the companies in their respective general meetings and the scheme is approved by the respective members or class of members at a general meeting holding at least ninety per cent, of the total number of shares;
(c) each of the companies involved in the merger files a declaration of solvency, in the prescribed form, with the Registrar of the place where the registered office of the company is situated; and
(d) the scheme is approved by majority representing nine-tenths in value of the creditors or class of creditors of respective companies indicated in a meeting convened by the company by giving a notice of twenty one days along with the scheme to its creditors for the purpose or otherwise approved in writing.

  • The transferee company shall file a copy of the scheme so approved in the manner as may be prescribed, with the Central Government, Registrar and the Official Liquidator where the registered office of the company is situated.
  • On the receipt of the scheme, if the Registrar or the Official Liquidator has no objections or suggestions to the scheme, the Central Government shall register the same and issue a confirmation thereof to the companies.
  • If the Registrar or Official Liquidator has any objections or suggestions, he may communicate the same in writing to the Central Government within a period of thirty days: Provided that if no such communication is made, it shall be presumed that he has no objection to the scheme.
  • If the Central Government after receiving the objections or suggestions or for any reason is of the opinion that such a scheme is not in public interest or in the interest of the creditors, it may file an application before the Tribunal within a period of sixty days of the receipt of the scheme under sub-section (2) stating its objections and requesting that the Tribunal may consider the scheme under section 232.
  • On receipt of an application from the Central Government or from any person, if the Tribunal, for reasons to be recorded in writing, is of the opinion that the scheme should be considered as per the procedure laid down in section 232, the Tribunal may direct accordingly or it may confirm the scheme by passing such order as it deems fit.
    Provided that if the Central Government does not have any objection to the scheme or it does not file any application under this section before the Tribunal, it shall be deemed that it has no objection to the scheme.
  • A copy of the order under sub-section (6) confirming the scheme shall be communicated to the Registrar having jurisdiction over the transferee company and the persons concerned and the Registrar shall register the scheme and issue a confirmation thereof to the companies and such confirmation shall be communicated to the Registrars where transferor company or companies were situated.
  • The registration of the scheme under sub-section (3) or sub-section (7) shall be deemed to have the effect of dissolution of the transferor company without process of winding-up.

The registration of the scheme shall have the following effects, namely:-
(a) transfer of property or liabilities of the transferor company to the transferee company so that the property becomes the property of the transferee company and the liabilities become the liabilities of the transferee company;
(b) the charges, if any, on the property of the transferor company shall be applicable and enforceable as if the charges were on the property of the transferee company;
(c) legal proceedings by or against the transferor company pending before any court of law shall be continued by or against the transferee company; and
(d) where the scheme provides for purchase of shares held by the dissenting shareholders or settlement of debt due to dissenting creditors, such amount, to the extent it is unpaid, shall become the liability of the transferee company.

  • A transferee company shall not on merger or amalgamation, hold any shares in its own name or in the name of any trust either on its behalf or on behalf of any of its subsidiary or associate company and all such shares shall be cancelled or extinguished on the merger or amalgamation.
  • The transferee company shall file an application with the Registrar along with the scheme registered, indicating the revised authorised capital and pay the prescribed fees due on revised capital.
    Provided that the fee, if any, paid by the transferor company on its authorised capital priorto its merger or amalgamation with the transferee company shall be set-off against the fees payable by the transferee company on its authorised capital enhanced by the merger or amalgamation.
  • The provisions of this section shall mutatis mutandis apply to a company or companies specified in subsection (1) in respect of a scheme of compromise or arrangement referred to in section 230 or division or transfer of a company referred to clause (b) of sub-section (1) of section 232.
  • The Central Government may provide for the merger or amalgamation of companies in such manner as may be prescribed.
  • A company covered under this section may use the provisions of section 232 for the approval of any scheme for merger or amalgamation.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 20.
Describe the process of merger or amalgamation of company with foreign company.
Answer:

  • The provisions of section 234 (1) unless otherwise provided under any other law for the time being in force, shall apply mutatis mutandis to schemes of mergers and amalgamations between companies registered under Section 123 of this Act and companies incorporated in the jurisdictions of such countries as may be notified from time to time by the Central Government.
  • Provided that the Central Government may make rules, in consultation with the Reserve Bank of India, in connection with mergers and amalgamations provided under this section.
  • Subject to the provisions of any other law for the time being in force, a foreign company, may with the prior approval of the Reserve Bank of India, merge into a company registered under this Act or vice versa and the terms and conditions of the scheme of merger may provide, among other things, for the payment of consideration to the shareholders of the merging company in cash, or in Depository Receipts, or partly in cash and partly in Depository Receipts, as the case may be, as per the scheme to be drawn up for the purpose.

Question 21.
Are there any separate provisions for acquiring shares of dissenting
shareholders from scheme or contract approved by majority?
Answer:

  • Yes, there are any separate provisions for acquiring shares from dissenting shareholders under Section 235.
  • Where a scheme or contract involving the transfer of shares or any class of shares in a company (the transferor company) to another company (the transferee company) has, within four months after making of an offer in that behalf by the transferee company, been approved by the holders of not less than nine-tenths in value of the shares whose transfer is involved, other than shares already held at the date of the offer by, or by a nominee of the transferee company or its subsidiary companies, the transferee company may, at anytime within two months after the expiry of the said four months, give notice in the prescribed manner to any dissenting shareholder that it desires to acquire his shares.
  • Where a notice under sub-section (1) is given, the transferee company shall, unless on an application made by the dissenting shareholder to the Tribunal, within one month from the date on which the notice was given and the Tribunal thinks fit to order otherwise, be entitled to and bound to acquire those shares on the terms on which, under the scheme or contract, the shares of the approving shareholders are to be transferred to the transferee company.
  • Where a notice has been given by the transferee company under sub-section (1) and the Tribunal has not, on an application made by the dissenting shareholder, made an order to the contrary, the transferee company shall, on the expiry of one month from the date on which the notice has been given, or, if an application to the Tribunal by the dissenting shareholder is then pending, after that application has been
    disposed of, send a copy of the notice to the transferor company together with an instrument of transfer, to be executed on behalf of the shareholder by any person appointed by the transferor company and on its own behalf by the transferee company, and pay or transfer to the transferor company the amount or other consideration representing the price payable by the transferee company for the shares which, by virtue of this section, that company is entitled to acquire, and the transferor company shall-
    (a) thereupon register the transferee company as the holder of those shares; and
    (b) within one month of the date of such registration, inform the dissenting shareholders of the fact of such registration and of the receipt of the amount or other consideration representing the price payable to them by the transferee company.
  • Any sum received by the transferor company under this section shall be paid into a separate bank account, and any such sum and any other consideration so received shall be held by that company in trust for the several persons entitled to the shares in respect of which the said sum or other consideration were respectively received and shall be disbursed to the entitled shareholders within sixty days.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 22.
How the shares will be treated in the absence of a physical delivery of shares by the shareholders within the time specified by the company?
Answer:

  • In such a case, the share certificates shall be deemed to be cancelled, and the transferor company shall be authorised to issue shares in lieu of the cancelled shares and complete the transfer in accordance with law and make payment of the price out of deposit made under sub-section (4) by the majority in advance to the minority by despatch of such payment.
  • In the event of a majority shareholder or shareholders requiring a full purchase and making payment of price by deposit with the company for any shareholder or shareholders who have died or ceased to exist, or whose heirs, successors, administrators or assignees have not been brought on record by transmission, the right of such shareholders to make an offer for sale of minority equity shareholding shall continue and be available for a period of three years from the date of majority acquisition or majority shareholding.
  • Where the shares of minority shareholders have been acquired in pursuance of this section and as on or prior to the date of transfer following such acquisition, the shareholders holding seventy-five per cent or more minority equity shareholding negotiate or reach an understanding on a higher price for any transfer, proposed or agreed upon, of the shares held by them without disclosing the fact or likelihood of transfer taking place on the basis of such negotiation, understanding or agreement, the majority shareholders shall share the additional compensation so received by them with such minority shareholders on a pro rata basis.

Question 23.
Describe the power of Central Government to provide for amalgamation of companies in public interest.
Answer:
Section 237 corresponds to section 396 of the Companies Act, 1956.

  1. In case the Central Government is satisfied that it is essential in the public interest that two or more companies should amalgamate, the Central Government may, by order notified in the Official Gazette, provide for the amalgamation of those companies into a single company with such constitution, with such property, powers, rights, interests, authorities and privileges, and with such liabilities, duties and obligations, as may be specified in the order.
  2. The order under sub-section (1) may also provide for the continuation by or against the transferee company of any legal proceedings pending by or against any transferor company and such consequential, incidental and supplemental provisions as may, in the opinion of the Central Government, be necessary to give effect to the amalgamation.
  3. Every member or creditor, including a debenture holder, of each of the transferor companies before the amalgamation shall have, as nearly as may be, the same interest in or rights against the transferee company as he had in the company of which he was originally a member or creditor, and in case the interest or rights of such member or creditor in or against the transferee company are less than his interest in or rights against the original company, he shall be entitled to compensation to that extent, which shall be assessed by such authority as may be prescribed and every such assessment shall be published in the Official Gazette, and the compensation so assessed shall be paid to the member or creditor concerned by the transferee company.
  4. Any person aggrieved by any assessment of compensation made by the prescribed authority under subsection (3) may, within a period of thirty days from the date of publication of such assessment in the Official Gazette, prefer an appeal to the Tribunal and thereupon the assessment of the compensation shall be made by the Tribunal.
  5. No order shall be made under this section unless
    (a) a copy of the proposed order has been sent in draft to each of the companies concerned;
    (b) the time for preferring an appeal under sub-section (4) has expired, or where any such appeal has been preferred, the appeal has been finally disposed of; and
    (c) the Central Government has considered, and made such modifications, if any, in the draft order as it may deem fit in the light of suggestions and objections which may be received by it from any such company within such period as the Central Government may fix in that behalf, not being less than two months from the date on which the copy aforesaid is received by that company, or from any class of shareholders therein, or from any creditors or any class of creditors thereof.
  6. The copies of every order made under this section shall, as soon as may be after it has been made, be laid before each House of Parliament.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 24.
State the provisions regarding the registration of offer of schemes involving transfer of shares.
Answer:
Section 238 corresponds to Section 395(4A) of the Companies Act, 1956. It lays down that –
In relation to every offer of a scheme or contract involving the transfer of shares or any class of shares in the transferor company to the transferee company under section 235,
(a) every circular containing such offer and recommendation to the members of the transferor company by its directors to accept such offer shall be accompanied by such information and in such manner as may be prescribed;
(b) every such offer shall contain a statement by or on behalf of the transferee company, disclosing the steps it has taken to ensure that necessary cash will be available; and
(c) every such circular shall be presented to the Registrar for registration and no such circular shall be issued until it is so registered: Provided that the Registrar may refuse, for reasons to be recorded in writing, to register any such circular which does not contain the information required to be given under clause (a) or which sets out such information in a manner likely to give a false impression, and communicate such refusal to the parties within thirty days of the application.

  • An appeal shall lie to the Tribunal against an order of the Registrar refusing to register any circular under-sub-section (1).
  • The director who issues a circular which has not been presented for registration and registered under clause (c) of sub-section (1), shall be punishable with fine which shall not be less than twenty-five thousand rupees but which may extend to five lakh rupees.

Question 25.
What is Asset memorandum?
Answer:
On forming the liquidation estate under section 36, the liquidator shall prepare an asset memorandum in accordance with this Regulation within seventy-five days from the liquidation commencement date.
The asset memorandum shall provide the following details in respect of the assets which are intended to be realized by way of sale –
(a) value of the asset, valued in accordance with Regulation 35;
(b) value of the assets or business(s) under clauses (b) to (f) of regulation 32, valued in accordance with regulation 35, if intended to be sold under those clauses;
(c) intended manner of sale in accordance with Regulation 32, and reasons for the same;
(d) the intended mode of sale and reasons for the same in accordance with Regulation 33;
(e) expected amount of realization from sale; and
(f) any other information that may be relevant for the sale of the asset.

The asset memorandum shall provide the following details in respect of each of the assets other than those referred to in sub-regulation (2)
(a) value of the asset;
(b) intended manner and mode of realization, and reasons for the same;
(c) expected amount of realization; and
(d) any other information that may be relevant for the realization of the asset.

  • The liquidator shall file the asset memorandum along with the preliminary report to the Adjudicating Authority.
  • The asset memorandum shall not be accessible to any person during the course of liquidation, unless permitted by the Adjudicating Authority.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 26.
How valuation is done of the assets intended to be sold?
Answer:

  • Where the valuation has been conducted under regulation 35 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016 or regulation 34 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Fast Track Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2017, as the case may be, the liquidator shall consider the average of the estimates of the values arrived under those provisions for the purposes of valuations under these regulations.
  • In cases not covered under sub-regulation (1), the liquidator shall within seven days of the liquidation commencement date, appoint two registered valuers to determine the realisable value of the assets or businesses under clauses (a) to (f) of regulation 32 of the corporate debtor.
    Provided that the following persons shall not be appointed as registered valuers, namely:
    (a) a relative of the liquidator;
    (b) a related party of the corporate debtor;
    (c) an auditor of the corporate debtor at any time during the five years preceding the insolvency commencement date; or
    (d) a partner or director of the insolvency professional entity of which the liquidator is a partner or director.
  • The Registered Valuers appointed under sub-regulation (2) shall independently submit to the liquidator the estimates of realisable value of the assets or businesses, as the case may be, computed in accordance with the Companies (Registered Valuers and Valuation) Rules, 2017, after physical verification of the assets of the corporate debtor.
  • The average of two estimates received under sub-regulation (3) shall be taken as the value of the assets or businesses.

Question 27.
How the valuation takes place under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code?
Answer:

  • Valuation is required to be made in respect of any property, stocks, shares, debentures, securities or goodwill etc. under the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.
  • Similarly, valuation is also required under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. According to regulation 2(h) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Liquidation Process) Regulations, 2016, “registered valuer” means a person registered as such in accordance with the Companies Act, 2013 and rules made thereunder.
  • Thus, a valuer registered under the Companies Act, 2013 can also undertake valuation underthe Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

Question 28.
State the contents of Asset sale report?
Answer:
On sale of an asset, the liquidator shall prepare an asset sale report in respect of said asset, to be enclosed with the Progress Reports, containing
(a) the realized value;
(b) cost of realization, if any;
(c) the manner and mode of sale;
(d) if the value realized is less than the value in the asset memorandum, the reasons for the same;
(e) the person to whom the sale is made; and
(f) any other details of the sale.

Question 29.
Describe the procedure of realization of security interest by secured creditor.
Answer:

  • • A secured creditor who seeks to realize its security interest under section 52 shall intimate the liquidator of the price at which he proposes to realize its secured asset.
  • The liquidator shall inform the secured creditor within twenty one days of receipt of the intimation under sub-regulation (1) if a person is willing to buy the secured asset before the expiry of thirty days from the date of intimation under sub-regulation (1), at a price higher than the price intimated under sub-regulation (1).
  • Where the liquidator informs the secured creditor of a person willing to buy the secured asset under sub-regulation (2), the secured creditor shall sell the asset to such person.
  • If the liquidator does not inform the secured creditor in accordance with sub-regulation (2), or the person does not buy the secured asset in accordance with sub-regulation (2), the secured creditor may realize the secured asset in the manner it deems fit, but at least at the price intimated under sub-regulation (1).
  • Where the secured asset is realized under sub-regulation (3), the secured creditor shall bear the cost of identification of the buyer under sub-regulation (2).
  • Where the secured asset is realized under sub-regulation (4), the liquidator shall bear the cost of incurred to identify the buyer under sub-regulation (2).
  • The provisions of this Regulation shall not apply if the secured creditor enforces his security interest under the Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002 or the Recovery of Debts and Bankruptcy Act, 1993.

Resolution Strategies - CS Professional Study Material

Question 30.
How the distribution is done of the unsold assets?
Answer:
The liquidator may, with the permission of the Adjudicating Authority, distribute amongst the stakeholders, an asset that cannot be readily or advantageously sold due to its peculiar nature or other special circumstances.
The application seeking permission of the Adjudicating Authority under sub-regulation (1) shall
(a) identify the asset;
(b) provide a value of the asset;
(c) detail the efforts made to sell the asset, if any; and
(d) provide reasons for such distribution.

Question 31.
Explain the process of realizing the uncalled capital or unpaid capital contribution by the liquidator.
Answer:

  • The liquidator shall realize any amount due from any contributory to the corporate debtor.
  • Notwithstanding any charge or encumbrance on the uncalled capital of the corporate debtor, the liquidator shall be entitled to call and realize the uncalled capital of the corporate debtor and to collect the arrears, if any, due on calls made prior to the liquidation, by providing a notice to the contributory to make the payments within fifteen days from the receipt of the notice, but shall hold all moneys so realized subject to the rights, if any, of the holder of any such charge or encumbrance.
  • No distribution shall be made to a contributory, unless he makes his contribution to the uncalled or unpaid capital as required in the constitutional documents of the corporate debtor.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 4 Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
You are appointed as Resolution Professional by Committee of Creditors. You have made a public announcement inviting Expression of Interest. Based on your invitation few Parties have submitted Resolution plans. As per the provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC, 2016) Resolution plans submitted should satisfy few criteria. As a Resolution Professional brief the criteria for a valid Resolution Plan under IBC, 2016. (Dec 2020, 6 marks)
Answer:
Section 30(2) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that the Resolution Professional shall examine each resolution plan received by him to confirm that each resolution plan fulfils the following criteria:
(a) provides for the payment of insolvency resolution process costs in a manner specified by the Board in priority to the payment of other debts of the corporate debtor:
(b) provides for the payment of the debts of operational creditors in such manner as may be specified by the Board which shall not be less than the amount to be paid to the operational creditors in the event of a liquidation of the corporate debtor under section 53, whichever is higher, and provides for the payment of debts of financial creditors, who do not vote in favour of the resolution plan, in such manner as may be specified by the Board, which shall not be less than the amount to be paid to such creditors in accordance with sub-section (1) of Section 53 in the event of a liquidation of the corporate debtor.
(c) provides for the management of the affairs of the Corporate debtor after approval of the resolution plan;
(d) the implementation and supervision of the resolution plan;
(e) does not contravene any of the provisions of the law for the time being in force,
(f) conforms to such other requirements as may be specified by the Board
Explanation: For the purposes of clause (e), if any approval of shareholders is required under the Companies Act, 2013 or any other lawfor the time being in force for the implementation of actions under the resolution plan, such approval shall be deemed to have been given and it shall not be a contravention of that Act or law.
If the Resolution Professional is satisfied that the resolution plan fulfils the above criteria, he shall present such resolution plan to the committee of creditors for its approval.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
ESI Ltd. filed Corporate Insolvency Resolution Plan (CIRP) with the Adjudicating Authority, which was accepted, and Expression of Interest (EOI) was invited. One N Ltd. filed EOI. It was noticed that N Ltd was incorporated just 7 days before submission of the EOI as joint venture between AE Ltd. and other two companies. It was further come to the notice that AE Ltd. was completely held by Sawant Seth (through various companies and a trust), said Sawant Seth was son of Ravi Seth, who was promoter of ESI Ltd.
You as a Resolution Professional in this case, what would you suggest the Committee of Creditors and Adjudicating Authority about the acceptance or rejection of the EOI. Give reasons and quote the decided case law. (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
Persons not Eligible to be Resolution Applicant:
Section 29A of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides the list of persons who are not eligible to be resolution applicant. Sub-clause (c) of Section 29A provides as under:
A person shall not be eligible to submit a resolution plan, if such person, or any other person acting jointly or in concert with such person:
(c) at the time of submission of the resolution plan has an account, or an account of a corporate debtor under the management or control of such person or of whom such person is a promoter, classified as non¬performing asset in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India issued under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 or the guidelines of a financial sector regulator issued under any other law for the time being in force, and at least a period of one year has lapsed from the date of such classification till the date of commencement of the corporate insolvency resolution process of the corporate debtor.
Provided that the person shall be eligible to submit a resolution plan if such person makes payment of all overdue amounts with interest thereon and charges relating to non-performing asset accounts before submission of resolution plan.
The case is similar to Arcelormittal India (P.) Ltd.v. Satish Kumar Gupta & Others, decided by the Supreme Court, dated 4th October, 2018. The Apex Court in the case had opined as under:
(a) Section 29A(c) is a see-through provision; therefore, great care must be taken to ensure that persons who are in-charge of corporate debtor for whom such resolution plan is made, do not come back in some other form to regain control of company without first paying off its debts.

(b) Any person who wishes to submit a resolution plan acting jointly or in concert with other persons who happens to either manage or control or be promoters of a corporate debtor which is classified as an NPA and whose debts have not been paid off for a period of at least one year before commencement of corporate insolvency resolution process, will be ineligible to submit a resolution plan; and in order to become eligible under section 29A(c), he or it must ‘pay off debt’ before submission of the resolution plan.

(c) The antecedent facts reasonably proximate to point of time of submitting resolution plan is to be seen and if at a reasonably proximate point of time before submission of resolution plan, affairs of persons referred to in section 29A are so arranged as to avoid paying off debts of non¬performing asset concerned, such persons must be held to be ineligible to submit a resolution plan.

(d) The term ‘connected person’ covers (i) a promoter or a person in management and control of resolution applicant, (ii) promoter or a person in management or control of business of corporate debtor during implementation of resolution plan and (iii) holding companies, subsidiary companies and associate companies or related parties of persons.
In view of the above, the Committee of Creditors and the Adjudicating Authority shall reject the Expression of Interest (EOI) filed by N Ltd.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material

Question 3.
National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) has initiated CIRP on application of one of Operational Creditors of DOP Ltd. A Resolution Professional was appointed after all processes as per the Law. Two viable Resolutions Plans (Plan A and Plan B) were received. Committee of Creditors comprises of Three Financial Creditors. As per Regulations of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016, what is the approval status of Resolution Plans (Plan A and Plan B) for various instances of Voting outcome as mentioned below ?
Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material 1
Also clarify the requisite voting percentage and tie-breakerformula as per the aforesaid Regulations. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
Status of Voting outcome:
Voting outcome 1:
No Plan is approved, as neither of the Plan received requisite votes. The committee shall vote again on Plan B, which received the higher votes, subject to the timelines under the code.
Voting outcome 2:
Plan B is approved, as it received higher votes, which is not less than requisite votes.
Voting outcome 3:
The committee shall approve either Plan A Or Plan B, as per the tie-reaker epression announced before voting.
As per the amended Provision of Regulation 39 of IBBI (CIRP) Regulationterequisite vote for approving the Resolution plan is 66% (Reduced from 75%). Tie-breaker formula is a method to break the equality in votes. This has to be decided prior to the meeting and should be communicated to all CoC Members.

Question 4.
What is a resolution plan?
Answer:

  • A resolution plan is a proposal that aims to provide a resolution to the problem of the corporate debtor’s insolvency and its consequent inability to pay-off debts.
  • It needs to be approved by the committee of creditors (COC), and comply with some mandatory requirements prescribed in the Code.
  • After approval, the Resolution Professional needs to send the plan to the NCLT after certifying that the plan meets the requirements of the Code.
  • If the NCLT is also satisfied that the plan meets the requirements, it will pass an order approving the plan.

Question 5.
Explain Section 31(1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code.
Answer:

  • After approval by the NCLT, Section 31(1) makes the resolution plan binding on the corporate debtor and its employees, members, creditors, guarantors and other stakeholders involved in the resolution plan.
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides a time-bound process for insolvency resolution for a corporate debtor.
  • Thus, by avoiding liquidation, the inherent business value in the debtor is preserved.

Question 6.
Explain the process of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP).
Answer:

  • As soon as the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) is triggered a moratorium is applicable on all proceedings against the Corporate Debtor till the expiry of 180 days (which is extendable to 270 days) or earlier till a resolution plan is approved by the adjudicating authority.
  • The Resolution Professional (RP) appointed by the Committee of Creditors (CoC), in its first meeting is required to prepare an Information Memorandum and invite Resolution Applicants (RAs) to present a resolution plan for the revival of the Corporate Debtor.
  • In case if a resolution plan is not received or is disapproved by the CoC or the Adjudicating Authority, the resolution process fails and a liquidation order is passed under the provision of Section 33 of the Code.
  • RP will then invite prospective lenders, investors and ‘any other persons’ to submit Resolution Plans for the revival of the Corporate Debtor.
  • In effect, any financial institution, private investors, competitors and even the ex-management of the Corporate Debtor can obtain the Information Memorandum from the RP and submit a plan.
  • The mandatory requirement to be fulfilled by a plan is laid down under Section 30 of the code and included details of insolvency resolution process costs, liquidation value to operational creditors and dissenting financial creditors, its supervision and implementation schedule, and the management and control of the corporate debtor during its term.
  • Earlier, the RP had no discretion in rejecting any plan received, now with the amended section 25(h) any plan by a person not meeting the specified criteria is liable to be rejected by the RP and will not be presented before the CoC.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
Define “Resolution Applicant”.
Answer:
Section 5 (25) of the code has defined “resolution applicant” as a person, who individually or jointly with any other person, submits a resolution plan to the resolution professional pursuant to the invitation made under clause (h) of sub-section (2) of section 25.

Question 8.
What is the eligibility criteria of becoming Resolution Applicant?
Answer:
The newly added section 29A of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Act, 2018 declares certain persons ineligible to be a resolution applicant and prohibits such persons from submitting a resolution plan.
It provides that a person shall not be eligible to submit a resolution plan, if such person, or any other person acting jointly or in concert with such person
(a) is an undischarged insolvent;
(b) is a wilful defaulter in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India issued under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949;
(c) at the time of submission of the resolution plan has an account, or an account of a corporate debtor under the management or control of such person or of whom such person is a promoter, classified as non-performing asset in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India issued under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 or the guidelines of a financial sector regulator issued under any other law for the time being in force, and at least a period of one year has lapsed from the date of such classification till the date of commencement of the corporate insolvency resolution process of the corporate debtor.
(d) has been convicted for any offence punishable with imprisonment –
(i) for two years or more under any Act specified under the 12th
Schedule; or
(ii) for seven years or more under any law for the time being in force.
(e) is disqualified to act as a director under the Companies Act, 2013
(f) is prohibited by the Securities and Exchange Board of India from trading in securities or accessing the securities markets;
(g) has been a promoter or in the management or control of a corporate debtor in which a preferential transaction, undervalued transaction, extortionate credit transaction or fraudulent transaction has taken place and in respect of which an order has been made by the Adjudicating Authority under this Code.
(h) has executed a guarantee in favour of a creditor in respect of a corporate debtor against which an application for insolvency resolution made by such creditor has been admitted under this Code and such guarantee has been invoked by the creditor and remains unpaid in full or part;
(i) is subject to any disability, corresponding to clauses (a) to (h), under any law in a jurisdiction outside India;
(j) has a connected person not eligible under clauses (a) to (i).

Question 9.
Who can be referred to as a connected person?
Answer:

  • any person who is the promoter or in the management or control of the resolution applicant; or
  • any person who shall be the promoter or in management or control of the business of the corporate debtor during the implementation of the resolution plan; or
  • the holding company, subsidiary company, associate company or related party of a person referred to in clauses (i) and (ii)

Question 10.
Explain the provisions of section 25 (2).
Answer:

  • The resolution professional, under clause (h) of sub-section (2) of section 25, invites prospective resolution applicants, who fulfil such criteria as may be laid down by him with the approval of committee of creditors, having regard to the complexity and scale of operations of the business of the corporate debtor and such other conditions as may be specified by the Board, to submit a resolution plan or plans.
  • An information memorandum containing all relevant information required by the resolution applicant to make the resolution plan for the corporate debtor is prepared by the resolution professional.
  • Such information includes information relating to the financial position of the corporate debtor, all information related to disputes by or against the corporate debtor as well as any other matter pertaining to the corporate debtor as may be specified.

Section 29(2) provides that the resolution professional shall provide to the resolution applicant access to all relevant information in physical and electronic form, provided such resolution applicant undertakes
(a) to comply with provisions of law for the time being in force relating to confidentiality and insider trading;
(b) to protect any intellectual property of the corporate debtor it may have access to; and
(c) not to share relevant information with third parties unless clauses (a) and (b) above are complied with.

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material

Question 11.
Explain the process of submission of the resolution plan by a resolution applicant.
Answer:

  • Section 30 of the Code prescribes the manner in which a resolution plan may be submitted by a resolution applicant.
  • The resolution professional is required to submit each resolution plan, which conforms to the criteria in section 30(2), to the committee of creditors who shall approve a resolution plan by a vote of not less than sixty-six percent of voting share of the financial creditors, after considering its feasibility and viability, and such other requirements as may be specified by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India.
  • Once the resolution plan is approved by the committee of creditors, it is then presented to the adjudicating authority for its approval.
  • Section 30(1) of the Code provides that a resolution applicant may submit a resolution plan along with an affidavit stating that he is eligible under section 29A to the resolution professional prepared on the basis of the information memorandum plan.

Question 12.
Process of examination of resolution plan by resolution professional.
Answer:
Section 30(2) further provides that the resolution professional shall examine
each resolution plan received by him to confirm that each resolution plan:
(a) provides for the payment of insolvency resolution process costs in a manner specified by the Board in priority to the payment of other debts of the corporate debtor;
(b) provides for the payment of the debts of operational creditors in such manner as may be specified by the Board which shall not be less than the amount to be paid to the operational creditors in the event of a liquidation of the corporate debtor under section 53;
(c) provides for the management of the affairs of the Corporate debtor after approval of the resolution plan;
(d) The implementation and supervision of the resolution plan;
(e) does not contravene any of the provisions of the law for the time being in force.
(f) confirms to such other requirements as may be specified by the Board.

Question 13.
In what manner the Resolution plans are to be submitted to committee of creditors?
Answer:

  • The resolution professional shall present to the committee of creditors for its approval such resolution plans which confirm the conditions referred to in sub section (2) of section 30. [Section 30(3)].
  • Approval by committee of creditors – Section 30(4) of the Code provides that the committee of creditors may approve a resolution plan by a vote of not less than sixty-six percent of voting share of the financial creditors, after considering its feasibility and viability, and such other requirements as may be specified by the Board.
  • Provided that the committee of creditors shall not approve a resolution plan, submitted before the commencement of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Ordinance, 2017 where the resolution applicant is ineligible under section 29A and may require the resolution professional to invite a fresh resolution plan where no other resolution plan is available with it.
  • Provided further that where the resolution applicant referred to in the first proviso is ineligible under clause (c) of section 29A, the resolution applicant shall be allowed by the committee of creditors such period, not exceeding thirty days, to make payment of overdue amounts in accordance with the proviso to clause (c) of section 29A.
  • Provided also that nothing in the second proviso shall be construed as extension of period for the purposes of the proviso to sub-section (3) of section 12, and the corporate insolvency resolution process shall be completed within the period specified in that subsection].
  • Provided also that the eligibility criteria in section 29A as amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Ordinance, 2018 shall apply to the resolution applicant who has not submitted resolution plan as on the date of commencement of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Ordinance, 2018.
  • The resolution applicant may attend the meeting of the committee of creditors in which the resolution plan of the applicant is considered but shall not have a right to vote at the meeting of the committee of creditors unless such resolution applicant is also a financial creditor.
  • After approval by the committee of creditors, the resolution professional shall submit the resolution plan to the Adjudicating Authority. [Section 30(6)].

Insolvency Resolution of Corporate Persons - CS Professional Study Material

Question 14.
How to obtain the approval of Resolution Plan by the Adjudicating Authority.
Answer:

  • As per Section 31(1), if the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that the resolution plan as approved by the committee of creditors under sub-section (4) of section 30 meets the requirements as referred to in sub-section (2) of section 30, it shall by order approve the resolution plan.
  • Such resolution plan shall be binding on the corporate debtor and its employees, members, creditors, guarantors and other stakeholders involved in the resolution plan.
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Second Amendment) Act, 2018 added to a proviso to sub-section (1) of section 31. The newly added proviso provides that the Adjudicating Authority, before passing an order for approval of resolution plan under sub-section (1) to section 31, shall satisfy that the resolution plan has provisions for its effective implementation.
  • Where the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that the resolution plan does not confirm to the requirements referred to in sub-section (1), it may, by an order, reject the resolution plan. [Section 31(2)].
  • Section 31 (3) provides that if the adjudicating authority passes an order of approval under sub-section (1) of section 31,
    (a) the moratorium order passed by the Adjudicating Authority under section 14 shall cease to have effect; and
    (b) the resolution professional shall forward all records relating to the conduct of the corporate insolvency resolution process and the resolution plan to the Board to be recorded on its database.

Question 15.
Explain the grounds of filing an appeal against the order approving the resolution plan.
Answer:
According to section 61(3), an appeal against an order approving a resolution plan under section 31 may be filed on the following grounds:

  • the approved resolution plan is in contravention of the provisions of any law for the time being in force,
  • there has been material irregularity in exercise of the powers by the resolution professional during the corporate insolvency resolution period,
  • the debts owed to operational creditors of the corporate debtor have not been provided for in the resolution plan in the manner specified by the Board,
  • the insolvency resolution process costs have not been provided for repayment in priority to all other debts, or
  • the resolution plan does not comply with any other criteria specified by the Board.

Introduction to Business Modelling – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 13 Introduction to Business Modelling – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Introduction to Business Modelling – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material

Question 1.
(a) ‘Business Model defines how a Company provide value to customer and transfer payments to profits’. Elucidate the above statement by highlighting the key components of a business model. (June 2019) (5 marks)
(b) Sandeep, an IT graduate, has developed an e-platform to assist farmers to sell their produce directly to the bulk customers in the nearby cities, was unsure of selecting a suitable business model and has approached you to suggest one. As a Business Model consultant, select a suitable business model to Sandeep for his e-platform Application, and explain its features, advantages and drawbacks. (5 marks)
Answer:
(a) A business model embodies nothing less than the organizational and financial ‘architecture’ of a business. It is not a spread sheet or computer model, although a business model might well become embedded in a business plan and in income statements and cash flow projections. But, clearly, the notion refers in the first instance to a conceptual, rather than a financial model of a business.

It makes implicit assumptions about customers, the behaviour of revenues and costs, the changing nature of user needs, and likely competitor responses. It outlines the business logic required to earn a profit (if one is available to be earned) and, once adopted, defines (he way the enterprise ‘goes to market’. But it is not quite the same as a strategy. The following key components must be considered while developing a business model:

(i) High-level vision: The Vision describes the business model in brief.
(ii) Key objectives: The top goals and the plan to measure them.

(iii) Customer targets and challenges: The types of customers along with their exact pain points. Targeting a wide audience won’t allow business to hone in on customers who truly need and want product or service. Instead, when creating business model, narrow audience down to two or three detailed buyer personas. Outline each persona’s demographics, common challenges and the solutions the business model will offer.

(iv) Solution: The primary way that the business model solves customer’s problems. Solution could be a product, service, technology etc.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(v) Value: The core elements of the solution that make it unique and differentiated is value being offered to the customers. How will your company stand out among the competitors? Do you provide an innovative service, revolutionary product or a new twist on an old favourite? Establishing exactly what your business offers and why it’s better than competitors is the beginning of a strong value proposition. Once you have got a few value propositions defined, link each one to a service or product delivery system to determine how you will remain valuable to customers over time.

(vi) Pricing: How you will package your solution and what it will cost.

(vii) Messaging: A clear and compelling message that explains why your solution is worth buying.

(viii) Go-to-Market: The Channels that use to market and sell to customers. No business can function properly (let alone reach established goals) without key partners that contribute to the business’s ability to serve customers. When creating a business model, select key partners, like suppliers, strategic alliances or advertising partners.

Unless you’re taking a radical approach to launching your company, you’ll need a strategy that builds interest in your business, generates leads and is designed to close sales. How will customers find you? More importantly, what should they do once they become aware of your brand? Developing a demand generation strategy creates a blueprint of the customer’s journey while documenting the key motivators for taking action.

(ix) Investment required : The costs required to make the solution a success.

(x) Growth opportunity : The ways that you will growth the business, including key partnership if you need them. It is important to leave room for future innovations. Review initial plan often and implement changes as needed.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(b) Suitable Business Model: Become a Marketplaces is the right business model for Sandeep.

Features of the Market Place Model: Marketplace model means providing of an information technology platform by an e-commerce entity on a digital and electronic network to act as a facilitator between buyer and seller.

The main feature of the market place model is that the firm will be providing a platform for customers to interact with a selected number of sellers. When an individual is purchasing a product from the firm, he will be actually buying it from a registered seller. The product is not directly sold by the firm. Firm is just a website platform where a consumer meets a seller. Inventory, stock management, logistics etc are not supposed to be actively done by the firm.

Advantages
There are several advantages of using this form of business model. In this model the supply and demand would be brought together. Second, one of the greatest benefits is having Zero to little overhead, and no inventory. You can get a swanky office space if you want, or you can run the company virtually.

When you manufacture a product, you take on a lot more risk and pressure to make sure that inventory is sold. When you are the marketplace, instead of worrying about manufacturing costs, you are simply bringing the sellers to buyers (and Vice versa) and facilitating a transaction, taking a small slice of the pie from each transaction. You give sellers a place to make a profit and reach consumers, while customers are happy to find exactly what they want, usually at a discounted price.

Disadvantages
The Becomes a marketplace is not a bed of roses. There also are some drawbacks:

  • High web traffic is great, but the volume of product and brands on Become a marketplace makes it difficult to stand out from crowd.
  • The benefit of a Become a marketplace don’t come free. There would be some costs to the seller and buyer. Both the parties will see cost benefit analysis.
  • Become a marketplaces have their own rules about what can be listed and how it can be listed, and you must be able to work within those constraints, as opposed to having your own.

These trends suggest the businesses that will be most successful moving forward are the ones that can limit overhead and effectively connect with customers through websites and mobile apps.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
(a) Mohit, a Techie, who is fond of online games, has developed an online version of Trade Game’. The online game has allowed multiple persons from different location to login and play the game. After successfully developing the game, Mohit wondered how to select a business model for it and approached you for suggesting a suitable business model. Suggest a suitable Business Model to Mohit and explain with example how your model will suit his online gaming portal. (Dec 2019) (5 marks)

(b) Brief the purpose and usage of the following excel functions:
(i) EFFECT
(ii) ACCRINTM
(iii) NPER
(iv) XNPV
(v) DB.    (5 marks)

Question 3.
(i) Using Excel function, calculate the future value of an investment of ₹ 1,00,000/ over 5 years. The investment earns interest of 8% during the first two years, 6.5% in third year and 6% during 4th and 5th years, and also answer the following:
(ii) Which excel function is used for this calculation?
(iii) Show how this function is used in excel spread sheet. (June 2019, 5 marks)
Answer:
(i) 1,00,000 + (1,00,000 * 8%) ÷ (1,08,000 * 8%) + (1,16,640 * 6.5%) + (1,24,222 * 6%) + (1,31,675 * 6%) = INR 1,39,575
(ii) Excel function to be used: EV SCHEDULE

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(iii)

Interest = FV SCHEDULE (100000,C4 : C8)
8%
8%
6.50%
6%
6%

It is to be noted that in place of C4:C8 students may assume other cells also.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Question 4.
A Company’s paid up Capital is ₹ 1,000 lakh (Owner’s Equity). The Ratios for the Company are: (Dec 2019, 5 marks)

  • Current Debt to Total Debt 0.40
  • Total Debt to Owner’s Equity 0.60
  • Fixed Assets to Owner’s Equity 0.60
  • Total Assets Turnover 2 times
  • Inventory Turnover 8 times

Complete the following Balance Sheet given the information above:
Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material 1

Question 5.
Discuss the Key Financial Ratios?
Answer:
Key Financial Ratios
The key financial ratios discussed under this section are:

  1. Price Ratios
  2. Profitability Ratios
  3. Liquidity Ratios
  4. Debt Ratios
  5. Efficiency Ratios

The aforesaid ratios are discussed in the ensuing paragraphs.
1. Price Ratios: Price ratios are used to get an idea of whether a stock’s price is reasonable or not. They are easy to use and generally pretty intuitive, but do not forget this major caveat: Price ratios are “relative” metrics, meaning they are useful only when comparing one company’s ratio to another company’s ratio, a company’s ratio to itself over time, or a company’s ratio to a benchmark.

(a) Price-to-Earnings Ratio (P/E):
What you need: Income Statement, Most Recent Stock Price The formula: P/E Ratio = Price per Share / Earnings Per Share What it means: Think of the price-to-earnings ratio as the price you’ll pay for $1 of earnings. A very, very general rule of thumb is that shares trading at a “low” P/E are a value, though the definition of “low” varies from industry to industry.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(b) PEG Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement, Most Recent Stock Price The formula: PEG Ratio = (P/E Ratio) / Projected Annual Growth in Earnings per Share

What it means: The PEG ratio uses the basic format of the P/E ratio for a numerator and then divides by the potential growth for EPS, which you’ll have to estimate. The two ratios may seem to be very similar but the PEG ratio is able to take into account future earnings growth. A very generally rule of thumb is that any PEG ratio below 1.0 is considered to be a good value.

(c) Price-to-Sales Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement, Most Recent Stock Price The formula: Price-to-Sales Ratio = Price per Share / Annual Sales Per Share

What it means: Much like P/E or P/B, think of P/S as the price you’ll pay for $1 of sales. If you are comparing two different firms and you see that one frm’s P/S ratio is 2x and the other is 4x, it makes sense to figure out why investors are willing to pay more for the company with a P/S of 4x. The P/S ratio is a great tool because sales figures are considered to be relatively reliable while other income statement items, like earnings, can be easily manipulated by using different accounting rules.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(d) Price-to-Book Ratio (P/B):
What you need: Balance Sheet, Most Recent Stock Price The formula: P/B Ratio = Price per Share / Book Value per Share What it means: Book value (BV) is already listed on the balance sheet, it’s just under a different name: shareholder equity. Equity is the portion of the company that owners (i.e. shareholders) own free and clear. Dividing book value by the number of shares outstanding gives you book value per share.

Like P/E, the P/B ratio is essentially the number of dollars you’ll have to pay for $1 of equity. And like P/E, there are different criteria for what makes a P/B ratio “high” or “low.”

(e) Dividend Yield:
What you need: Income Statement, Most Recent Stock Price The formula: Dividend Yield = Dividend per Share / Price per Share What it means: Dividends are the main way companies return money to their shareholders. If a firm pays a dividend, it will be listed on the balance sheet, right above the bottom line. Dividend yield is used to compare different dividend-paying stocks. Some people prefer to invest in companies with a steady dividend, even if the dividend yield is low, while others prefer to invest in stocks with a high dividend yield.

(f) Dividend Payout Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement
The formula: Dividend Payout Ratio = Dividend / Net Income

What it means: The percentage of profits distributed as a dividend is called the dividend payout ratio. Some companies maintain a steady payout ratio, while other try to maintain a steady number of dollars paid out each year (which means the payout ratio will fluctuate). Each company sets its own dividend policy according to what it thinks is in the best interest of its shareholders. Income investors should keep an especially close eye on changes in dividend policy.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

2. Profitability Ratios: Profitability ratios tell you how good a company is at converting business operations into profits. Profit is a key driver of stock price, and it is undoubtedly one of the most closely followed metrics in business, finance and investing.
(a) Return on Assets (ROA):
What you need: Income Statement, Balance Sheet The formula: Return on Assets = Net Income / Average Total Assets What it means: A company buys assets (factories, equipment, etc.) in order to conduct its business. ROA tells you how good the company is at using its assets to make money. For example, if Company A reported $10,000 of net income and owns $100,000 in assets, its ROA is 10%. For ever $1 of assets it owns, it can , generate $0.10 in profits each year. With ROA, higher is better.

(b) Return on Equity (ROE):
What you need: Income Statement, Balance Sheet
The formula: Return on Equity = Net Income / Average Stockholder /Equity
What it means: Equity is another word for ownership. ROE tells you how good a company is at rewarding its shareholders for their investment. For example, if Company B reported $10,000 of net income and its shareholders have $200,000 in equity, its ROE is 5%. For every $1 of equity shareholders own, the company generates $0.05 in profits each year. As with ROA, higher is better.

(c) Profit Margin:
What you need: Income Statement
The formula: Profit Margin = Net Income / Sales
What it means: Profit margin calculates how much of a company’s total sales flow through to the bottom line. As you can probably tell, higher profits are better for shareholders, as is a high (and/or increasing) profit margin.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

3. Liquidity Ratios: Liquidity ratios indicate how capable a business is of meeting its short-term obligations. Liquidity is important to a company because when times are tough, a company without enough liquidity to pay its short-term debts could be forced to make unfavourable decisions in order to raise money (sell assets at a low price, borrow at high interest rates, sell part of the company to a vulture investor, etc.).
(a) Current Ratio:
What you need: Balance Sheet
The formula: Current Ratio = Current Assets / Current Liabilities What it means: The current ratio measures a company’s ability to pay its short-term liabilities with its short-term assets. If the ratio is over 1.0, the frm has more short-term assets than short-term debts. But if the current ratio is less than 1.0, the opposite is true and the company could be vulnerable to unexpected bumps in the economy or business climate.

(b) Quick Ratio:
What you need: Balance Sheet
The formula: Quick Ratio = (Current Assets – Inventory) / Current Liabilities
What it means: The quick ratio (also known as the acid-test ratio) is similar to the quick ratio in that it’s a measure of how well a company can meet its short-term financial liabilities. However, it takes the concept one step further. The quick ratio backs out inventory because it assumes that selling inventory would take several weeks or months. The quick ratio only takes into account those assets that could be used to pay short-term debts today.

4. Debt Ratios: These ratios concentrate on the long-term health of a business, particularly the effect of the capital and finance structure on the business.
(a) Debt to Equity Ratio:
What you need: Balance Sheet
The formula: Debt-to-Equity Ratio = Total Liabilities / Total Shareholder Equity

What it means: Total liabilities and total shareholder equity are both found on the balance sheet. The debt-to equity ratio measures the relationship between the amount of capital that has been borrowed (i.e. debt) and the amount of capital contributed by shareholders (i.e. equity). Generally speaking, as a firm’s debt-to-equity ratio increases, it becomes more risky because if it becomes unable to meet its debt obligations, it will be forced into bankruptcy.

(b) Interest Coverage Ratio:
What you need: Balance Sheet
The formula: Debt-to-Equity Ratio = Total Liabilities / Total Shareholder Equity

What it means: Total liabilities and total shareholder equity are both found on the balance sheet. The debt-to equity ratio measures the relationship between the amount of capital that has been borrowed (i.e. debt) and the amount of capital contributed by shareholders (i.e. equity). Generally speaking, as a firm’s debt-to-equity ratio increases, it becomes more risky because if it becomes unable to meet its debt obligations, it will be forced into bankruptcy.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

(c) Interest Coverage Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement
The formula: Interest Coverage Ratio = EBIT / Interest Expense

What it means: Both EBIT (aka, operating income) and interest expense are found on the income statement.
The interest coverage ratio, also known as times interest earned (TIE), is a measure of how well a company can meet its interest payment obligations. If a company can’t make enough to make interest payments, it will be forced into bankruptcy. Anything lower than 1.0 is usually a sign of trouble.

5. Efficiency Ratios: These ratios give investors insight into how efficiently a business is employing resources invested in fixed assets and working capital. It’s can also be a reflection of how effective a company’s management is.
(a) Asset Turnover Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement, Balance Sheet
The formula: Asset Turnover Ratio = Sales / Average Total Assets

What it means: Like return on assets (ROA), the asset turnover ratio tells you how good the company is at using its assets to make products to sell. For example, if Company A reported $100,000 of sales and owns $50,000 in assets, its asset turnover ratio is 2x. For ever $1 of assets it owns, it can generate $2 in sales each year.

(b) Inventory Turnover Ratio:
What you need: Income Statement, Balance Sheet
The formula: Inventory Turnover Ratio = Costs of Goods Sold / Average Inventory

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Question 6.
Explain the various types of business models.
Answer:
Types of Business Models
There are nine business models for a start-up business. They are as follows-

  1. Become The Middleman (AKA The “Warby Parker” Model)
  2. Become A Marketplace
  3. The Subscription Model
  4. Customized Everything
  5. On-Demand Model
  6. The Modernized Direct Sales Model
  7. Freemium Model
  8. Reverse Auction
  9. Virtual Good Model

1. Become The Middleman (AKA The “Warby Parker” Model):
Warby Parker had the simple idea back in 2010 we all wish we would have thought of first. They decided to enter the eyewear market, noticing that the market was monopolized by Luxottica, who basically control the price of designer eyewear. With the price bar set high, Warby Parker saw huge opportunity in the market, and realized that because most brands sold the rights to huge companies like. Luxottica that drastically increased their manufacturing and design costs,

2. Become A Marketplace:
One of the ever growing business models that continues to prove highly effective is becoming a marketplace. This means you are simply bringing supply and demand together. Air BNB reigns as one of the top success stories to implement this business model well. I’m guessing you thought renting rooms from random people’s homes via the internet was pretty creepy when you first heard the idea. We did too, but the AirBNB founders believed in the new “sharing economy”.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Why It Works:
There are several advantages to using this type of business model. First, one of the greatest benefits is having zero to little overhead, and no inventory. You can get a swanky office space if you want, or you can run the company virtually. When you manufacture a product, you take on a lot more risk and pressure to make sure that inventory is sold. When you are the marketplace, instead of worrying about manufacturing costs, you are simply bringing the sellers to the buyers (and vice versa) and facilitating a transaction, taking a small slice of the pie from each transaction. You give sellers a place to make a profit and reach consumers, while customers are happy to find exactly f what they want, usually at a discounted price.

Others Who Have Followed:
Amazon is one of the leaders of this business model, creating a marketplace for those who wish to sell items, and those who wish to buy them at a better price. Raise is a C2C gift card market, that a supply of discounted gift cards from sellers who would rather have the cash to spend as they pleaise. Beast is another example of a marketplace that connects high level’consultants for the millennial era with clients looking to outsource unmet needs in their business.

3. The Subscription Model :
Mobile payments continue to rise in popularity, and consumers are trending towards a more simple, hassle-free kind of shopping experience. These trends are leading towards explosive growth in subscription based services that consumers can easily set up, and then not worry about, knowing they will receive their product or service every month. Dollar Shave Club is one of those simple subscription services that made it much easier for men (and now women) to not worry about running out of razors, and save money. Add in some crazy, well messaged commercials with a hilarious spokesperson, and you have a brand who continues to double and even triple revenues annually.

Why It Works:
This business model provides an optimal balance of value to both the startup and the customer. It’s simple and convenient for customers, and take a lot of thinking out of the purchasing process. Customers know they will receive their product every month around the same time, don’t have to worry about reorders, and know they will get a set, flat rate that will stay within a budget.

Others Who Have Followed:
We all know Netflix revolutionized the way we consume TV shows and movies with it’s very affordable monthly subscription service. Spotify did the same thing for the way we consume music, by providing consumers the means to listen to virtually any song they’d like for a small monthly subscription. SkillShare, an edtech startup, initially started where consumers would buy educational content a la carte, but has pivoted to a monthly subscription model to access their content which has proved to work better for them. Of course there is also the subscription box trend that has reigned the past few years, like BirchBox, which provides samples of high end beauty products to consumers for a low monthly subscription.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

4. Customized Everything:
The fashion industry is dominating the customization trend that aligns with a consumer shift towards more personalized goods that reflects their specifc tastes. This is the reason Coke added names to their bottle packaging, automotive manufacturers make cars in any color you want, and massive retailers like Nike allow you to design your own custom sneakers. Custom-tailoring in the clothing sector has been on the rise, and services like Indochino and Black Lapel have taken the market by solving this problem for men’s suits.

Why It Works:
A rising percentage of the population is interested in build-to-order products and is willing to spend 25% more according to a study by Mashable.com for products built specifically to their needs. Production time and lowering costs of customization configurators also bring much more potential to the market, compared to previous years.

5. On-Demand Model :
As the world speeds up, consumers have a adopted a preference for instant gratification. The on-demand economy has a growing appetite for greater convenience, speed, and simplicity. Smartphones have driven transformational shifts in how we consume goods and services, and many consumers have become acclimated to purchasing at the press of a button. On-demand startups like Uber are shaking up their industries, and also provide stead contracted work for consumers who want to become solo-preneurs.

Why It Works :
The on-demand market leaders today know that this successful model is much more cost-effective, scalable, and more efcient that it’s ever been. The model allows a startup to leverage new technology, while utilizing existing infrastructures. Another benefit lies in the use of freelance labor with its obvious advantages in cost cutting. There has also been an influx of VC belief and capital in this revenue model.

Others Who Have Followed:
Spothero is a startup that provides parking on-demand when you are on your way to an event or into the city. Another growing startup in the space is Postmates who provide a local, ondemand delivery of goods. Glamsquad is providing on-demarid services for the beauty industry, and Washio provides the same service for the dry cleaning and laundry sector.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

6. The Modernized Direct Sales Model:
Direct sales companies like Avon and Amway understand there is a big business opportunity in the model. In 2009, direct selling accounted for $117B in sales worldwide, Chloe + Isabel, a fashion jewelry startup, is reinventing the direct sales model by appealing to fashion forward students who have tuition to pay and others who are unable to secure full-time employment.

Why It Works:
This model is perfect for today’s economy where people are more willing than ever to supplement their income, and seek new career paths. With unemployment still high, and more companies offering supplemental income opportunities, this model continues to rise in popularity. Another reason is that social media allows sellers to reach more people than ever, increasing their success as merchandisers, and bringing in higher revenues for the company. Finally, software available now has dramatically improved productivity and flow for direct sales reps.

Others Who Have Followed:
Sequoia-funded newcomer, and another jewelry and accessories startup Stella & Dot has found massive success in using this type of business model. Trumaker, is also finding success with this model in the mobile men’s apparel space and call their direct sellers “Outfitters”.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

7. Freemium Model:
This combination of “free” and “premium” has become a widely used approach amongst startups over the last decade. Broken down, the model offers a basic service to consumers for free, while charging for premium services (advanced features and perks) to paying members. Linkedin is one of the best examples of a successful freemium model, with the free version letting users share professional profiles, while the premium offerings are talent solutions and premium subscriptions with added features.

Why It Works:
One of the greatest advantages to a freemium strategy lies in its ability to be a marketing tool for your service, which helps early stage startups scale by attracting a user base without costly ad campaigns. Freemium models also tend to be more successful that 30-day free trials and other offers like that. Customers are much more comfortable with accessing a service for free, and the no strings attached feeling that comes with before deciding to make a purchase.

Others Who Have Followed:
Dropbox, Hulu, and Match.com are all very popular services that have adopted a successful freemium model. Dating app Tinder has also adopted a freemium model, offering exclusive features to users who pay a low monthly fee. Survey service PollDaddy, video sharing service Vimeo, and photo sharing service Flickr are all members of the freemium model group as well.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

8. Reverse Auction:
This type of model is the reverse of Ebay where the buyers switch roles with the sellers. Buyers who care about price offer bids for a service to the seller,s and if the seller accepts the bid, the buyer must agree to all of the seller’s terms and conditions. Sellers benefit *rom access to a marketplace, while the buyers feel like they are getting a great bargain. One of the most successful implementations of this model is Priceline, where travelers give up convenience for low prices on airline tickets, rentals, and other travel accommodations. Priceline provides a win-win marketplace for it’s B2C marketplace, and because of that has seen significant revenue growth.

Why It Works:
Price sensitive buyers feel great, because they feel good about the deal they won, while the company also wins by facilitating the deal with its sellers who get access to a marketplace and are still making a profit on inventory that might not have sold otherwise.

Others Who Have Followed:
FedBid allows government agencies to use the reverse auction model to award contracts to businesses. Stayful uses the model to help boutique hotels fill unsold inventory which would otherwise go to waste. Squeezify uses this model for freelance work, and MyHammer has found success with the business model helping consumers receive quotes from service experts.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

9. Virtual Good Model:
We all know the game Candy Crush and its addictive qualities that have wasted more hours than most of us are willing to share. Candy Crush understands the power of the virtual good model, and made a ton of its revenues for digital products like extra lives or features like a “color bomb”. Virtual goods are online only products users pay for normally in games or apps such as upgrades, points, gifts, or weapons. The app Hot or Not used this model well by allowing its users to send virtual roses to other users costing between $2 to $10, and the game Clash of Clans has users that spend thousands of dollars each month on their in-app purchases.

Why It Works:
One of the greatest advantages of virtual goods are the high margins, since they cost only what the bandwidth required to serve them does. The objects sold create real value for consumers, for example, in a game, buying a sword adds to the real fun people are having playing a game. Market liquidity continues to increase as more gamers live in virtual worlds. Virtual goods are also more increasingly becoming a way for people to show affection and meaning as we continue moving more into an app obsessed world.

Others Who Have Followed:
Facebook added this revenue model to its social aspect by allowing users to give virtual gifts to one another. Other startups like Acclaim Games, Meez, and Weeworld have also implemented virtual goods from the gaming aspect.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
Discuss the features of a Sustainable Business Model.
Answer:
Features of a Sustainable Business Model
Whatever be the business model, sustainability should be at its core, otherwise a business cannot be successful. In light of this, the ensuing paragraphs discuss about the features of a sustainable business model.

1. Diversity :
The firm needs a diverse set of resources, people and investments to be resilient. While diverse investments are seen to draw on resources and absorb managerial attention, a single line of business, single source of revenue, or people with similar mindsets can expose the firm to greater risks. Firms can no longer simply ‘stick to the knitting’.

2. Modularity :
Matrixed organizations are often seen as facilitating knowledge flows. However, such organizations are not only resource intensive, they expose the whole organization to shocks as they reverberate through the organization. Organizations need to be less interdependent, and focus on modularity, so they can be insulated from shocks.

3. Openness :
Resilient firms must know what’s going on outside their boundaries. These firms can sense issues on the horizon. They are constantly monitoring the external environment, and drawing scenarios of possible futures. They expect not only to react to those potential futures, but also help to shape them. The link between the organization and the external business and natural environment is vital, permeable, and acquiescent.

4. Slack resources :
In an era of just-in-time production, slack resources are often seen as costly and wasteful. However, innovation and adaptation requires both financial and creative investments, and the space to change direction. Firms that can ride storms must allow for a little more time to accommodate new ideas, scenarios, and shifts in thinking.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

5. Matching cycles :
Firms often think about optimizing performance and getting more from less. But, these thinking puts firms on a treadmill, doing the same thing faster every day and, it has them bumping up against resource constraints. Resilient businesses think, not about constant growth, but rather about cyclical processes: cycles of growth and contraction, cycles of production, and cycles of consumer purchase patterns. Understanding the rhythms of business and the environment will allow the frm to synchronize with them meaningfully, and not overreact to what is likely just a cycle. These ideas need to developed and tested. But, they offer a starting place for dialogue for a 21st century business model based on sustainability.

6. Identify your specific audience :
Targeting a wide audience won’t allow your business to hone in on customers Who truly need and want your product or service. Instead, when creating your business model, narrow your audience down to two or three detailed buyer personas. Outline each persona’s demographics, common challenges and the solutions your company will offer. As an example, Home Depot might appeal to everyone or carry a product the average person needs, but the company’s primary target market is homeowners and builders.

7. Establish business processes :
Before your business can go live, you need to have an understanding of the activities required to make your business model work. Determine key business activities by first identifying the core aspect of your. business’s offering. Are you responsible for providing a service, shipping a product or offering consulting? In the case of Ticketbis, an online ticket exchange marketplace, key business processes include marketing and product delivery management.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

8. Develop a strong value proposition :
How will your company stand out among the competition? Do you provide an innovative service, revolutionary product or a new twist on an old favourite? Establishing exactly what your business offers and why it’s better than competitors is the beginning of a strong value proposition. Once you’ve got a few value propositions defined, link each one to a service or product delivery system to determine how you will remain valuable to customers over time.

9. Determine key business partners :
No business can function properly (let alone reach established goals) without key partners that contribute to the business’s ability to serve customers. When creating a business model, select key partners, like suppliers, strategic alliances or advertising partners. Using the previous example of Home Depot, key business partners may be lumber suppliers, parts wholesalers and logistics companies.

10. Leave room for innovation :
When launching a company and developing a business model, your business plan is based on many assumptions. After all, until you begin to welcome paying customers, you don’t truly know if your business model will meet their ongoing needs. For this reason, it’s important to leave room for future innovations. Don’t make a critical mistake by thinking your initial plan is a static document. Instead, review it often and implement changes as needed.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

Question 8.
Write a detailed note on Business modelling.
Answer:
Significance of a Business Modelling
The importance of business modelling can be understood by perusing the eye-catchy benefits of business process modelling.
1. Align Operations with Business Strategy: Implementing a business strategy or a new business model requires changes in the operations and in how people perform their work. This can be affected only by operationalising the business changes to the actual business processes, business rules and decisions that are made on a day to day basis by all the people in the organization.

Business Process Modelling facilitates this by helping:
Link organizational strategy to well-defined business processes – Business process modelling is a critical tool for management and executives to ensure that the business processes are consistent with and enable execution towards achieving the overall strategy of the organization.

Align business execution and operation activity with strategy – Process modeling ensures that the operational tasks and activities performed by the team members actually help the organization to implement its strategy. If the processes and the strategy are not aligned it usually leads to failure in execution because even if the operational tasks are performed correctly, the overall organizational goals are not achieved.

Implement Business Process Reengineering (BPR) by understanding the existing processes and changing them for improved performance – Business process analysis helps in identifying bottlenecks and inefficiencies in the processes and thus improving them.

Enable Process Agility, an ability to change and communicate processes quickly to take advantage of new business opportunities or address business challenges.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

2. Improve Process Communication : One area that distinguishes successful businesses and teams is that they have a very clear idea of what they are supposed to do, how they are supposed to do it and what is the exact role of every team member. Clear communication of the operational processes is critical to facilitate a smooth functioning of a team.

Business Process Modelling enables the documenting and communicating of the organizations business processes:

  • Process modelling offers a common unified language and methodology for communicating processes and information about processes and decision rules.
  • It is ideal for training of new people and rapid knowledge transfer because with a thoroughly documented process any new team member can be very quickly trained on what they have to do in any situation that they may face.
  • Minimizes potential danger of loss of staff resulting in loss of business process knowledge.
  • It helps business managers communicate their ideas quickly and clearly.
  • Jump-starts the organizational process documentation initiative.
  • Turns the team’s experience and “tribal knowledge” into documented processes.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

3. Increase Control and Consistency: Organizations and companies that succeed are ones that ensure their business processes and rules are well designed and that they are consistently applied the same way every single time. This process control and consistency is key for success in organizations ranging from fast-food chains to hospitals to NASA Space Shuttle operations.

Business Process Modelling makes this possible by helping:

  • Formalize existing processes which may not be well documented or which have evolved over time into “informal knowledge”.
  • Execute process in consistent manner because instead of relying on people to remember to do the right thing the documented process can be given to the business users.
  • Make better decisions because guesswork is eliminated as business users can have the documented business rules in front of them.
  • Handle exceptions faster and in a better way.
  • Complete regulatory compliance by ensuring that the documented processes follow the company guidelines and legal regulations.
  • Put business people in charge.

Introduction to Business Modelling - CS Professional Study Material

4. Improve Operational Efficiencies: In today’s business environment, every business and every manager wants to ensure that they are achieving the best possible results with the resources available to them. There is no room for inefficiencies and wastage. The Process simulation and analysis steps of Business Process Modelling are critical tools for managers and analysts to ensure that their processes are optimized and are running like a well-oiled machine:

  • Process Simulation allows analysis and understanding of the process flows and helps managers know if there is room for further optimization and efficiencies.
  • It helps spot needed improvements and reduce process cycle time.
  • It increases productivity of existing resources and staff and so allows the team to do more with less.
  • It facilitates risk free experimentation and encourages exchange of process improvement ideas.
  • Process simulation allows modelling of process designs before actually implementing them thus minimizing disruptions.

5. Gain Competitive Advantage: All the benefits mentioned above lead to a significant competitive advantage for an organization that has invested the time and effort to document, simulate and improve its Dusiness processes. Studies of many wildly successful companies has often shown that their success was not due to better ideas or better business models but because they invested significantly in business process modeling to constantly refine and improve their processes.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 3 Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
An application for Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) was filed by a Bank (being Financial Creditor) against RSI Ltd, which was admitted by the NCLT and an Interim Resolution Professional was appointed, the Committee of Creditors (CoC) was constituted. Vijay, who was a member of the suspended Board of Directors of RSI Ltd was neither allowed participation in CoC nor any information considered confidential was given, either by the resolution professional or the Committee of Creditors. Vijay made representations before the Adjudicating Authority to attend the meeting and for information/documents. Will Vijay succeed in his claim for attending the Meeting of Committee of Creditors and obtaining information about the CoC proceedings. (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
The facts of the case are similar to the case of Vijay Kumar Jain v. Standard Chartered Bank, Supreme Court of India, 31st January, 2019.
In the matter, an appeal was filed with Supreme Court against orders rejecting the prayer of an erstwhile director for getting copy of the resolution plans from the Resolution Professional(RP). Both the NCLT and NCLAT ruled that appellant had no right to receive the resolution plans.

RP has contended that only the members of Committee of Creditors(CoC) are entitled to have resolution plans, as per Section 30(3) of the Code read with Regulation 39(2) of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016. Relying on the Notes on Clauses to Section 24 of the Code, they argued that the members of suspended Board of Directors are permitted to participate in CoC meetings only forthe purpose of giving information regarding the financial status of the debtor.
In this case the Supreme Court opined that the statutory scheme, makes it clear that though the erstwhile Board of Directors are not members of the committee of creditors, yet, they have a right to participate in each and every meeting held by the committee of creditors and also have a right to discuss along with members of the committee of creditors all resolution plans that are presented at such meetings.

The Supreme Court expressly rejected the argument based on Notes on Clauses to Section 24 of the Code and noted that every participant is entitled to a notice of every meeting of the committee of creditors. Such notice of meeting must contain an agenda of the meeting, together with the copies of all documents relevant for matters to be discussed and the issues to be voted upon at the meeting vide Regulation 21 (3)(iii) of CIRP Regulations. The Supreme Court said the expression ‘documents’ is a wide expression which would certainly include resolution plans.

Thus, members of erstwhile Board of Directors, being vitally interested in resolution plans that may be discussed at meetings of committee of creditors, must be given a copy of such plans as part of ‘documents’ that have to be furnished along with notice of such meetings.
Hence, Vijay will succeed in his claim for attending the meetings of CoC and obtaining information about the CoC proceedings.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
Can an assignee of Financial Contract make an application under Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process? (Dec 2019, 3 marks)
Answer:
Yes, as per Rule 4(2) of Insolvency and Bankruptcy (Application to Adjudicating Authority) Rules, 2016, where an applicant for a Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process is an assignee or transferee of a Financial Contract the application shall be accompanied with a copy of the assignment or transfer agreement and other relevant documents as may be required to demonstrate the assignment or transfer.

Question 3.
If there is NO Financial Creditor, how will the Committee of Creditors be constituted? (Dec 2019, 4 marks)
Answer:
As per Regulation 16 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016, where the corporate debtor has no financial debtor or where all financial creditors are related parties of the Corporate Debtor, the Committee shall be formed comprising of the following members:
(a) 18 largest Operational Creditors by value.
(b) 1 representative elected by all workmen other than those workmen included under sub-clause (a).
(c) 1 representative elected by all employees other than those employees included under sub-clause (a).
Where the number of Operational Creditors is less than 18, the Committee shall include all such Operational Creditors.

Question 4.
What will be the consequence if Demand of Debt is disputed? (Dec 2019, 4 marks)
Answer:
If demand of debt is disputed and such dispute has been raised before the issuance of notice under section 8 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code,
2016, the application shall not be admitted as the Adjudicating Authority is not empowered to go into the dispute. Thus, application can be admitted only if the demand of debt is undisputed.
The Supreme Court has categorically dealt with the definition of ‘dispute’ in the matter of Mobilox Innovations Private Limited v. Kirusa Software Private Limited by inserting the test of ‘plausible contention’ while analyzing the existence of dispute. The Supreme Court also clarified that the moonshine defence raised for the very first time by the corporate debtor after the service of the demand notice under section 8 of the Code does not qualify as ‘dispute’ within the definition of ‘dispute’ as per Section 5(6) of the Code. .

Question 5.
An Operational Creditor of a Company has made an application to National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) for initiating Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) for non-payment his dues for long time. The NCLT ordered for commencement of CIRP. During the course of CIRP period Corporate Director has agreed to settle the dues of Operational Creditor and requested him to withdraw the CIRP.
Whether NCLT may allow the withdrawal of application admitted under Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 in the above case. Will your answer differ, if the above application is made by Financial Creditor and subsequently Corporate Debtor settle its dues? (Dec 2020, 6 marks)
Answer:
Section 12A of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2012 provides that the Adjudicating Authority may allow the withdrawal of application admitted under section 7 or Section 9 or Section 10. on an application made by the applicant with the approval of ninety per cent voting share of the committee of creditors, in such manner as may be specified.
Section 12A of IBC read with Regulation 30A of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016 specifically deals with withdrawal of CIRP after admission. Section 12A provides that CIRP can be withdrawn after admission, if the same is approved by ninety per cent voting share of the committee of creditors. Withdrawal may be allowed even after issuance of invitation for Expression of Interest.
Where Committee of Creditors (CoC) is not constituted, a party can approach NCLT for withdrawal of an application on settlement and where CoC is constituted, 90% of the voting share of the CoC agree for withdrawal. The answer would not differ if the application is made by the financial creditor and subsequently corporate debtor settles its dues.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 6.
Facts of the case :
SB Pvt. Ltd. supplied raw materials worth ₹ 15 lakh in January 2018 to a company named MR Ltd. MR Ltd. issued two cheques for ₹ 10 lakh, dated 15th April, 2018 and ₹ 5 lakh, dated 1st June, 2018, in favour of SB Pvt. Ltd. MR Ltd. had availed loan facility of ₹ 50 lakh from State Bank of India (SBI) and due to non-payment the account became Non-performing Asset (NPA) in the books of SBI. The SBI started recovery measures and lastly filed Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process(CIRP) against the MR Ltd. with the Adjudicating Authority (AA), The Adjudicating Authority admitted the CIRP filed by the SBI and the order of moratorium was passed under section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (the Code) on 6th June, 2018. The first cheque of ₹ 10 lakh lodged by SB Pvt. Ltd. returned unpaid by its banker for the reason of insufficiency of funds. The SB Pvt. Ltd lodged a criminal complaint under section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act. 1881, (Nl Act) against MR Ltd. and its directors in the competent court having jurisdication on 1st June, 2018 (i.e. prior to declaration of moratorium by the AA). The second cheque of 15 lakh was also returned unpaid for the reason of insufficiency of funds and again a second criminal complaint was lodged by the SB Pvt. Ltd. against the MR Ltd. and its directors on 15th June, 2018 (i.e. after declaration of moratorium by the AA). The MR Ltd. and its Directors moved before the Adjudicating Authority and argued that during the period of moratorium proceeding petition under Section 138 of Nl Act was not maintainable. This was opposed by the SB Pvt. Ltd. but the Adjudicating Authority directed the SB Pvt. Ltd. to withdraw the complaint case filed under Section 138 of Nl Act treating it as a proceeding filed after order of moratorium with observation that such action amounts to deliberate attempt on the part of SB Pvt. Ltd. and sheer misuse of the process of law. Aggrieved from the order of the Adjudicating Authority, the SB Pvt. Ltd. preferred appeal before the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT). The NCLAT accepted the appeal and set aside the order of the Adjudicating Authority. Based on the above facts, answer the following questions:
(a) Citing relevant case law elaborate the decision of the Adjudicating Authority ? State with reason, if aggrieved party prefers an appeal, will they succeed. (June 2019, 10 marks)
(b) Section 14 of the Code states that after declaration of the moratorium no legal action can be maintained against the Corporate Debtor. What will be your answer when:
(i) Criminal action under section 138 of Nl Act filed before the declaration of moratoruim; and
(ii) Criminal action under section 138 of Nl Act filed after the declaration of moratorium. (June 2019, 10 marks)
(c) What effect of the declaration of the moratorium under section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 ? (June 2019, 10 marks)
(d) Adjudicating Authority appoints Interim Resolution Professional(IRP) under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code-Enumerate his role, powers and duties. (June 2019, 10 marks)
Answer:
(a) The above case is similar to the facts as was in the cases of Shah Brothers Ispat (P.) Ltd. v. P. Mohanraj and Others, decided by the NCLAT, New Delhi, on 31st July, 2018.

Decision given by the Adjudicating Authority: The Adjudicating Authority opined that S.B. Pvt. Ltd. had violated order of moratorium issued by Adjudicating Authority, which was a deliberate attempt on part of the SB Pvt. Ltd. and sheer misuse of process of law. The S.B. Pvt. Ltd. was directed to withdraw the complaint filed under Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 and, in case the S.B. Pvt. Ltd. had not withdrawn, action for violation of moratorium would be taken against it.
Reasons on chances of success of aggrieved party on Appeal: Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 was apparently misunderstood by the Adjudicating Authority. The language of Section 14 nowhere prohibits the initiation of criminal action. If there would have been the intention of the law maker to include the prohibition of criminal action against the corporate debtor, it would have been specifically mentioned in Section 14 itself.

The issue before the Appellate Tribunal is as under:
Whether the order of moratorium will cover a criminal proceeding under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, which provides punishment of imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years or with fine which may extend to twice the amount of cheque or with both?
The decision to be given in the case with logical reasoning, may be mentioned as under:
The company cannot be imprisoned, therefore aforesaid punishment under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 cannot be imposed against the M.R. Ltd. However, fine can be imposed by a Court of competent jurisdiction on M.R. Ltd, if found guilty. The Directors of the M.R. Ltd. being parties can be imprisoned and also fine may be imposed on them.

The contention given by the M.R. Ltd. that the proceeding under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is covered by Clause of sub-section(l)(a) of Section 14 of the Code, therefore, proceedings against the M.R. Ltd. Including execution of any judgment, decree or order in any court of law, tribunal, arbitration panel or other authority cannot proceed, is not acceptable by the Appellate Tribunal for the reasons being Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 is a penal provision, which empowers the Court of competent jurisdiction to pass order of imprisonment or fine, which cannot be held to be proceeding or any judgment or decree of money claim.
Imposition of fine cannot held to be a money claim or recovery against the M.R. Ltd. nor order of imprisonment, if passed by the Court of competent jurisdiction on the Directors, they cannot claim benefit of moratorium under Section 14 of the Code. In fact no criminal proceeding is covered under Section 14 of the Code, so the question of moratorium on the criminal complaint under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 stands nowhere.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

(b) Section 14(1)(a) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016,
prohibits the institution of suits or continuation of pending suits or proceedings against the corporate debtor including execution of any judgment, decree or order in any court of law, tribunal, arbitration panel or other authority.
The question arises here is whether the order of moratorium will cover a criminal proceeding under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, which provides for imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years or with fine which may extend to twice the amount of cheque or with both. Imposition of the fine cannot held to be a money claim or recovery against the Corporate Debtor. Same way order of imprisonment, if passed by the Court of competent jurisdiction on the Directors, is not covered under Section 14 of the Code. In fact no criminal proceeding is covered under Section 14 of the Code.
Hence, filing of criminal complaint under section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 either before or after the declaration of moratorium under section 14 of the Code will have no effect of moratorium.

(c) Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with the declaration of Moratorium by the Adjudicating Authority after acceptance of the CIRP application filed by the financial/operational creditor. It provides as under:
1. Subject to provisions of sub-sections (2) and (3), on the insolvency commencement date, the Adjudicating Authority shall by order declare moratorium for prohibiting all of the following, namely:
(a) The institution of suits or continuation of pending suits or proceedings against the corporate debtor including execution of any judgment, decree or order in any court of law, tribunal, arbitration panel or other authority;
(b) Transferring, encumbering, alienating or disposing of by the corporate debtor any of its assets or any legal right or beneficial interest therein;
(c) Any action to foreclose, recover or enforce any security interest created by the corporate debtor in respect of its property including any action underthe Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002;
(d) The recovery of any property by an owner or lessor where such property is occupied by or in the possession of the corporate debtor.

2. The supply of essential goods or services to the corporate debtor as may be specified shall not be terminated or suspended or interrupted during the moratorium period.

3. The provisions of sub-section(l) shall not apply to
(a) such transaction as may be notified by the Central Government in consultation with any financial sector regulator;
(b) a surety in a contract of guarantee to a corporate debtor.

4. The order of moratorium shall have effect from the date of such order till the completion of the corporate insolvency resolution process.
Provided that where at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process period, if the Adjudicating Authority approves the resolution plan under sub-section(1) of Section 31 of the Code or passes an order for liquidation of corporate debtor under Section 33 of the Code, the moratorium shall cease to have effect from the date of such approval or liquidation order, as the case may be.

(d) Role and Powers of Interim Resolution Professional
Section 17(1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that from the date of appointment of the Interim Resolution Professional:
(a) The management of the affairs of the corporate debtor shall vest in the interim resolution professional;
(b) The powers of the Board of directors or the partners of the corporate debtor, as the case may be, shall stand suspended and be exercised by the interim resolution professional;
(c) The officers and managers of the corporate debtor shall report to the interim resolution professional and provide access to such documents and records of the corporate debtor as may be required by the interim resolution professional;
(d) The financial institutions maintaining accounts of the corporate debtor shall act on the instructions of the interim resolution professional in relation to such accounts and furnish all information relating to the corporate debtor available with them to the interim resolution professional.
Section 17(2) of the Code further provides that the interim resolution professional vested with the management of the corporate debtor, shall
(a) Act and execute in the name and on behalf of the corporate debtor all deeds, receipts, and other documents, if any;
(b) Take such actions, in the manner and subject to such restrictions, as may be specified by the Board;
(c) Have the authority to access the electronic records of corporate debtor from information utility having financial information of the corporate debtor;
(d) Have the authority to access the books of accounts, records and other relevant documents of corporate debtor available with Government authorities, statutory auditors, accountants and such other persons as may be specified: and
(e) Be responsible for complying with the requirements under any law for the time being in force on behalf of the corporate debtor.

Duties of Interim Resolution Professional – Section 18 of the Code provides that the person appointed as the Interim Resolution Professional shall perform the following duties:

  • Collect all information relating to the assets, finances and operations of the corporate debtor for determining the financial position of the corporate debtor, including information relating to,
    • business operations for the previous two years;
    • financial and operational payments for the previous two years;
    • list of assets and liabilities as on the initiation date; and
    • such other matters as may be specified.
  • receive and collate all the claims submitted by creditors to him, pursuant to the public announcement made under Sections 13 and 15 of the Code;
  • constitute a committee of creditors;
  • monitor the assets of the corporate debtor and manage its operations until a resolution professional is appointed by the committee of creditors;
  • file information collected with the information utility, if necessary; and
  • take control and custody of any asset over which the corporate debtor has ownership rights as recorded in the balance sheet of the corporate debtor, or with information utility or the depository of securities or any other registry that records the ownership of assets including,
    • assets over which the corporate debtor has ownership rights which may be located in a foreign country;
    • assets that may or may not be in possession of the corporate debtor;
    • tangible assets, whether movable or immovable;
    • intangible assets including intellectual property;
    • securities including shares held in any subsidiary of the corporate debtor, financial instruments, insurance policies;
    • assets subject to the determination of ownership by a court or authority;
  • to perform such other duties as may be specified by the Board.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
VN Pvt. Ltd. (VNPL) entered into a Sub-contract Agreement with KC Pvt. Ltd. (KCPL) to undertake road construction works. During the course of the project, disputes and differences arose between the parties and the same were referred for an Arbitration, Arbitration Award was delivered in favour of the KCPL VNPL challenged the Award by making an appeal under Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. Meanwhile, VNPL sent a demand notice under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code and also initiated insolvency proceedings against KCPL. The KCPL claimed that there is a dispute and the award has been challenged and adjudication of which is pending.
NCLT as well as NCLAT admitted the insolvency petition stating that challenge of award could not be considered to be ‘existence of dispute’ under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code. The matter reached the Supreme Court. What is ‘dispute’ within the meaning of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC Code). Whether Award passed under Arbitration Act and challenged will be termed as existence of dispute under IBC Code. Comment with the help of decided case law. (June 2019, 12 marks)
Answer:
Section 5(6) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 defines the meaning of the word ‘dispute’. According to this, the term ‘dispute’ includes a suit or arbitration proceedings relating to (a) the existence of the amount of debt; (b) the quality of goods or service; or (c) the breach of a representation or warranty.
The facts of the case is similar to the case decided by the Supreme Court of India in the matter of K Kishan v. Vijay Nirman Co. (P.) Ltd., 14th August, 2018.
The question before the Supreme Court was whether an arbitral award that has been challenged under Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 by the award debtor can form the basis for an action under Section 9 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. The Supreme Court overturned the decision of the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) and held that the pendency of an application under Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 constitutes a ‘dispute’ under Section 8 of the Code. Accordingly, the challenge to the arbitral award bars the initiation of the corporate insolvency resolution process (CIRP), under Section 9 of the Code.

The Supreme Court had opined that operational creditors cannot use the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 either prematurely or for extraneous considerations or as a substitute for debt enforcement procedures. Such a company would be well within its rights to state that it is challenging the Arbitral Award passes against it, and the mere factum of challenge would be sufficient to state that it disputes the Award. We repeat that the object of the Code, at least insofar as operational creditors are concerned, is to put the insolvency process against a corporate debtor only in clear cases where a real dispute between the parties as to the debt owed does not exist.
The Supreme Court decision overturned the position assumed by the NCLT and the NCLAT that proceedings pending under Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 do not imply the existence of a dispute and that an arbitral award that has been challenged does not constitute a record of the operational debt. The Court held that whilst the final adjudication of a challenge to an award is pending under the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, the provisions of the Code may not be legitimately attracted.
This in effect is a harmonious construction by the Supreme Court of the two legislations, considering situations where a corporate debtor is put under the resolution process before final adjudication of a challenge to an award under the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. If the arbitral award is subsequently set aside under Section 34 of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, the damage to the corporate debtor would be irreparable and the legal position under the two legislations thereby, irreconcilable. Thus, the
Award passed under the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 shows that operational debt is disputed and the Code cannot be invoked in respect of operational debt where an Arbitral Award has been passed against corporate debtor, which has not yet been finally adjudication upon.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 8.
Facts of the case:
Richa Infrastructure Limited engaged in the construction of roads is in default in repayment of loans due to general slowdown in construction industry. Repeated follow-up by the financial institutions with the Corporate Debtor, ‘Richa Infrastructure Ltd.’ for submitting its specific plan for repayment of dues did not evoke any response.
One of the financial creditors filed a case against Richa Infrastructure Ltd. before the Debt Recovery Tribunal.
Richa Infrastructure Ltd. had issued some cheques to some Operational Creditors. All the cheques issued to creditors were dishonored/returned by the banker due to insufficient funds in the account. Consequently, Operational Creditors issued legal notices to Richa Infrastructure Ltd. with clear intimation that if due amount is not paid within 15 days from the date of receipt of legal notice, criminal complaint shall be filed against Richa Infrastructure Ltd. under the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881 and criminal complaints were filed.
After a joint lenders meeting, all the financial institutions unanimously decided to apply under the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 to the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) for starting the process of Insolvency Resolution. Their application was admitted by NCLT on 30th June, 2018 and orders were issued for commencement of a moratorium period of 180 days, appointment of an Interim Resolution Professional and issue of public announcement inviting claims from all concerned.
After public announcement and the responses thereto, following details were brought out:

  1. Financial debts due to unsecured creditors (F1) – ₹ 15 Crores.
  2. Workmen’s due for the period of 24 months preceding the liquidation commencement date (F2) – ₹ 25 Crores.
  3. Debts due to a secured creditor who has relinquished his security (F3) – ₹ 30 Crores.
  4. Amount due to the Central Government (F4) – ₹ 27 Crores.
  5. Debts due to a secured creditor afterthe enforcement of security interest (F5) – ₹ 36 Crores.

Insolvency Resolution Professional (IRP) approached the promoters, directors and officials of Richa Infrastructure Ltd. to provide the necessary information, documents, statutory records, books of accounts to verify the claims filed by creditors. The promoters, directors and officials of Richa Infrastructure Ltd. ignored the request of Resolution Professional.
M/s ANG & Associates, Chartered Accountants were the Statutory Auditors of Richa Infrstructure Ltd. They audited the accounts for the financial year end March, 2018 of Richa Infrastructure Ltd. and submitted the Annual Accounts for approval of the Board of Directors.
The Resolution Professional has appointed valuers and has received the valuation reports.
The Resolution Professional then started the efforts to get resolution proposals.
However during the normal resolution process period of 180 days, no resolution proposal could be finalized. The Committee of Creditors decided that Resolution Professional should get the extension as per the provisions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Based on the above facts, answer the following questions:
(a) Can a Financial Creditor proceed against a Corporate Debtor under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, when the matter is already pending before the Debt Recovery Tribunal? Examine the issue with the help of decided case law/laws. (Dec 2019, 8 marks)
(b) Is it necessary that application for extension of time period of 90 days must be filed before the completion of 180 days? What precautions should be taken by Insolvency Professional while applying to NCLT for extension of time period by 90 days? Examine the issue by referring to decided case law, if any. (Dec 2019, 8 marks)
(c) Can criminal proceedings under Section 138 of Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881 continue even after initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution process? Examine the issue by referring to decided case law, if any. (Dec 2019, 8 marks)
(d) Who will sign the Annual Financial Statements of the Corporate Debtor undergoing Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process? (Dec 2019, 8 marks)
(e) Can IRP take action against employees of the Corporate Debtor in terms of employment agreement? (Dec 2019, 8 marks)
Answer:
(a) Section 238 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (the Code) provides that the provisions of this Code shall have effect, notwithstanding anything inconsistent therewith contained in any other law for the time being in force or any instrument having effect by virtue of any such law.
National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), Ahmadabad Bench, in the case of Sarthak Creations Pvt. Ltd v. Bank of Baroda & Others held that the pendency of proceedings before Debt Recovery Tribunal (DRT) is no ground for not to commence Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) in view of non-obstante clause under Section 238 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
In the case of PR Commissioner of Income Tax, New Delhi vs. Monnet lspat& Energy Ltd., the Delhi High Court held that the moratorium period under section 14 of the Code announced by the National Company Law Tribunal would also apply to the order of the Income Tax Appellate Tribunal in respect of the tax liability of the assesse.
Upholding the Delhi High Court Judgment (PR Commissioner of Income Tax, New Delhi vs. Monnet Ispat & Energy Ltd.) which held that moratorium under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) will apply to the order of Income Tax Appellate Tribunal, the Supreme Court has observed that IBC will override anything inconsistent contained in any other enactment, including the Income Tax Act, 1961.
In view of the above, financial creditor can initiate proceedings under the Code even if the matter is already pending before DRT.

(b) Section 12(2) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that the Resolution Professional shall file an application to the Adjudicating Authority to extend the period of the Corporate Insolvency
Resolution Process (CIRP) beyond one hundred and eighty days, if instructed to do so by a resolution passed at a meeting of the committee of creditors by a vote of sixty-six per cent of the voting shares. However, reading the aforesaid provision, it appears that provision does not stipulate that such application for extension of period of CIRP is to be filed before NCLT within 180 days.
The very same issue had come up for consideration before the NCLAT in case of Quantum Ltd. v. Indus Finance Corporation Ltd. decided on 20th February, 2018, wherein NCLAT allowed an application filed after 180 days. However, the resolution of the committee of the creditors has to be passed within 180 days.
In view of the aforesaid judgment passed by NCLAT, when it becomes clear to the Resolution Professional that CIRP cannot be completed within the specified period of 180 days, he should propose to the Committee of Creditors for direction to seek extension of time from the Adjudicating Authority so that the process does not get derailed because of technical reasons.
On receipt of an application under sub-section (2) of section 12 of the Code, if the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that the subject matter of the case is such that Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process cannot be completed within one hundred and eighty days, it may by order extend the duration of such process beyond one hundred and eighty days by such further period as it thinks fit, but not exceeding ninety days. [Section 12(3)]

(c) Section 14(1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 prohibits, inter alia, the institution of suits or continuation of pending suits or proceedings against the Corporate Debtor including execution of any judgment, decree or order in any court of law, tribunal, arbitration panel or other authority.
From the provision and the words used therein, it becomes clear that the prohibition is not applicable to criminal proceedings which can continue to be pursued. The proceedings under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 can thus continue even after initiation of CIRP. In the appeal of Shah Brothers Ispat (P) Ltd. Vs. P. Mohanraj before the NCLAT, the very same question arose for consideration. The question was whether the order of moratorium covers a criminal proceeding under section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 which provides punishment of imprisonment or imposition of fine. It was held that the court of competent jurisdiction may proceed with the proceeding under Section 138 of Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 even during the period of moratorium.
It is pertinent to note that Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 prohibits any proceeding or judgment or decree of money claim against the Corporate Debtor after the order of moratorium which is passed on the insolvency commencement date.
The Appellate Tribunal observed that Section 138 is a penal provision. The imposition of a fine cannot be held to be a money claim or recovery against the Corporate Debtor. As such the said section is not covered within the purview of Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. In fact, no criminal proceeding is covered under Section 14 of the Code.

(d) Section 17(1)(b)ofthe Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016provides that the powers of the Board of directors (Board) or the partners of the corporate debtor, shall stand suspended and be exercised by Interim Resolution Professional (IRP). It may be noted that though the powers of the Board are suspended, they are bound to provide all assistance to Insolvency Professional as only the powers of the Board are suspended and not their duties.
Further, Section 19 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 imposes an obligation on the personnel and promoters of the corporate debtor to extend all assistance and cooperation required by the IRP in the management of the affairs of the corporate debtor. Where the personnel of the corporate debtor or any other person required to co-operate with the IRP do not extend co-operation or assistance to the IRP, he may apply to the Adjudicating Authority for an order. The Adjudicating Authority may, by order, direct the personnel to comply with the instructions of the IRP or to provide information to the IRP. ‘Personnel’ includes the directors, managers, key managerial personal, designated partners and employees, if any, of the corporate debtor.
Moreover, the powers of the resolution professional do not include the power to represent the corporate debtor or initiate proceedings on behalf of the corporate debtor. The suspension is of the functioning of the Board and not of the directors. Signing of the Annual Report is a duty of the Board and the Board as a whole has to take the legal responsibility for the correctness of the report.
This is further clarified by the NCLAT in the matter of Steel Konnect (India) Pvt. Ltd. v. M/s. Hero Fincorp Ltd. that directors of the company do not cease to be directors, as they are not suspended but their function as ‘Board of directors’ is suspended.
The members of the Board also has to work under the Insolvency Professional which again means that if the professional asks them to consider the financial statement, they have to do so. In the aforesaid context, the existing directors of corporate debtor shall sign the financial statements of Corporate Debtor undergoing CIRP.

(e) Section 28(1 )G) and (I) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that Resolution Professional, during the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP), shall not make any change in the management of the corporate debtor or its subsidiary, make changes in the appointment or terms of contract of such personnel as specified by the Committee of Creditors, without prior approval of the Committee of Creditors.
Thus, if action of IRP / RP has effect of change in management of corporate debtor or has the effect of making changes in appointment of such persons as may be specified by Committee of Creditors, he shall take approval of Committee of Creditors in terms of Section 28 (1 )(j) and (I) of the Code.
IRP may take action against an employee of corporate debtor for hindering the CIRP process if he does not provide assistance and co-operation to IRP. However, by way of abundant caution, IRP may also place the matter before Committee of Creditors before taking any action. IRP may also approach Adjudicating Authority under section 19(2) of the Code for necessary directions.
The Adjudicating Authority, on receiving an application Under Section 19(2) of the Code, shall by an order, direct such personnel or other person to comply with the instructions of the Resolution Professional and to co-operate with him in collection of information and management of the Corporate Debtor.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 9.
Naveen Kumar, a Financial Creditor filed an Insolvency Application under Section 7 of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 against M/s ABC Private Ltd. Corporate Debtor (Defaulter) before the National Company Law Tribunal on 1st July, 2018. National Company Law Tribunal after satisfying that the default has occurred and the application is complete in all respects and all the related compliances have been met, admitted the application, by an order passed on 10th July, 2018 and appointed Kamal Kishore as Interim Resolution Professional (IRP).
As per the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, state the following:
(i) Initiation date for the Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process.
(ii) Date of commencement of Insolvency.
(iii) Date of issuance of Public Announcement.
(iv) Tenure of Interim Resolution Professional.
(v) Last Date for Creditors to file their Claims.
(vi) Calculate Time Period for the completion of the Insolvency Resolution Process by the NCLT. (Dec 2019, 1 mark each × 6 = 6 marks)
Answer:
(i) As per Section 5(11) of the Insolvency & Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (the Code), initiation date for Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process is the date on which a financial creditor, corporate applicant or operational creditor, as the case may be, makes an application to the Adjudicating Authority for initiating Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process. So 1st July, 2018 would be the initiation date.

(ii) According to Section 5(12) of the Code, insolvency commencement date is the date of admission of an application for initiating Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process by the Adjudicating Authority Under Sections 7, 9 or Section 10, as the case may be. Accordingly, 10th July, 2018 is the insolvency commencement date.

(iii) As per Regulation 6 of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016, an Insolvency Professional shall make a public announcement not later than three days from the date of his appointment as an Interim Resolution Professional. Accordingly, 13th July, 2018 is the date of making public announcement.

(iv) Section 16(5) of the Code originally provided that the term of the Interim Resolution Professional shall not exceed thirty days from the date of his appointment, i.e., 9th August, 2018. But this sub-section was amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Second Amendment) Act, 2018. Now the term of the Interim Resolution Professional continues till the date of appointment of the Resolution Professional Under Section 22 of the Code.

(v) As per regulation 12(1) of the IBBI (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016, subject to sub-regulation (2), a creditor shall submit claim with proof on or before the last date mentioned in the public announcement. However, as per regulation 12(2) a creditor, who fails to submit claim with proof within the time stipulated in the public announcement, may submit the claim with proof to the Interim Resolution Professional or the Resolution Professional, as the case may be, on or before the ninetieth day of the insolvency commencement date. Accordingly, 7th October, 2018 is last date of submission of claim. However, in manyjudgments, this time line is held to be directory in nature.

(vi) Section 12 of the Code states that any Insolvency Resolution Process shall be completed within a period .of one hundred and eighty days from the date of admission of the application to initiate the process. Accordingly, Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process should be completed by 6th January, 2019. However, the NCLT may on an application made by the Resolution Professional, under a resolution passed by the Committee of Creditors, by a vote of 66% of voting shares, after consideration provide extension which shall not exceed 90 days. Further, Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Act, 2019 w.e.f. 6th August, 2019, has added a proviso to Section 12(3) stating that corporate insolvency resolution process shall mandatorily be completed within a period of three hundred and thirty days from the insolvency commencement date, including any extension of the period of corporate insolvency resolution process granted under this section and the time taken in legal proceedings in relation to such resolution process of the corporate debtor.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 10.
The M Ltd. (Corporate Debtor – CD) was engaged by ‘BB’ TV for conducting tele-voting for one of its prime program. M Ltd. in turn sub-contracted the work to the K Ltd. (Operational Creditor – OC) and issued purchase orders between October and December, 2013 in favour of the K Ltd.
The bills so raised were payable within 30 days of receipt by the M Ltd. It is pertinent to note here that a Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) was executed between the parties (CD and OC) on 26th December, 2014 with effect from 1st November, 2013. In view of non-payment of dues, a demand notice dated 23rd December, 2016 was sent by the OC under Section 8 of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. To this notice, the CD responded that there exists serious and bona fide disputes between the parties and that nothing was payable as the OC had been told on 30th January, 2015 that no amount would be paid to the OC since it had breached the NDA.
Based on the above facts examine by quoting relevant case, if any whether breach of Non-Disclosure Agreement amounts to default? (Dec 2020, 6 marks)
Answer:
The facts of the case is similar to that of the case of Mobilox Innovations Private Limited Vs. Kirusa Software Private Limited, Civil Appeal No. 9405 of 2017. In this case the Supreme Court .opined that once the operational creditor has filed an application, which is otherwise complete, the adjudicating authority must reject the application under Section 9(5)(2)(d) if notice of dispute has been received by the operational creditor or there is a record of dispute in the information utility. The Hon’ble Supreme Court was of the opinion that the breach of Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) was sufficient to construe the existence of a dispute to invalidate the CIRP application filed by the operational creditor.
According to Section 8(2) of the Code the corporate debtor shall, within a period of ten days of the receipt of the demand notice or copy of the invoice mentioned in subsection (1) bring to the notice of the operational creditor, existence of a dispute, if any, or record of the pendency of the suit or arbitration proceedings filed before the receipt of such notice or invoice in relation to such dispute.
It is clear that such notice must bring to the notice of the operational creditor the “existence” of a dispute or the fact that a suit or arbitration proceeding relating to a dispute is pending between the parties.
According to Section 9(5) (ii) (d) of the Code, the Adjudicating Authority shall, within fourteen days of the receipt of the application, by an order, reject the application and communicate such decision to the operational creditor and the corporate debtor, if notice of dispute has been received by the operational creditor or there is a record of dispute in the information utility.
Therefore, all that the adjudicating authority is to see at this stage is whether there is a plausible contention which requires further investigation and that the “dispute” is not a patently feeble legal argument or an assertion of fact unsupported by evidence

Question 11.
(a) ABC Housing Ltd. had initiated Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process against XYZ Infrastructure Ltd. (Corporate Debtor) under Section 7 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. The National Company Law Tribunal has dismissed the application as not maintainable in view of the fact that the winding-up proceeding against the Corporate Debtor had already been initiated by the High Court. Referring relevant case explain whether an application under Section 7 of the Code is maintainable when winding-up proceeding against the Corporate Debtor has already been initiated ? (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
(b) A Suspended Director of a Corporate Debtor, on whom Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) is ordered by National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) made a police complaint against a Resolution Professional to stop his actions. Resolution Professional contended that all allegations made by suspended Director is frivolous and are made only to hinder him from doing the duty as Resolution Professional. The Resolution Professional filed an application with NCLT praying protection.
Referring relevant provisions and decided case clarify whether suspended Director of a Corporate Debtor can file a police complaint against Resolution Professional, if not who can initiate action against the Resolution Professional for alleged wrong doings. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
(a) In the matter of Indiabulls Housing Finance Ltd. vs. Shree Ram Urban Infrastructure Ltd., the Indiabulls Housing Finance Ltd. Appellant had initiated Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process against Shree Ram Urban Infrastructure Ltd. (Corporate Debtor) under Section 7 of the the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
The National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai Bench by impugned order dated 18th may, 2018 dismissed the application as no maintable in view of the fact that the winding-up proceeding against the Corporate Debtor had already been initiated by the Hight Court of Bombay.
Thus, the issue that fell for consideration before the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal was whether an application under Section 7 of the Code is maintainable when winding-up proceeding against the Corporate Debtor has already been initiated?
In the said appeal, the NCLAT examined judgements governing the issue to hold that the High Court of Bombay has already ordered for winding-up of Corporate, Debtor, which is the second stage of the proceeding, thus question of initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’which is the first stage of resolution process against the same Corporate Debtor does not arise.

While arriving at its Judgement, the NCLAT relied on the case of Forech India Pvt. Ltd. vs. Edelweiss Assets Reconstruction Company Ltd. & Anr., wherein the NCLAT observed’ that if a Corporate Insolvency Resolution has started or on failure, if liquidation proceeding has been initiated against the Corporate Debtor, the question of entertaining another application under
Section 7 or 9 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) against the same very Corporate Debtor does not arise, as it is open to the ‘Financial Creditor’ and the ₹ Operational Creditor’ to make claim before the Insolvency Resolution Professional/Official Liquidator.
The NCLAT further opined that once second stage i.e. liquidation (Winding-up) proceeding has already been initiated, the question of reverting back to the first stage of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process or preparation of Resolution Plan does not arise.
The view of the facts of the present case, the NCLAT concluded that as the High Court of Bombay had already ordered winding-up of Corporate Debtor and the same has been initiated, therefore, initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process against the Corporate Debtor did not arise.

(b) In the matter of Alchemist Asset Reconstruction Co. Ltd . vs. Hotel Gaudavan Pvt. Ltd., the IRP prayed for protection for all acts done by him in good faith and to save him from the frivolous allegations made against him in a FIR filed by a former director of corporate debtor.
The NCLT observed that if, there is any complaint against the Insolvency Professional then the IBBI is competent to constitute a disciplinary committee and have the same investigated from an Investigating Authority as per the provision of Section 220 of the Code. If, after investigation IBBI finds that a criminal case has been made out against the insolvency Resolution Professional then the IBBI has to file a complaint in respect of the offences committed by him. It is with the aforesaid object that protection to action taken by the IRP in good faith has been accorded by Section 233 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC). There is also Completed bar of trail of offences in the absence of filling of complaint by the IBBI as is evident from a perusal of section’s 236(1) and (2) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC).
Therefore, a complaint by a former director with the SHO, Police Station would not be maintainable and competent as the complaint is not lodged by the IBBI. The jurisdiction would vest with investigation Officer only when a complaint is filed by IBBI’.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 12.
A German Company (Operational Creditor) filed application under Section 9 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 against PQR Private Limited (Corporate Debtor) alleging that the ‘Corporate Debtor’ committed default in making the payment of certain operational dues. The Adjudicating Authority (National Company Law Tribunal), admitted the application. Before, National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) the Corporate Debtor has raised the question of jurisdiction of the National Company Law Tribunal in entertaining the application Linder Section 9 of the IBC, 2016. The Corporate Debtor referred to the Agreement reached between the parties and submitted that as per the Agreement and as the Office of the Respondent is in Germany, any suit or case is maintainable only in the Courts at Germany. No case can be filed in any Court in India. Discuss with reasoning whether the contention of the Corporate Debtor is correct. (Aug 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
The present facts of the case is similar to the case of Excel Metal Processors Ltdvs. Benteler Trading International Gmbh & ANR. [NCLAT]. The Appellant (Corporate Debtor-Excel Metal) referred to the Agreement reached between the parties and submitted that as per the Agreement and as the Office of the Respondent is in Germany, any suit or case is maintainable only in the Court at Germany.
No case can be filled in any Court in India. Therefore, the Appellant has raised the question of jurisdiction of the National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai Bench in entertaining the application under Section 9 of the Inslovency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC).
However, the NCLAT, New Delhi Bench was not inclined to accept the aforesaid statement as it is now settled and decided by the Appellate Tribunal in Binani industries Ltd. vs. Bank of Baroda & Anr. -Company Appeal (AT) (Insolvency) No. 82 of 2018 etc. Decided on 14th November, 2018 wherein it was held that ₹ Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process’/ insolvency proceedings is not a ₹ suit’ or a litigation’ or a ₹ money claim’ for any litigation; No one is selling or buying the ₹ Corporate Debtor’ a Resolution Plan’; It is not an auction; it is not a recovery, which is an individual effort by the creditor to recover the dues through a process that had debtor and creditor on opposite sides; and it is not liquidation. The object is mere to get resolution brought about, so that the Company do not default on dues.
Pursuant to Section 408 of the Companies Act, 2013, the National Company, Law Tribunal has been constituted in different States. In terms of the said provision, the Central Government has notified and vested the power on respective National Company Law Tribunals to deal with the matter within its territory, where the registered Officers of the Companies are situated.

As per Section 60(1) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), the Adjudicating Authority, in relation to insolvency resolution and liquidation for corporate persons including corporate debtors and personal guarantors thereof shall be the National Company Law Tribunal person is located. As admittedly, the Registered Office of the t Corporate Debtor’ is situated in Mumbai, we hold that the National Company Law Tribunal, Mumbai Bench has the jurisdiction to entertain an application under Section 9 of the I & B Code and the Applicant cannot derive advantage of the terms of the Agreement reached between the parties.
For the reasons of aforesaid, and in absence of any merit, the Appeal was dismissed.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 13.
Images Gym Ltd. was granted credit facility of ₹ 100 lakh under consortium arrangements.
Under the consortium, there were five banks, and credit facility provided by the respective banks were as under:
A-One Bank Ltd. – ₹ 45 lakh,
Best Bank Ltd. – ₹ 20 lakh,
Good Deal Bank Ltd. – ₹ 15 lakh,
Credit Arrangers Bank Ltd. – ₹ 10 lakh and
Your Bank Ltd – ₹ 10 lakh
Among these the A-One Bank Ltd. was the leader.
Images Gym Ltd. was engaged in the business of manufacturing and trading of Gym exercise machines. However, due to poor demand of the products, the company could not sell out the machines and as a result the account of the company with respective banks were classified as Non-performing Advances (NPAs).
Apart from credit facility from the above banks, the company was also having outstanding dues of the creditor, which the company was not able to pay-off. The total amount outstanding of such operational creditors amounted ₹ 30 lakh.
The company has also not paid the salary to its employees and workers for the last 6 months and the total dues amounted to ₹ 10 lakh.
The leader of the consortium filed Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) with the Adjudicating Authority (AA) and proposed the name of Saket Sharma, as Interim Resolution Professional (IRP).
The AA accepted the application and appointed Saket Sharma as IRP and put moratorium.
The IRP constituted the Committee of Creditors (CoC) and first meeting of the CoC was called upon.
The operational creditors objected about the constitution of the committee and asked the IRP to include operational creditors also in the CoC, which the IRP denied.
The CoC observed that IRP is not discharging his functions properly and was reluctant in calling the expression of interest from Resolution Applicant(s), so they proposed forthe change of the existing IRP and appointment of the new Resolution Professional (RP) named as Anubhav Dutt.
The RP called the expression of interest from the eligible applicants and each proposal was placed before the CoC, but no consensus had arrived at. The initial period of 180 days was going to elapsed so the CoC through the RP sought extension which the Adjudicating Authority for further 90 days. The RP again called the expression of interest from other Resolution Applicants, but it was also not agreed upon by the CoC and after lapse of total 270 days, the Adjudicating Authority ordered for its liquidation and the present RP was appointed as Liquidator.
The Liquidator sold off the assets of the Company and realised only ₹ 150 lakh, whereas the outstanding dues of the various stakeholders remained as under.

Dues of ₹ in Lakhs
Fee payable as Resolution Professional 10
Fee payable as Liquidator 10
Dues of the banks with interest 110
Outstanding from Operational Creditors 30
Dues of Govts. 15
Workmen’s dues 10
Employee’s salary 15
Equity shareholders 30
Total 230

(a) Mention the provisions relating to the constitution of the Committee of Creditors (CoC) under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. In the instant case, the IRP did not included the Operational Creditors. Whether this action of the IRP was justified? (Dec 2021, 10 marks)
(b) Comment on the following:
(i) How the voting of share shall be determined in the meeting of the CoC, since in the given case the finance was made available under the consortium arrangement?
(ii) What would have been the position of constitution of the CoC, if some of the operational creditor had assigned their rights in favour of the financial creditor? (Dec 2021, 7 + 3 = 10 marks)
(c) What is the meaning of ‘Resolution Plan’ and ‘Resolution Applicant’? List out the persons not eligible to be ‘Resolution Applicant’.
(Dec 2021, 2 + 2 + 6 = 10 marks)
(d) Explain relevant provisions for distribution of assets by the liquidator.
How the liquidator will pay-off the dues in priority order of various stakeholders in the given case? (Dec 2021, 5 + 5 = 10 marks)
Answer:
(a) Section 21 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC) deals with the provisions relating to the committee of creditors (CoC):
1. The interim resolution professional shall after collation of all claims received against the corporate debtor and determination of the financial position of the corporate debtor, constitute a committee of creditors.

2. The committee of creditors shall comprise all financial creditors of the corporate debtor:
Provided that a financial creditor or the authorized representative of the financial creditor referred to in sub-section (6) or sub-section (6A) or sub-section (5) of section 24, if it is a related party of the corporate debtor, shall not have any right of representation, participation or voting in a meeting of the committee of creditors:
Provided further that the first proviso shall not apply to a financial creditor, regulated by a financial sector regulator, if it is a related party of the corporate debtor solely on account of conversion or substitution of debt into equity shares or instruments convertible into equity shares or completion of such transactions as may be prescribed, prior to the insolvency commencement date.

3. Subject to sub-sections (6) and (6A), where the corporate debtor owes financial debts to two or more financial creditors as part of a consortium or agreement, each such financial creditor shall be part of the committee of creditors and their voting share shall be determined on the basis of the financial debts owed to them.

4. Where any person is a financial creditor as well as an operational creditor:
a. such person shall be a financial creditor to the extent of the financial debt owed by the corporate debtor, and shall be included in the committee of creditors, with voting share proportionate to the extent of financial debts owed to such creditor;
b. such person shall be considered to be an operational creditor to the extent of the operational debt owed by the corporate debtor to such creditor.

5. Where an operational creditor has assigned or legally transferred any operational debt to a financial creditor, the assignee or transferee shall be considered as an operational creditor to the extent of such assignment or legal transfer.

6. Where the terms of the financial debt extended as part of a consortium arrangement or syndicated facility provide for a single trustee or agent to act for all financial creditors, each financial creditor may
a. authorize the trustee or agent to act on his behalf in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share;
b. represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share;
c. appoint an insolvency professional (other than the resolution professional) at his own cost to represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share; or
d. exercise his right to vote to the extent of his voting share with one or more financial creditors jointly or severally.
(6A) Where a financial debt-
a. is in the form of securities or deposits and the terms of the financial debt provide for appointment of a trustee or agent to act as authorized representative for all the financial creditors, such trustee or agent shall act on behalf of such financial creditors;
b. is owed to a class of creditors exceeding the number as may be specified, other than the creditors covered under clause (a) or sub-section (6), the interim resolution professional shall make an application to the Adjudicating Authority along with the list of all financial creditors, containing the name of an insolvency professional, other than the interim resolution professional, to act as their authorized representative who shall be appointed by the Adjudicating Authority prior to the first meeting of the committee of creditors;
c. is represented by a guardian, executor or administrator, such person shall act as authorized representative on behalf of such financial creditors, and such authorized representative under clause (a) or clause (b) or clause (c) shall attend the meetings of the committee of creditors, and vote on behalf of each financial creditor to the extent of his voting share.
(6B) The remuneration payable to the authorized representative-
i. under clauses (a) and (c) of sub-section (6A), if any, shall be as per the terms of the financial debt or the relevant documentation; and
ii. under clause (b) of sub-section (6A) shall be as specified which shall be form part of the insolvency resolution process costs.

7. The Board may specify the manner of voting and the determining of the voting share in respect of financial debts covered under sub-sections (6) and (6A).

8. Save as otherwise provided in this Code, all decisions of the committee of creditors shall be taken by a vote of not less than fifty-one per cent, of voting share of the financial creditors: Provided that where a corporate debtor does not have any financial creditors, the committee of creditors shall be constituted and shall comprise of such persons to exercise such functions in such manner as may be specified.

9. The committee of creditors shall have the right to require the resolution professional to furnish any financial information in relation to the corporate debtor at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process.

10. The resolution professional shall make available any financial information so required by the committee of creditors under sub-section (9) within a period of seven days of such requisition.
As per section 21(2) of IBC the CoC shall comprise of financial creditors. The Operational Creditors do not have right to vote in the meeting of Committee of Creditors, however, the directors, partners and one representative of operational creditors may attend the meetings of Committee of Creditors.

(b) 1. Section 21(3) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that subject to sub-sections (6) and (6A), where the corporate debtor owes financial debts to two or more financial creditors as part of a consortium or agreement, each such financial creditor shall be part of the committee of creditors and their voting share shall be determined on the basis of the financial debts owed to them.
Section 21(6) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that where the terms of the financial debt extended as part of a consortium arrangement or syndicated facility provide for a single trustee or agent to act for all financial creditors, each financial creditor may.
a. authorize the trustee or agent to act on his behalf in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share.
b. represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share.
c. appoint an insolvency professional (other than the resolution professional) at his own cost to represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share; or
d. exercise his right to vote to the extent of his voting share with one or more financial creditors jointly or severally.
Section 21 (6B) provides that the remuneration payable to the authorized representative:

  • under clauses (a) and (c) of sub-section (6A), if any, shall be as per the terms of the financial debt or the relevant documentation; and
  • under clause (b) of sub-section (6A) shall be as specified which shall be form part of the insolvency resolution process costs.

2. Section 21(5) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that where an operational creditor has assigned or legally transferred any operational debt to a financial creditor, the assignee or transferee shall be considered as an operational creditor to the extent of such assignment or legal transfer.

(c) In terms of Section 5(26) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 -“Resolution Plan” means a plan proposed by resolution applicant for insolvency resolution of the corporate debtor as a going concern in accordance with Part II.
Explanation – For removal of doubts, it is hereby clarified that a resolution plan may include provisions for the restructuring of the corporate debtor, including by way of merger, amalgamation and demerger.
Section 5(25) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that “resolution applicant” means a person, who individually or jointly with any other person, submits a resolution plan to the resolution professional pursuant to the invitation made under clause (h)of sub-section (2) of section 25 or pursuant to section 54K, as the case may be.
Persons not eligible to be resolution applicant – Section 29A:
A person shall not be eligible to submit a resolution plan, if such person, or any other person acting jointly or in concert with such person-
(a) is an undischarged insolvent;
(b) is a wilful defaulter in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India issued under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 (10 of 1949);
(c) at the time of submission of the resolution plan has an account, or an account of a corporate debtor under the management or control of such person or of whom such person is a promoter, classified as non-performing asset in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India issued under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 (10 of 1949) or the guidelines of a financial sector regulator issued under any other law for the time being in force, and at least a period of one year has lapsed from the date of such classification till the date of commencement of the corporate insolvency resolution process of the corporate debtor:
Provided that the person shall be eligible to submit a resolution plan if such person makes payment of all overdue amounts with interest thereon and charges relating to non performing asset accounts before submission of resolution plan:
Provided further that nothing in this clause shall apply to a resolution applicant where such applicant is a financial entity and is not a related party to the corporate debtor.
(d) has been convicted for any offence punishable with imprisonment

  • for two years or more under any Act specified under the Twelveth Schedule; or
  • for seven years or more under any law for the time being in force:

Provided that this clause shall not apply to a person after the expiry of a period of two years from the date of his release from imprisonment.
Provided further that this clause shall not apply in relation to a connected person.
(e) is disqualified to act as a director under the Companies Act, 2013: Provided that this clause shall not apply in relation to a connected person.
(f) is prohibited by the Securities and Exchange Board of India from trading in securities or accessing the securities markets;
(g) has been a promoter or in the management or control of a corporate debtor in which a preferential transaction, undervalued transaction, extortionate credit transaction or fraudulent transaction has taken place and in respect of which an order has been made by the Adjudicating Authority under this Code:
Provided that this clause shall not apply if a preferential transaction, undervalued transaction, extortionate credit transaction or fraudulent transaction has taken place prior to the acquisition of the corporate debtor by the resolution applicant pursuant to a resolution plan approved under this Code or pursuant to a scheme or plan approved by a financial sector regulator or a court, and such resolution applicant has not otherwise contributed to the preferential transaction, undervalued transaction, extortionate credit transaction or fraudulent transaction;
(h) has executed a guarantee in favour of a creditor in respect of a corporate debtor against which an application for insolvency resolution made by such creditor has been admitted underthis Code and such guarantee has been invoked by the creditor and remains unpaid in full or part;
(i) is subject to any disability, corresponding to clauses (a) to (h), under any law in a jurisdiction outside India; or
(j) has a connected person not eligible under clauses (a) to (i).

(d) Section 53 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 deals with distribution of assets in liquidation. The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 makes significant changes in the priority of claims for distribution of liquidation proceeds. In case of liquidation, the assets will be distributed in the following order in case of liquidation:

  • the insolvency resolution process costs and the liquidation costs paid in full,
  • workmen’s dues for the preceding 24 months and secured creditors, who have relinquished security,
  • wages and any unpaid dues owed to employees other than workmen for the period of twelve months preceding the liquidation commencement date,
  • financial debts owed to unsecured creditors,
  • government dues and remaining secured creditors (any remaining debt if they enforce their collateral),
  • any remaining debt and dues,
  • preference shareholders, and
  • equity shareholders or partners, as the case may be.

In the given case the liquidator will distribute the assets in the following order of priority:

Payment in order of priority Amount to paid in lakhs Fund available for distribution (₹ in Lakhs)
150
Fees of insolvency professional and Liquidator 20 130
Workmen’s dues for the preceding 24 months and secured creditors 10 120
Employee Salary 15 105
Unsecured Creditors (Operational creditors) 30 75
Government dues 15 60
Remaining secured creditors (any remaining debt if they enforce their collateral) 60 0

Thus, in the instant case the liquidator shall consider the dues of the various stake holder in the priority as mentioned above. Accordingly, the banks will get only the residual amount which ₹ 60 lakh only.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 14.
Financial Creditor of M/s XYZ Ltd. (Corporate Debtor) filed an application for Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) before the Adjudicating Authority and Interim Resolution Professional (IRP) was appointed. The IRP for the purpose of formation of Committee of Creditors (CoC), verified the claims submitted by all the financial creditors and observed that all such financial creditors comes under the purview of related parties to the Corporate Debtor. Apart from the financial creditors there are 5 Operational Creditors only.
In the given situation, how the CoC will be formed ? Explain by qouting the relevant provisions contained in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016. (Dec 2021, 6 marks)
Answer:
The provisions as contained in the Regulation 16 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016 are very much relevant in this regard. This Regulation provides as under:
1. Where the corporate debtor has no financial debt or where all financial creditors are related parties of the corporate debtor, the committee shall be set up in accordance with this Regulation.

2. The committee formed under this ‘Regulation shall consist of following members:-
a. eighteen largest operational creditors by value:
Provided that if the number of operational creditors is less than eighteen, the committee shall include all such operational creditors;
b. one representative elected by all workmen other than those workmen included under sub-clause (a); and
c. one representative elected by all employees other than those employees included under sub-clause (a).

3. Every member of the committee formed underthis Regulation shall have voting rights in proportion of the debt due to such creditor or debt represented by such representative, as the case may be, to the total debt.
Explanation – For the purposes of this sub-regulation, ‘total debt means the sum of-
a. the amount of debt due to the creditors listed in sub-regulation 2(a);
b. the amount of the aggregate debt due to workmen under sub regulation 2(b); and
c. the amount of the aggregate debt due to employees under sub regulation 2(c)

4. A committee formed under this Regulation and its members shall have the same rights, powers, duties and obligations as a committee comprising financial creditors and its members, as the case may be. Now, according to the above Regulation 16 the answer to the given problem is as under:
Since all the Financial Creditors are related party to the Corporate Debtor, hence no Financial Creditor shall be a part of the CoC as per Regulation 16(1).
Further since there are Operational Creditors and their numbers are FIVE, hence all such Operational Creditors will be included in the CoC. As required by Regulation 16(2)(b) & (c) one representative shall also be included in the CoC.

Question 15.
(a) Read the case study carefully and answer the questions given at the end:
DK Swan Limited (DK) was subject to Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) initiated by an Operational Creditor under Section 9 of Insolvency Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC). During the CIRP, claims were invited by the Interim Resolution Professional (IRP).
Sunrise filed its claim in Form C as a financial creditor for a sum of ₹ 62.60 lakh on 15th June, 2017. Thereafter, Sunrise filed a revised Form C for a sum of ₹ 119.11 lakh on 25th June, 2017. Sunrise had filed the revised claim Form on the basis of an alleged Memorandum of Understanding dated 17th September, 2010 executed with the Corporate Debtor, which stated that Inter Corporate Deposits (ICDs) of X 36.55 lakh have been granted to the Corporate Debtor by Sunrise bearing interest of 24% repayable in terms of the mutual agreement between the parties.
However, Sunrise has submitted that it has granted ICDs of ₹ 76.00 lakh (approx.) to the Corporate Debtor between July, 2008 and February, 2012. Out of this amount, Sunrise is claiming a principal amount of ₹ 33.00 lakh. The balance amount of ₹ 53.60 lakh was credited in the account of XYZ, which is a wholly owned subsidiary of Sunrise. The total claim of Sunrise has increased to ₹ 119.11 lakh in 7 years on account of interest at the rate of 24%.
XYZ filed its claim before the IRP in Form F as a creditor other than a financial creditor or operational creditor for a sum of ₹ 103.90 lakh on 15th June, 2017. Thereafter, XYZ filed a revised claim in Form C as a financial creditor for a sum of ₹ 119.72 lakh on 28th June, 2017. It had entered into a Development Agreement dated 6th April, 2011 with the Corporate Debtor for a sale consideration of ₹ 42.80 lakh to purchase development rights in a project. On 30th November, 2011, the Development Agreement was terminated and an Agreement to sell, along with a Side Letter, was executed between XYZ and the Corporate Debtor for purchase of flats. The sale consideration for the Agreement to sell was enhanced to ₹ 96.01 lakh from ₹ 42.80 lakh under the Development Agreement. XYZ paid a sum of ₹ 53.06 lakh as advance payment under the Agreement to Sell. This amount was adjusted out of the ICDs payable to Sunrise as noted above. The claim of XYZ is with respect to the principal amount of ₹ 53.06 lakh, which along with interest at the rate of 18% increased to ₹ 119.72 lakh in 5 years.
Phantom is also a financial creditor of the Corporate Debtor and is a part of Committee of Creditors (CoC). Its claim is based on a registered Deed of Assignment in its favour dated 2nd January, 2015, pursuant to which, Karnataka Bank Limited had assigned the non- performing assets relating to the credit facilities granted to the Corporate Debtor. The voting share of Phantom was reduced to 3.58% on account of XYZ and Sunrise being included in the CoC.
The CoC was constituted on 27th June, 2017. On 30th June, 2017, the IRP rejected the claim of Sunrise, inter alia, on the ground that the claim was not in the nature of a financial debt in terms of Section 5(8) of IBC since there was an absence of consideration for the time value of money, i.e., the period of repayment of the claimed ICDs was not stipulated.
The IRP also rejected the claim of XYZ on the ground that its claim as a financial creditor in Form C was filed after the expiry of the period for filing such a claim.
The IRP in his letter dated 30th June, 2017 has noted that as per the ledger provided by Sunrise, no interest was claimed on the alleged debt and no adjustment was made regarding the payment of principal or interest by the Corporate Debtor to Sunrise. It has been submitted in the written submissions filed on behalf of Sunrise and XYZ that the auditors of the Corporate Debtor had been putting a note in its balance sheets stating that the interest of 12% was not being paid to Sunrise due to a dispute.
Aggrieved by the rejection of their claim as financial creditors, XYZ and Sunrise filed applications before the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) to be included in the CoC. The NCLT by its order dated 5th July, 2017 allowed the applications. However, none of the other financial creditors, such as Phantom and YES Bank, were parties to these proceedings. The NCLT observed that XYZ’s original claim in Form F was filed on time and it has only amended its claim as one under Form C. The NCLT further observed that the amount given by Sunrise in the form of ICDs has been received as a deposit and is attracting interest as reflected in Form ‘26AS’, deducting TDS on interest. Thus, NCLT allowed Sunrise and XYZ to submit their claims as financial creditors with a direction to the IRP to consider the claims.
On 6th July, 2017, a meeting of the CoC took place which was attended by YES Bank and Phantom, and also by the newly approved financial creditors, XYZ and Sunrise. Following the meeting, YES Bank and Phantom filed applications in the NCLT for the exclusion of XYZ and Sunrise from the CoC on the ground that they are related parties.
The applications filed under Section 60(5) by Phantom also sought similar reliefs for:
(i) The removal of Sunrise and XYZ from the CoC; and
(ii) Directing the constitution of the CoC in terms of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy (Amendment) Ordinance 2018 (IBC Ordinance 2018).
As noted by NCLT, the Memorandum of Understanding dated 17th September, 2010, on the basis of which Sunrise had filed its claim in Form C before the IRP, was signed two years after the commencement of the purported transaction. The execution of the Memorandum of Understanding was sought to be explained on the basis that a formal document was created for specifying the rate of interest on the ICDs given by Sunrise to the Corporate Debtor. However, despite the creation of a formal document, the rate of interest being charged on the ICDs was 12% as mentioned in the claim before the IRP, which is half of the interest rate of 24% stipulated in the Memorandum of Understanding.
NCLT in its judgement dated 24th August, 2018 said :
(a) That Sunrise and XYZ did not qualify to be considered as financial creditors.
(b) In relation to the second issue, NCLT held that it “does not require a reply” in view of its above-mentioned finding. However, it took note of the first proviso to Section 21 (2) of the IBC, which was introduced with effect from 6th June, 2018. Under the first proviso, inter alia, a financial creditor who is a related party of the corporate debtor shall not have the right of representation, participation or voting in the CoC.
In appeal, the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) proceeded of its decision to observe that admittedly Sunrise and XYZ are the financial creditors of the corporate debtor. Having stated so, the Appellate Tribunal proceeded to enquire into whether XYZ and Sunrise are related parties within the meaning of Section 5(24) of the IBC.
Answering the above issue in the affirmative, the NCLAT held that Sunrise and XYZ are related parties of the Corporate Debtor since :
(a) XYZ was a partner of the Corporate Debtor.
(b) During the transaction period of 2009 to 2012, Sunrise led by Kunal Kumar was making substantial financial arrangements on the basis of advice provided by the Corporate Debtor led by its Management and Directors.
(c) The Corporate Debtor was acting on the directions/instructions of Kunal Kumar who, along with his family, is the majority shareholder in Sunrise, of which XYZ is a wholly- owned subsidiary.
(d) On the basis of the same reasons, Kunal Kumar was also held to be a person participating in the policy-making process of the Corporate Debtor.
Aggrieved by order of NCLAT, Phantom approached the Hon’ble Supreme Court.
Referring the relevant case and relevant provisions of IBC, its Rules and Regulations made thereunder, answer the following questions :
(a) Explain whether Sunrise and XYZ are financial creditors of the Corporate Debtor ?
(b) Explain based on Supreme Court’s decision, if Sunrise and XYZ are related parties of the Corporate Debtor ?
(c) Whether Sunrise and XYZ have to be excluded from the CoC ?
(d) Section 21 (2) of the IBC provides that the Committee of Creditors (CoC)
shall comprise of all financial creditors of the corporate debtor. In light of this statutory provision what will be your answer, if there are no financial creditors or all the financial creditors are related party to the Corporate Debtor ? (June 2022, 10 marks each)

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 16.
An Application for initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) was filed against a Corporate Debtor (CD) and the following four Banks submitted their claims as under:

A Bank Limited ₹ 14 crore
B Bank Limited ₹ 3.26 crore
C Bank Limited ₹ 18.27 crore, and
D Bank Limited ₹ 8.99 crore

It was the case of consortium finance.
The Corporate Debtor filed an appeal before National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) challenging the order of admission of CIRP, which was ultimately upheld by Supreme Court. NCLAT in another order, directed the Resolution Professional (RP) to keep the company as a going concern and the bankers were also directed to co-operate with the Resolution Professional in this regard.
The banks allowed continuous operations in the company’s account through which the company was also routing all the business cash in the normal course of its business.
In the course of these operations, the Corporate Debtor’s outstanding dues under the said accounts got gradually liquidated through its surplus cash flows accruing out of its increasing cash profits. As the Corporate Debtor was making good profit and had accumulated adequate cash balance, the erstwhile RP opted to reduce the utilization of the Fund-based facilities and thus squared off the Cash Credit (CC) facilities with all the banks. In the meantime, in one of the meeting of the Committee of Creditors (CoC), new RP was proposed, which was approved by the Adjudicating Authority.
The new RP asked the banks to reverse the amounts remitted by the previous RP while discharging his duties as per the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC) and its Regulations thereof. The lenders consortium contended that the operation in the accounts was allowed as per the directions of Tribunal and that the credit was received in the normal course of business. Meanwhile the Resolution Plan was also approved by Adjudicating Authority.
In light of the above facts, discuss, whether the contention of lenders consortium is correct ? (June 2022, 6 marks)

Question 17.
Solver Ltd., the Operational Creditor (OC), supplied Jute bags to Atren Ltd., the Corporate Debtor (CD) through 12 invoices for ₹ 78.63 lakh during a period of May 2015 to November 2016.
The OC claimed its amount from the date of acknowledgement i.e. 12th December, 2017 with interest. The CD .sent a Legal Notice (Notice of Dispute) on 20th September, 2018 after that it was assured that the outstanding amount will be paid within a month, but no outstanding debt was paid. It also mentioned that past payments and return of material were not factored in raising the demand.
The OC raised demand notice under Section 8 of the IBC again on 12th October, 2018 which was delivered on 27th October, 2018. The CD sent a reply on 31st October, 2018 to the aforesaid demand notice wherein it mentioned that the material worth 110.65 lakh were returned on 23rd June, 2017, owing to the quality issue and the same were duly received and acknowledged by the Operational Creditor, so dispute was raised.
The National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) rejected the application of OC. The OC referred the matter before the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT). Referring the relevant case, explain whether the OC will succeed before NCLAT ? (June 2022, 6 marks)

Question 18.
A Bank extended credit facility to M/s. Jaiveer Construction (JC), a proprietary firm of the appellant. The loan amount was disbursed to JC, the Principal Borrower. Gupta Foods Ltd. (GFL), of which the appellant is also a Promoter/Director, had offered guarantee to the loan accounts of JC, the Principal Borrower. The loan accounts of JC were declared NPA on 30th January, 2011.
During the pendency of the stated action initiated by the Financial Creditor (FC), JC the Principal Borrower had repeatedly assured to pay the outstanding amount, but the commitment remained unfulfilled.
The FC eventually wrote to GFL in December, 2018 in the form of a purported notice of payment. The GFL replied to the said notice of demand vide letter dated 8th January, 2019, inter alia, clarifying that it was not the Principal Borrower, nor owed any financial debt to the financial creditor and had not committed any default in repayment of the stated outstanding amount.
The FC then proceeded to file an application on 23rd March, 2019 under Section 7 of the Code for initiating Corporate Insolvency Resolution Proceeding (CIRP) against the GFL, before the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT). This application came to be resisted on diverse counts and in particular, on the preliminary ground that it was not maintainable because the Principal Borrower was not a “Corporate Person”; and further, it was barred by limitation, as the date of default was 30th January, 2011, whereas, the application had been filed on 23rd March, 2019 i.e., beyond the period of three years.
Examine in light of decided case, whether two objections made by GFL were sustainable or not ? (June 2022, 6 marks)

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 19.
A Ltd. and the B Ltd. had jointly submitted the Resolution Plan for taking over the Company. The same was approved unanimously by the Committee of Creditors (CoC), and after that, the Resolution Plan was further approved by the Adjudicating Authority (AA).
The approved Resolution Plan got executed, and the shares were allotted as per the terms of the approved Plan. All money in respect of 34% shares were paid by the A Ltd. and B Ltd. got 51% paid-up equity shares. Later, after 13 months of completion of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Plan (CIRP), the AA, on an application of B Ltd. made changes in Plan, thus increasing its shareholding to 75% and reducing the shareholding of A Ltd. to 10%. This was done as typographical/ clerical error brought to notice of AA.
Discuss, based on case laws, whether A Ltd. will succeed in Appeal ? (June 2022, 6 marks)

Question 20.
Discuss the provisions of Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Answer:

  • Part II of the Code deals with the insolvency resolution and liquidation for corporate persons.
  • Section 4 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides that Part II of the Code shall apply to matters relating to the insolvency and liquidation of corporate debtors where the minimum amount of the default is one lakh rupees.
  • The proviso to section 4 empowers the Central Government to specify, by notification, the minimum amount of default of higher value but it shall not be more than one crore rupees.
  • Part II of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lays down the following two independent stages:
    • Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process [Sections 4 and 6 to 32] and
    • Liquidation [Sections 33 to 54 and Section 59] Chapter II of Part II deals with corporate insolvency resolution process while Chapter III together with Chapter V of Part II govern the liquidation process for corporate persons.
  • According to Rule 3(b), “corporate insolvency resolution process” means the insolvency resolution process for corporate persons under Chapter II of Part II of the Code.
  • In corporate insolvency resolution process, the financial creditors assess the viability of debtor’s business and the options for its revival and rehabilitation.
  • If the corporate insolvency resolution process fails or the financial creditors decide that the business of the debtor cannot be carried on in a profitable manner and it should be wound up, the debtor’s business undergoes the liquidation process.
  • In the liquidation process, the assets of the debtor are realised and distributed by the liquidator in accordance with the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
  • Chapter II of Part II specifically deals with corporate insolvency resolution process. The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 also contains a provision for Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process in Chapter IV of Part II of the Code and is applicable to small corporates as defined in Section 55(2)’of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

Question 21.
Who may Initiate Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process in case of default?
Answer:
Section 6 of the Code provides that in case of a default, the following people are entitled to initiate a corporate insolvency resolution process:

  • a financial creditor,
  • an operational creditor or
  • the corporate debtor itself.

Question 22.
Explain the term default as per Section 3(12) of the code.
Answer:
The term “default” means non-payment of debt when whole or any part or instalment of the amount of debt has become due and payable and is not paid by the debtor or the corporate debtor, as the case may be [Section 3(12)].

Question 23.
Define “financial creditor” and “operational creditor” as per the code.
Answer:
According to Section 5(7), a “financial creditor” means any person to whom a financial debt is owed and includes a person to whom such debt has been legally assigned or transferred to.
According to section 5(20) an “operational creditor” means a person to whom an operational debt is owed and includes any person to whom such debt has been legally assigned or transferred.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 24.
Define “financial debt” as per the code.
Answer: .
According to section 5(8) of the Code, a “financial debt” means a debt along with interest, if any, which is disbursed against the consideration for the time value of money. It includes –
(a) money borrowed against the payment of interest;
(b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility or its dematerialised equivalent;
(c) any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;
(d) the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which is deemed as a finance or capital lease under the Indian Accounting Standards or such other accounting standards as may be prescribed;
(e) receivables sold or discounted other than any receivables sold on non-recourse basis;
(f) any amount raised under any other transaction, including any forward sale or purchase agreement, having the commercial effect of a borrowing;
(g) any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price and for calculating the value of any derivative transaction, only the market value of such transaction shall be taken into account;
(h) any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;
(i) the amount of any liability in respect of any of the guarantee or indemnity for any of the items referred to in sub-clause (a) to (h) of this clause.

Question 25.
State the process of initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution by financial creditor.
Answer:
Section 7 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lays down the procedure for the initiation of the corporate insolvency resolution process by a financial creditor or two or more financial creditors jointly.
1. A financial creditor either by itself or jointly with other financial creditors, or any other person on behalf of the financial creditor, as may be notified by the Central Government may file an application for initiating corporate insolvency resolution process against a corporate debtor before the Adjudicating Authority when a default has occurred.

2. The financial creditor shall make an application under sub-section (1) in such form and manner and accompanied with such fee as may be prescribed.

3. The financial creditor shall, along with the application furnish
(a) any of the following record or evidence of default, namely:
(i) certified copy of entries in the relevant account in the bankers’ book as defined in clause (3) of section 2 of the Bankers’ Books Evidence Act, 1891;
(ii) an order of a court or tribunal that has adjudicated upon the non-payment of a debt, where the period of appeal against such order has expired.”
(b) the name of the resolution professional proposed to act as an interim resolution professional; and
(c) any other information as may be specified by the Board.

4. The Adjudicating Authority shall, within fourteen days of the receipt of the application under sub-section (2), ascertain the existence of a default from the records of an information utility or on the basis of other evidence furnished by the financial creditor under sub-section (3).

5. Where the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied that – (a) a default has occurred and the application under sub-section (2) is complete, and there is no disciplinary proceedings pending against the proposed resolution professional, it may, by order, admit such application; or (b) default has not occurred or the application under sub-section (2) is incomplete or any disciplinary proceeding is pending against the proposed resolution professional, it may, by order, reject such application.

6. The corporate insolvency resolution process shall commence from the date of admission of the application under sub-section (5).

7. The Adjudicating Authority shall communicate the order under clause (a) and (b) of sub-section (5) to the financial creditor and the corporate debtor, within seven days of admission or rejection of such application, as the case may be.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 26.
What has to be submitted at the time of initiating corporate insolvency resolution process?
Answer:
The financial creditor shall, along with the application furnish –
(a) any of the following record or evidence of default, namely:-
(i) certified copy of entries in the relevant account in the bankers’ book as defined in clause (3) of section 2 of the Bankers’ Books Evidence Act, 1891;
(ii) an order of a court or tribunal that has adjudicated upon the non-payment of a debt, where the period of appeal against such order has expired.”
(b) the name of the resolution professional proposed to act as an interim resolution professional; and
(c) any other information as may be specified by the Board.

Question 27.
What is the time frame for ascertaining the existence of default?
Answer:
After the filing of the application, the National Company Law Tribunal shall ascertain the existence of a default from the records of an information utility or on the basis of other evidence furnished by the financial creditor within fourteen days of the receipt of the application [Section 7(4)].

Question 28.
State the process of admission of an application.
Answer:
Once NCLT is satisfied of existence of the default and has ensured that the application is complete and no disciplinary proceedings are pending against the proposed resolution professional, it shall admit the application [Section 7(5)]. The National Company Law Tribunal is not required to look into any other criteria for admission of the application.
Section 7 (6) provides that the insolvency resolution process commences from the date of admission of the application.

Question 29.
State the grounds on which the application can be rejected?
Answer:
If the National Company Law Tribunal finds that the default has not occurred or the application is incomplete or any disciplinary proceeding is pending against the proposed resolution professional, it may reject the application under section 7(5)(b). Before rejecting the application under section 7(5)(b), the National Company Law Tribunal shall give a notice to the applicant to rectify the defect in the application within seven days of receipt of such notice from the National Company Law Tribunal.
Admission or rejection, the same shall be communicated within seven days
(a) to the financial creditor and the corporate debtor where the application is accepted, (b) to the financial creditor where the application is rejected.

Question 30.
Explain Insolvency Resolution by Operational Creditor.
Answer:
Section 8 the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 lays down the procedure for the initiation of the corporate insolvency resolution process by an operational creditor. The procedure for insolvency resolution by operational creditor laid down in section 8 differs from the procedure applicable to financial creditors under section 7 of the Code.
Section 8 of the Code states that:
1. An operational creditor may, on the occurrence of a default, deliver a demand notice of unpaid operational debtor copy of an invoice demanding payment of the amount’ involved in the default to the corporate debtor in such form and manner as may be prescribed.

2. The corporate debtor shall, within a period of ten days of the receipt of the demand notice or copy of the invoice mentioned in sub-section (1) bring to the notice of the operational creditor –
(a) existence of a dispute, if any, or record of the pendency of the suit or arbitration proceedings filed before the receipt of such notice or invoice in relation to such dispute;
(b) the payment of unpaid operational debt-
(i) by sending an attested copy of the record of electronic transfer of the unpaid amount from the bank account of the corporate debtor; or
(ii) by sending an attested copy of record that the operational creditor has encashed a cheque issued by the corporate debtor.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 31.
State the process of application for Initiation of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process by Operational Creditor.
Answer:
As per Section 9 of the Code states:
1. After the expiry of the period of ten days from the date of delivery of the notice or invoice demanding payment under sub-section (1) of section 8, if no payment is received by the operational creditor from the corporate debtor, the operational creditor may file an application before the Adjudicating Authority for initiating a corporate insolvency resolution process.

2. The application shall be filed in the form 5 and manner with prescribed fees. A copy of the application to the registered office of the corporate debtor and to the Board, by registered post or speed post or by hand or by electronic means, before filing with the Adjudicating Authority.

3. The operational creditor shall, along with the application furnish:
(a) a copy of the invoice demanding payment or demand notice;
(b) an affidavit that there is no notice given by the corporate debtor relating to a dispute of the unpaid operational debt;
(c) a copy of the certificate from the financial institutions that no payment of an unpaid operational debt is made by the corporate debtor;
(d) a copy of any record with information utility confirming that there is no payment of an unpaid operational debt by the corporate debtor,
(e) any other proof confirming non-payment of any unpaid operational debt.

4. An operational creditor initiating a corporate insolvency resolution process under this section, may propose a resolution professional to act as an interim resolution professional.

5. The Adjudicating Authority shall, within fourteen days of the receipt of the application under sub-section (2), by an order –
(i) admit the application and communicate such decision to the operational creditor and the corporate debtor if,
(a) the application made under sub-section (2) is complete;
(b) there is no payment of the unpaid operational debt;
(c) the invoice or notice for payment to the corporate debtor has been delivered by the operational creditor;
(d) no notice of dispute has been received by the operational creditor or there is no record of dispute in the information utility; and
(e) there is no disciplinary proceeding pending against any resolution professional proposed under sub-section (4), if any.
(ii) reject the application and communicate such decision to the operational creditor and the corporate debtor, if –
(a) the application made under sub-section (2) is incomplete;
(b) there has been payment of the unpaid operational debt;
(c) the creditor has not delivered the invoice or notice for payment to the corporate debtor;
(d) notice of dispute has been received by the operational creditor or there is a record of dispute in the information utility; or
(e) any disciplinary proceeding is pending against any proposed resolution professional.

6. The corporate insolvency resolution process shall commence from the date of admission of the application under sub-section (5) of this section.

Question 32.
How can an operational creditor apply?
Answer:
1. An operational creditor, shall make an application for initiating the corporate insolvency resolution process against a corporate debtor under section 9 of the Code in Form 5, accompanied with documents and records required therein and as specified in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016.

2. The applicant under sub-rule (1) shall serve a copy of the application to the registered office of the corporate debtor and to the Board, by registered post or speed post or by hand or by electronic means, before filing with the Adjudicating Authority.
Section 9(3) of the Code lays down that such application by the operational creditor shall be accompanied with:
(a) a copy of the invoice demanding payment or demand notice delivered by the operational creditor to the corporate debtor;
(b) an affidavit to the effect that there is no notice given by the corporate debtor relating to a dispute of the unpaid operational debt;
(c) a copy of the certificate from the financial institutions maintaining accounts of the operational creditor confirming that there is no payment of an unpaid operational debt by the corporate debtor, if available;
(d) a copy of any record with information utility confirming that there is no payment of an unpaid operational debt by the corporate debtor, if available; and
(e) any other proof confirming that there is no payment of any unpaid operational debt by the corporate debtor or such other information, as may be prescribed. Section 9(3) of the Code was amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Second Amendment) Act, 2018.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 33.
When will the application of the operational creditor be accepted by NCLT?
Answer:
The National Company Law Tribunal shall admit the application and communicate such decision to the operational creditor and the corporate debtor within fourteen days of the receipt of such application if the following conditions are fulfilled-
(a) the application made under sub-section (2) is complete,
(b) there is no payment of the unpaid operational debt,
(c) the invoice or notice for payment to the corporate debtor has been delivered by the operational creditor,
(d) notice of dispute has not been received by the operational creditor or there is no record of dispute in the information utility, and
(e) there is no disciplinary proceeding pending against the proposed resolution professional.

Question 34.
On what grounds the application maybe rejected by NCLT?
Answer:
The National Company Law Tribunal shall reject the application and communicate such decision to the operational creditor and the corporate debtor within fourteen days of the receipt of such application if-
(a) the application is incomplete,
(b) there has been payment of the unpaid operational debt, (c) the creditor has not delivered the invoice or notice for payment to the corporate debtor,
(d) notice of dispute has been received by the operational creditor or there is a record of dispute in the information utility, or
(e) any disciplinary proceeding is pending against any proposed resolution professional.

Question 35.
Discuss the process of declaration of moratorium and public announcement.
Answer:
Section 13 of the Code states that NCLT may by an order-
(a) declare a moratorium for the purposes as per section 14,
(b) cause a public announcement of the initiation of corporate insolvency resolution process and call for the submission of claims under section 15, and
(c) appoint an interim resolution professional in the manner as laid down in section 16.
According to Section 13(2), the public announcement referred to in Section 13(1 )(b) shall be made immediately after the appointment of the interim resolution professional.

Question 36.
State the time-limit for completion of Insolvency Resolution Process.
Answer:
Section 12 of the Code which prescribes a time limit for completion of insolvency resolution process reads as follows:
(1) The process shall be completed within a period of one hundred and eighty days from the date of admission of the application to initiate such process.
(2) In order to extend the period beyond 182 days, a resolution shall be passed at a meeting of the committee of creditors by a vote of sixty-six per cent of the voting shares.
(3) On receipt of an application under sub-section (2), if the Adjudicating Authority is satisfied, it may extend the duration of such process beyond one hundred and eighty days by such further period as it thinks fit, but not exceeding ninety days.

Question 37.
Who are not entitled to make application to initiate corporate insolvency process?
Answer:
Section 11 of the Code lists out the persons not eligible to make an application to initiate the corporate insolvency resolution process. It includes
(a) a corporate debtor undergoing a corporate insolvency resolution process; or
(b) a corporate debtor having completed corporate insolvency resolution process twelve months preceding the date of making of the application; or
(c) a corporate debtor or a financial creditor who has violated any term of resolution plan approved twelve months before the application date; or
(d) a corporate debtor in respect of whom a liquidation order has been made.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 38.
Mention the purpose of declaration of moratorium.
Answer:

  • Ensures that multiple proceedings are not taking place simultaneously and thus avoids the possibility of potentially conflicting outcomes of related proceedings.
  • Keeps the corporate debtor’s assets together during the insolvency resolution process and facilitates orderly completion of the process,
  • Ensures that the company may continue as a going concern while the creditors assess the options for resolution of default.
  • Prohibition on disposal of the corporate debtor’s assets ensure that the corporate debtor/management does not transfer its assets, thereby stripping the corporate debtor of value during the corporate insolvency resolution process.

Question 39.
Discuss the provisions of public announcement of Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process.
Answer:
Section 15 provides that the public announcement of the corporate
insolvency resolution process shall contain the following information:
(a) Name and address of the corporate debtor under the corporate insolvency resolution process,
(b) Name of the authority with which the corporate debtor is incorporated or registered,
(c) Last date for submission of claims, as may be specified,
(d) Details of the interim resolution professional who shall be vested with the management of the corporate debtor and be responsible for receiving claims,
(e) Penalties for false or misleading claims, and
(f) Date on which the corporate insolvency resolution process shall close, which shall be the one hundred and eightieth day from the date of the admission of the application under sections 7, 9 or section 10, as the case may be.

Question 40.
Write a short note on the management of affairs of Corporate Debtor by Interim Resolution Professional.
Answer:
Section 17(1) of the Code provides that from the date of appointment of the
Interim Resolution Professional (IRP)-
(a) he shall manage the affairs of the corporate debtor,
(b) all the powers of the board of directors or the partners of the corporate debtor, shall stand suspended and be exercised by the IRP,
(c) he shall have access to all required documents and records and the officers and managers of the corporate debtor shall report to the IRP.
(d) the financial institutions maintaining accounts of the corporate debtor
shall act on the instructions of the interim resolution professional in relation to such accounts and furnish all information relating to the corporate debtor available with them to the interim resolution professional.

Question 41.
Discuss the provisions of appointment and term of the Interim Resolution Professional.
Answer:
The Adjudicating Authority shall appoint an interim resolution professional within fourteen days from the insolvency commencement date.
Where the application for corporate insolvency resolution process is made by an operational creditor and
(a) no proposal for an interim resolution professional is made, the Adjudicating Authority shall make a reference to the Board for the recommendation of an insolvency professional who may act as an interim resolution professional;
(b) a proposal for an interim resolution professional is made under sub-section (4) of section 9, the resolution professional as proposed, shall be appointed as the interim resolution professional, if no disciplinary proceedings are pending against him.
The Board shall, within ten days of the receipt of a reference from the Adjudicating Authority under sub- section (3), recommend the name of an insolvency professional to the Adjudicating Authority against whom no disciplinary proceedings are pending.
The term of the interim resolution professional shall continue till the date of appointment of the resolution professional under section 22.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 42.
What are the duties of Interim Resolution Professional.
Answer:
The interim resolution professional shall perform the following duties:
(a) to collect all information relating to the assets, finances and operations of the corporate debtor for determining the financial position of the corporate debtor, including information relating to:
(i) business operations for the previous two years;
(ii) financial and operational payments for the previous two years;
(iii) list of assets and liabilities as on the initiation date; and
(iv) such other matters as may be specified;
(b) receive and collate all the claims submitted by creditors to him pursuant to the public announcement made;
(c) constitute a committee of creditors;
(d) monitor the assets of the corporate debtor and manage its operations until a resolution professional is appointed by the committee of creditors;
(e) file the information collected with the information utility; and
(f) take control and custody of any asset over which the corporate debtor has ownership rights as recorded in the balance sheet of the corporate debtor, or with information utility or the depository of securities or any other registry that records the ownership of assets including:
(i) assets over which the corporate debtor has ownership rights which may be located in a foreign country;
(ii) assets that may or may not be in possession of the corporate debtor;
(iii) tangible assets, whether movable or immovable;
(iv) intangible assets including intellectual property;
(v) securities including shares held in any subsidiary of the corporate debtor, financial instruments, insurance policies;
(vi) assets subject to the determination of ownership by a court or authority;
(g) to perform such other duties as may be specified by the Board.

Question 43.
Discuss the process of appointment of Resolution Professional.
Answer:

  • As per Section 22 at the first meeting of the committee of creditors held within seven days of its constitution, at least 66 per cent of the committee of creditors may either resolve to appoint the interim resolution professional as a resolution professional or to replace the interim resolution professional by another resolution professional.
  • Where the committee of creditors resolves to continue the interim resolution professional as resolution professional, the decision shall be communicated to the interim resolution professional, the corporate debtor and the Adjudicating Authority.
  • In case, if the committee of creditors resolves to replace the interim resolution professional, it shall file an application before the Adjudicating Authority for the appointment of the proposed resolution professional along with a written consent from the proposed resolution professional in the specified form.
  • The Adjudicating Authority shall forward the name of the resolution professional proposed under clause (b) of sub-section (3) to the Board for its confirmation and shall make such appointment after confirmation by the Board.
  • If the Board does not confirm the name of the proposed resolution professional within ten days of the receipt of the name of the proposed resolution professional, the Adjudicating Authority shall, by order, direct the interim resolution professional to continue to function as the resolution professional until such time as the Board confirms the appointment of the proposed resolution professional.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 43.
Mention the eligibility criteria for resolution professional.
Answer:
Regulation 3 of the Code lays down the following eligibility criteria for a resolution professional:
(1) An insolvency professional shall be eligible to be appointed as a resolution professional for a corporate insolvency resolution process of a corporate debtor if he, and all partners and directors of the insolvency professional entity of which he is a partner or director, are independent of the corporate debtor.
(2) A person shall be considered independent of the corporate debtor, if he:
(a) is eligible to be appointed as an independent director on the board of the corporate debtor under section 149 of the Companies Act, 2013 (18 of 2013), where the corporate debtor is a company;
(b) is not a related party of the corporate debtor; or
(c) is not an employee or proprietor or a partner of a firm of auditors or secretarial auditors in practice or cost auditors of the corporate debtor or of a legal or a consulting firm, having any transaction with the corporate debtor amounting to five per cent or more of the gross turnover of such firm, in the last three financial years.
(3) Where the committee decides to appoint/ replace the interim resolution professional under section 22 or 27 as the case maybe, it shall obtain the written consent of the proposed resolution professional in Form AA of the Schedule.
(4) A resolution professional shall make disclosures at the time of his appointment and thereafter in accordance with the Code of Conduct.
(5) A resolution professional, who is a director or a partner of an insolvency professional entity, shall not continue as a resolution professional in a corporate insolvency resolution process if the insolvency professional entity or any other partner or director of such insolvency professional entity represents any of the other stakeholders in the same corporate insolvency resolution process.

Question 44.
Define Interim Finance.
Answer:

  • Interim finance includes any financial debt raised by the resolution professional during the insolvency resolution process period [Section 5(15)].
  • Amount of any interim finance and the costs incurred in raising such finance is included in the “insolvency resolution process costs” [Section 5(13)].
  • In case the corporate debtor goes into liquidation, the insolvency resolution process costs which includes interim finance and the costs incurred in raising such finance are paid from the sale of the liquidation assets in priority during the distribution of assets [Section 53]

Question 45.
Describe the authority of Interim Resolution Professional.
Answer:
For the protection and preservation of the value of the property of the corporate debtor and managing his operations, the Interim Resolution Professional shall have the following authority:
(a) to appoint accountants, legal or other professionals,
(b) to enter into contracts on behalf of the corporate debtor or to amend or modify the contracts or transactions which were entered into before the commencement of corporate insolvency resolution process,
(c) to raise interim finance provided that no security interest shall be created over any encumbered property of the corporate debtor without the prior consent of the creditors whose debt is secured over such encumbered property,
(d) to issue instructions to personnel of the corporate debtor as may be necessary for keeping the corporate debtor as a going concern, and
(e) to take all such actions as are necessary to keep the corporate debtor as a going concern.

Question 46.
Discuss the authority of Resolution Professional to conduct corporate insolvency resolution process.
Answer:
Section 23 provides that the resolution professional shall be responsible for carrying out the entire corporate insolvency resolution process and managing the operations of the corporate debtor during such process. Section 23 of the Code states-
1. Subject to section 27, the resolution professional shall conduct the entire corporate insolvency resolution process and manage the operations of the corporate debtor during the corporate insolvency resolution process period: Provided that the resolution professional shall, if the resolution plan under sub-section (6) of section 30 has been submitted, continue to manage the operations of the corporate debtor after the expiry of the corporate insolvency resolution process period until an order is passed by the Adjudicating Authority under section 31.

2. The resolution professional shall exercise powers and perform duties as are vested or conferred on the interim resolution professional under this Chapter.

3. In case of any appointment of a resolution professional under sub-sections (4) of section 22, the interim resolution professional shall provide all the information, documents and records pertaining to the corporate debtor in his possession and knowledge to the resolution professional.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 47.
Discuss the duties of Resolution Professional.
Answer:
Section 25 sets out the duty of resolution professional to preserve and protect the assets of the corporate debtor, including the continued business operations of the corporate debtor and lays down the functions he may perform for the same. The resolution professional shall undertake the following actions:
(a) take immediate custody and control of all the assets of the corporate debtor, including the business records of the corporate debtor;
(b) represent and act on behalf of the corporate debtor with third parties, exercise rights for the benefit of the corporate debtor in judicial, quasi-judicial or arbitration proceedings,
(c) raise interim finances subject to the approval of the committee of creditors under section 28,
(d) appoint accountants, legal or other professionals in the manner as specified by Board,
(e) maintain an updated list of claims,
(f) convene and attend all meetings of the committee of creditors,
(g) prepare the information memorandum in accordance with section 29,
(h) invite prospective resolution applicants, who fulfil such criteria as may be laid down by him with the approval of committee of creditors, having regard to the complexity and scale of operations of the business of the corporate debtor and such other conditions as may be specified by the Board, to submit a resolution plan or plans.
(i) present all resolution plans at the meetings of the committee of creditors,
file application for avoidance of transactions in accordance with Chapter III, if any, and ‘
(j) such other actions as may be specified by the Board.

Question 48.
Write a note on committee creditors.
Answer:
Section 21 and 24 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 make provisions relating to the committee of creditors.
Section 21 deals with the constitution of committee of creditors while section 24 prescribes the modalities for the meeting of the committee of creditors. Section 28 of the Code lists out certain actions that may be taken by the resolution professional only with the prior approval of the committee of creditors by a vote of 66 per cent of the voting shares.
The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Second Amendment) Act, 2018 has added a new section 25A to provide for rights and duties of authorised representative of financial creditors.
1. The interim resolution professional shall after collation of all claims received against the corporate debtor and determination of the financial position of the corporate debtor, constitute a committee of creditors.

2. The committee of creditors shall comprise all financial creditors of the corporate debtor: Provided that a financial creditor or the authorised representative of the financial creditor referred to in sub-section (6) or sub-section (6A) or sub-section (5) of section 24, if it is a related party of the corporate debtor, shall not have any right of representation, participation or voting in a meeting of the committee of creditors.

3. Where the corporate debtor owes financial debts to two or more financial creditors as part of a consortium or agreement, each such financial creditor shall be part of the committee of creditors and their voting share shall be determined on the basis of the financial debts owed to them.

4. Where any person is a financial creditor as well as an operational creditor,
(a) such person shall be a financial creditor to the extent of the financial debt owed by the corporate debtor, and shall be included in the committee of creditors, with voting-share proportionate to the extent of financial debts owed to such creditor;
(b) such person shall be considered to be an operational creditor to the extent of the operational debt owed by the corporate debtor to such creditor.

5. Where an operational creditor has assigned or legally transferred any operational debt to a financial creditor, the assignee or transferee shall be considered as an operational creditor to the extent of such assignment or legal transfer.

6. Where the terms of the financial debt extended as part of a consortium arrangement or syndicated facility provide for a single trustee or agent to act for all financial creditors, each financial creditor may
(a) authorise the trustee or agent to act on his behalf in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share;
(b) represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share;
(c) appoint an insolvency professional (other than the resolution professional) at his own cost to represent himself in the committee of creditors to the extent of his voting share; or
(d) exercise his right to vote to the extent of his voting share with one or more financial creditors jointly or severally.
6A. A financial debt –
(a) is in the form of securities or deposits and the terms of the financial debt provide for appointment of a trustee or agent to act as authorised representative for all the financial creditors, such trustee or agent shall act on behalf of such financial creditors;
(b) is owed to a class of creditors exceeding the number as may be specified, other than the creditors covered under clause (a) or sub-section (6), the interim resolution professional shall make an application to the Adjudicating Authority along with the list of all financial creditors, containing the name of an insolvency professional, other than the interim resolution professional, to act as their authorised representative who shall be appointed by the Adjudicating Authority prior to the first meeting of the committee of creditors;
(c) is represented by a guardian, executor or administrator, such person shall act as authorised representative on behalf of such financial creditors, and such authorised representative under clause (a) or clause (b) or clause (c) shall attend the meetings of the committee of creditors, and vote on behalf of each financial creditor to the extent of his voting share.
6B. Remuneration to the authorised representative, shall be as per the terms of the financial debt or the relevant documentation and shall be part of the insolvency resolution process costs.

7. The Board may specify the manner of voting and the determining of the voting share in respect of financial debts covered under sub-sections (6) and (6A).

8. Save as otherwise provided in this Code, all decisions of the committee of creditors shall be taken by a vote of not less than fifty-one per cent, of voting share of the financial creditors.

9. The committee of creditors shall have the right to require the resolution professional to furnish any financial information in relation to the corporate debtor at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process.

10. The resolution professional shall make available any financial information so required by the committee of creditors under sub-section (9) within a period of seven days of such requisition.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 49.
Mention the modalities for the meeting of Committee of Creditors.
Answer:
Section 24 of the Code prescribes the following modalities for the meeting of the committee of creditors.
1. The members of the committee of creditors may meet in person or by such other electronic means as may be specified. [Section 24(1)].
2. All meetings of the committee of creditors shall be conducted by the resolution professional. [Section 24(2)].
3. The resolution professional shall give notice of each meeting of the committee of creditors to:
(a) members of committee of creditors, including the authorised representatives referred to in subsections (6) and (6A) of section 21 and sub-section (5),
(b) members of the suspended Board of Directors or the partners of the corporate persons, as the case may be,
(c) operational creditors or their representatives if the amount of their aggregate dues is not less than ten percent of the debt [Section 24(3)]
4. The directors, partners and one representative of operational creditors, as referred to in sub-section (3), may attend the meetings of committee of creditors, but shall not have any right to vote in such meetings. The absence of any such director, partner or representative of operational creditors, as the case may be, shall not invalidate proceedings of such meeting. [Section 24(4)].
5. Subject to sub-sections (6), (6A) and (6B) of section 21, any creditor who is a member of the committee of creditors may appoint an insolvency professional other than the resolution professional to represent such creditor in a meeting of the committee of creditors: Provided that the fees payable to such insolvency professional representing any individual creditor will be borne by such creditor. [Section 24(5)].
6. Each creditor shall vote in accordance with the voting share assigned to him based on the financial debts owed to such creditor. [Section 24(6)].
7. The resolution professional shall determine the voting share to be assigned to each creditor in the manner specified by the Board. [Section 24(7)].
8. The meetings of the committee of creditors shall be conducted in such manner as may be specified. [Section 24(8)]

Question 50.
What are the rights and duties of Authorised Representative of Financial Creditors?
Answer:
The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code has added a new section 25A to
provide for rights and duties of authorised representative of financial
creditors.
1. The authorised representative shall have the right to participate and vote in meetings of the committee of creditors on behalf of the financial creditor subject to prior voting instructions [Section 25A(1)].

2. It shall be the duty of the authorised representative to circulate the agenda and minutes of the meeting of the committee of creditors to the financial creditor he represents [Section 25A (2)].

3. The authorised representative shall not act against the interest of the financial creditor he represents and shall always act in accordance with their prior instructions [Section 25A (3)].

4. The authorised representative shall file with the committee of creditors any instructions received by way of physical or electronic means, from the financial creditor he represents, for voting in accordance therewith, to ensure that the appropriate voting instructions of the financial creditor he represents is correctly recorded by the interim resolution professional or resolution professional, as the case may be. [Section 25A(4)].

Question 51.
Discuss the provisions for replacement of Resolution Professional by Committee of Creditors?
Answer:
Section 27 provides that a resolution professional may be replaced at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process by the committee of creditors by a sixty-six percent majority of voting shares.
1. Where, at any time during the corporate insolvency resolution process, the committee or creditors is of the opinion that a resolution professional appointed under section 22 is required to be replaced, it may replace him with another resolution professional in the manner provided under this section.
2. The committee of creditors may, at a meeting, by a vote of sixty-six per cent of voting shares, resolve to replace the resolution professional appointed under section 22 with another resolution professional, subject to a written consent from the proposed resolution professional in the specified form.
3. The committee of creditors shall forward the name of the insolvency professional proposed by them to the Adjudicating Authority.
4. The Adjudicating Authority shall forward the name of the proposed resolution professional to the Board for its confirmation and a resolution professional shall be appointed in the same manner as laid down in section 16.
5. Where any disciplinary proceedings are pending against the proposed resolution professional under sub-section (3), the resolution professional appointed under section 22 shall continue till the appointment of another resolution professional under this section.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 52.
Discuss the function of preparation of information memorandum.
Answer:

  • Section 29 of the Code lays down the preparation of an information memorandum as one of the main functions of the resolution professional.
  • An information memorandum is envisaged to be prepared in order for the resolution applicants (market participants) to provide solutions for resolving the insolvency of the corporate debtor.
  • It provides that the resolution professional shall prepare an information memorandum in such form and manner containing such relevant information as may be specified by the Board for formulating a resolution plan.
  • It further provides that the resolution professional shall provide to the resolution applicant access to all relevant information in physical and electronic form, provided such resolution applicant undertakes:
    (a) to comply with provisions of law for the time being in force relating to confidentiality and insider trading,
    (b) to protect any intellectual property of the corporate debtor it may have access to, and
    (c) not to share relevant information with third parties unless clauses (a) and (b) of this sub-section are complied with.

Question 53.
State the provisions under Section 28 of the Code.
Answer:
Section 28 of the Code lists out certain actions that may be taken by the resolution professional only with the prior approval of the committee of creditors by a vote of 66 per cent of the voting shares.
The aim of this section is to secure consent of the committee of creditors for certain specific matters as without prior consent of creditors committee such actions shall be void. The resolution professional may also be liable to be replaced. Such actions are:
(a) raise any interim finance in excess of the amount as may be decided by the committee of creditors in their meeting;
(b) create any security interest over the assets of the corporate debtor;
(c) change the capital structure of the corporate debtor, including by way of issuance of additional securities, creating a new class of securities or buying back or redemption of issued securities in case the corporate debtor is a company;
(d) record any change in the ownership interest of the corporate debtor;
(e) give instructions to financial institutions maintaining accounts of the corporate debtor for a debit transaction from any such accounts in excess of the amount as may be decided by the committee of creditors in their meeting;
(f) undertake any related party transaction;
(g) amend any constitutional documents of the corporate debtor;
(h) delegate its authority to any other person;
(i) dispose of or permit the disposal of shares of any shareholder of the corporate debtor or their nominees to third parties;
(j) make any change in the management of the corporate debtor or its subsidiary;
(k) transfer rights or financial debts or operational debts under material contracts otherwise than in the ordinary course of business.

Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process - CS Professional Study Material

Question 54.
Explain the process of filing an application by financial creditor?
Answer:

  1. A financial creditor, either by itself or jointly, shall make an application for initiating the corporate insolvency resolution process against a corporate debtor under section 7 of the Code in Form 1, accompanied with documents and records required therein and as specified in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Resolution Process for Corporate Persons) Regulations, 2016.
  2. Where the applicant under sub-rule (1) is an assignee or transferee of a financial contract, the application shall be accompanied with a copy of the assignment or transfer agreement and other relevant documentation to demonstrate the assignment or transfer.
  3. The applicant shall serve a copy of the application to the registered office of the corporate debtor and to the Board, by registered post or speed post or by hand or by electronic means, before filing with the Adjudicating Authority.
  4. In case the application is made jointly by financial creditors, they may nominate one amongst them to act on their behalf.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 2 Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
Insolvency Professionals (IPs) are private persons, but are governed by Insolvency Regulator. Describe how the IPs are regulated? (June 2019, 6 marks)
Answer:
It is true to say that Insolvency professionals (IPs) are private persons, but are governed by Insolvency Regulator (Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India). The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides for IPs to act as intermediary in the insolvency resolution process. Insolvency professionals are a class of regulated but private professionals having minimum standards of professional and ethical conduct. Section 3(19) of the Code defines an ‘insolvency professional’ as a person enrolled under Section 206 of the Code with an insolvency professional agency as its member and registered with the Board as an insolvency professional under Section 207 of the Code.

Section 206 of the Code lays down that no person shall render his services as insolvency professional under this Code without being enrolled as a member of an insolvency professional agency and registered with the Board.

Section 207(1) of the Code further lays down that every insolvency professional shall, after obtaining the membership of any insolvency professional agency, register himself with the Board within such time, in such manner and on payment of such fee, as may be specified by regulations.

Section 207(2) of the Code empowers the IBBI to specify the categories of professionals or persons possessing such qualifications and experience in the field of finance, law, management, insolvency or such other field to act as insolvency professionals. The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India has framed the IBBI (Insolvency Professional) Regulations, 2016 to regulate the working of Insolvency Professionals. These regulations are amended from time to time by the IBBI. Section 208 of the Code provides for the functions and obligations of IPs during any insolvency resolution, fresh start, liquidation or bankruptcy process.

IPs are required to follow Code of conduct, there performance is monitored by IPA and IBBI and also they are subject to disciplinary action by IBBI and IPA. Thus, from the above discussion, it is very much clear that IPs though private professional, are regulated by the IBBI, the Insolvency Regulator.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
What is the purpose of enactment of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016? (Dec 2019, 3 marks)
Answer:
As per Preamble to the Insolvency and Bankruptcy, Code, 2016, the purpose of this Code is as under:
(a) To consolidate and amend the laws relating to reorganisation and insolvency resolution of corporate persons, partnership firms and individuals.
(b) To fix time periods for execution of the law in a time bound manner.
(c) To maximize the value of the assets of interested persons.
(d) To promote entrepreneurship.
(e) To increase availability of credit.
(f) To balance the interest of all the stakeholders including alteration in order of priority of payment of Government dues.
(g) To establish Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India as a regulatory body for Insolvency and Bankruptcy Law.

Question 3.
What shall be included in “Financial Information” as defined under IBC, 2016?” (Dec 2019, 4 marks)
Answer:
As per Section 3(13) of the Insolvency and bankruptcy Code, 2016, ‘financial information’, in relation to a person, means one or more of the following categories of information, namely:
(a) Records of debt of the person.
(b) Records of liabilities when the person is insolvent.
(c) Records of assets of the person over which security interest has been created.
(d) Records, if any, of instances of default by the person against any debt.
(e) Records of the Balance Sheet and Cash Flow Statements of the persons; and
(f) Such other information as may be specified.

Question 4.
One of the leading Bank granted credit facility to Invent Ltd. and on default in making repayment by the Company, the Bank filed an application for initiation Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP). Before the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), the Company argued that as its liabilities stood suspended pursuant to a relief order passed by Government of Maharashtra under Maharashtra Relief Undertaking (Special Provisions Act), 1958 (MRU Act) no amounts were due and payable by it to Bank and hence, the application for CIRP under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 (IBC, 2016) could not be admitted. Under the MRU Act, the State Government may take over management of undertaking and impose moratorium in the same manner as contained in IBC, 2016. Examine in the light of decided case, whether the CIRP application filed by the Bank under IBC, 2016 will prevail? (Dec 2020, 6 marks)
Answer:
In terms of Section 6 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 where any corporate debtor commits a default a financial creditor, an operational creditor or the corporate debtor itself may initiate Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (CIRP) in respect of such corporate debtor.
The given case have the similar facts as was in the case of Innoventive Industries Ltd. v. ICICI Bank Ltd., Civil Appeal Nos. 8337-8338 of 2017, decided by the Supreme Court of India. The case involved contradictory provisions in the Code and a state law of Maharashtra state, Maharashtra Relief Undertakings (Special Provisions) Act, 1958. This brought the two legislation on a collision course, for the simple reason that enforcement of one will hinder the enforcement of the other. The Code instead provides for taking over of an undertaking’s business by an ’Insolvency Professional’ through a committee of creditors. The appeal to the Supreme Court, hence involved two major questions. One was, whether the petitioner can seek relief under the Maharashtra Act at the cost of the Code. The second was, whether both the laws are repugnant to each other.
The Supreme Court held that even if the two legislations are framed on different entries of the concurrent list, the Central law will always prevail if it comes in conflict with the State law. The State law, therefore was held inoperable to the extent that it was in contradiction to the Code. In this case the Supreme Court has opined that the provisions of the Code will have supremacy over every other law, whenever and wherever any conflict arises. Hence the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code shall have an overriding effect over MRU Act.
The NCLT was right in admitting the bank’s application for CIRP, declared moratorium and appointed an Interim Resolution Professional

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Doctrine of Repugnancy? Where a law, earlier enacted by any State, is now contradictory to the provisions of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, then which law will prevail? Write your answer with the decided case law. (Dec 2021, 2 + 4 = 6 marks)
Answer:
Doctrine of Repugnancy means the conflict between two pieces of legislation which when applied to the same facts produce different results. Repugnancy arises when the provisions of two laws are so inconsistent and irreconcilable that it is impossible to do one without disobeying the other.
A plain reading of Article 254 of the Constitution of India gives an impression that if both central and state governments frame laws on a same entry under the concurrent list, only then the Central law will prevail.

Case of Innoventive Industries Ltd. v. ICICI Bank:
The reference of Doctrine of Repugnancy was taken by the Supreme Court in the above case.
Facts of the Case : ICICI Bank had taken Innoventive Industries Ltd. to NCLT for the recovery of its due as the company had defaulted on loan repayment. The NCLT had given a verdict in favour of the ICICI Bank, which Innoventive Industries challenged in the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT), where it received yet another setback. The company later filed an appeal in the Supreme Court seeking relief under the Maharashtra Act, which states that if a company is facing bankruptcy, protection needs to be provided for the employees.

Judgement: On a bare reading of the judgement, it seems that the case involved more adjudication on grounds related to Constitutional Law than on the Code. This case related to the first-ever application filed for initiating insolvency proceedings under the new Code. The Court was cognizant of the fact and hence wanted to settle the law so that all ‘Courts and Tribunals take notice of the paradigm shift in the Law’.
The case involved contradictory provisions in the Code and a state law of Maharashtra state, Maharashtra Relief Undertakings (Special Provisions) Act, 1958. This state law provided for overtaking of industries by the state by declaring them ‘relief undertakings’. Such overtaking can be done through government notifications to that effect under the Act. This is done to protect employment of the people who are working in such an undertaking.
The Code instead provides for overtaking of an undertaking’s business by an Insolvency Professional through a committee of creditors. In the instant case, insolvency application was filed against Innoventive Industries which later claimed to be a relief undertaking under the Maharashtra Act. This brought the two legislations on a collision course, for the simple reason that enforcement of one will hinder the enforcement of the other.
Supreme Court dealt with the constitutional law doctrine of repugnancy. This doctrine stems from the operation of Article 254 of the Constitution. As per this doctrine, whenever central and state laws are framed on the same subject and are contradictory to each other, it is the central law which prevails, and the state law is rendered void.
In the instant case, however, the laws even though coming in conflict with each other, were framed under different entries of the concurrent list. This involved adjudication by the Supreme Court on this point. The National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) had ruled that Innoventive Industries cannot claim any relief under Maharashtra Act. It also decided that there is no repugnancy between the two laws, as they operate in different fields.

The appeal to the Supreme Court, hence involved two major questions. One was, whether the petitioner can seek relief under the Maharashtra Act at the cost of the Code. The second was, whether both the laws are repugnant to each other.
Invoking a lot of international cases, especially of the Commonwealth countries and previous judgments of the Supreme Court, the bench ruled that there is indeed repugnancy between the two laws. The court held that even if the two legislations are framed on different entries of the concurrent list, the Central law will always prevail if it comes in conflict with the State law. The State law, therefore, was held inoperable to the extent that it was in contradiction to the Code.
The court delved into great detail of the provisions of the Code and held it to be intended as an ‘exhaustive legislation by the Parliament, to cover the whole field of its operation. In such instances involving an exhaustive law, even though the State law may not be in strict violation of the Code, it will even then be rendered inoperative to give way to implement the exhaustive law on the point.
With respect to the Code, being acknowledged as an exhaustive law on the point is a very progressive step. It also, now brings in more clarity that the provisions of the Code will have supremacy over every other law, whenever and wherever any conflict arises.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 6.
Discuss in brief the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Answer:

  • Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) is a consolidated legislation providing for insolvency resolution prbcess of individuals, partnership firms, Limited Liability Partnerships and Corporate.
  • It offers a uniform, comprehensive insolvency legislation encompassing all companies, partnerships and individuals.
  • It facilitates time-bound process for insolvency resolution and liquidation and proposes to repeal and amend a number of legislations.
  • It also introduced new regulator “Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India” (The Board).
  • The adjudication process in relation to Corporates and LLPs would be under National Company Law Tribunal and in relation to individuals and partnerships under Debt Recovery Tribunal.

Question 7.
How is insolvency different from Bankruptcy?
Answer:

  • Generally, the words “Insolvency” and “Bankruptcy” are used interchangeably but there is a marked distinction between the two. Insolvency and bankruptcy are not synonymous.
  • The term “insolvency” denotes the state of one whose assets are insufficient to pay his debts; or his general inability to pay his debts. The term “insolvency” is used in a restricted sense to express the inability of a party to pay his debts as they become due in the ordinary course of business.
  • The word “bankruptcy” denotes a legal status of a person or an entity who cannot repay debts to creditors.
  • While insolvency is the inability of debtors to repay their debts, the bankruptcy, on the other hand, is a formal declaration of insolvency in accordance with law of the land.
  • Insolvency describes a situation where the debtor is unable to meet his/her obligations and bankruptcy occurs when a court determines insolvency, and gives legal orders for it to be resolved.
  • Thus, insolvency is a state and bankruptcy is conclusion.
  • The term insolvency is used -for individuals as well as organisations/corporates. If insolvency is not resolved, it leads to bankruptcy in case of individuals and liquidation in case of corporates.

Question 8.
Define Bankrupt and bankrupt as per the IBC.
Answer:
Section 79(4) of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 defines the term “bankruptcy” as the state of being bankrupt.
According to Section 79(3) of the Code, “bankrupt” means (a) a debtor who has been adjudged as bankrupt by a bankruptcy order under section 126;
(b) each of the partners of a firm, where a bankruptcy order under section 126 has been made against a firm; or (c) any person adjudged as an undischarged insolvent.

Question 9.
Discuss the history of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Answer:

  • The Government of India Set-up in 1981, a Committee of Experts under the Chairmanship of Shri T. Tiwari to examine the matter and recommend suitable remedies therefore.
  • Based on the recommendations of the Committee, the Government of India enacted a special legislation namely, the Sick Industrial Companies Act, 1985 (SICA).
  • The main objective of SICA was to determine sickness and expedite the revival of potentially viable units or closure of unviable units.
  • It was expected that by revival, idle investments in sick units will become productive and by closure, the locked-up investments in unviable units would get released for productive use elsewhere.
  • The Act was enacted with a view to secure the timely detection of sick and potential sick companies owning industrial undertakings, the speedy determination by a body of experts of the preventive, ameliorative, remedial and other measures which need to be taken with respect to such companies and the expeditious enforcement of the measures so determined and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.
  • Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction (BIFR) was set up in January, 1987 and got functional with effect from 15th May 1987.
  • The Appellate Authority for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction (AAIFR) was constituted in April 1987.
  • Government companies were brought underthe purview of SICA in 1991 when extensive changes were made in the Act including, inter-alia, changes in the criteria for determining industrial sickness.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 10.
What was the major constraints of SICA?
Answer:
The major constraint of the SICA was that it was applicable only to sick industrial companies keeping away other companies which were in trading, service or other activities. The Act was modified in 1991 to include within its purview the Government companies by Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Amendment Act, 1991 which came into force w.e.f. 28.12.91. However, the overall experience was not satisfactory because of various factors including non-applicability of SICA to non-industrial companies and small/ancillary companies, misuse of immunity provided under Section 22 of SICA, etc. In view of this, the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 was notified on the May 28, 2016. At present the SICA Act, 1985 is repealed and the company in respect of which such appeal or reference or inquiry stands abated in BIFR and AAIFR may make reference to NCLT under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016.

Question 11.
Which Acts were present before the enactment of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
Answer:

  • The Presidency Towns Insolvency Act, 1909
  • Provisional Insolvency Act, 1920
  • Indian Partnership Act, 1932
  • The Companies Act, 1956
  • The Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985 (SICA)
  • The Recovery of Debts due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act, 1993 (RDDBFI Act)
  • The Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Securities Interest Act, 2002 (SARFAESI Act, 2002)
  • The Companies Act, 2013

Question 12.
What were the objectives of the Bankruptcy Law Reforms Committee?
Answer:
The Bankruptcy Law Reforms Committee submitted its report to the Finance Ministry on November 4, 2015. The objectives of the Committee were to resolve insolvency with:

  1. lesser time involved,
  2. lesser loss in recovery, and
  3. higher levels of debt financing across instruments.

Question 13.
Discuss in detail various government committees on bankruptcy reforms.
Answer:

  1. In 1964, Third Law Commission was established in 1961 under the Chairmanship of Justice J L Kapur. It submitted 26th Law Commission Report in 1964 proposing amendments to the Provincial Insolvency Act, 1920.
  2. In 1981, as per the recommendations of the Tiwari Committee, the Government of India enacted SICA in order to provide for timely detection of sickness in industrial companies and for expeditious determination of preventive and remedial measures.
  3. In 1991, as per Narasimham Committee I, The government enacted Recovery of Debts Due to Banks and Financial Institutions (RDDBFI) Act, 1993.
  4. In 1998, Narasimham Committee II The committee’s recommendations led to the enactment of the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act (SARFAESI), 2002.
  5. In 1999, Justice Eradi Committee Recommended setting up of a National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and proposed repeal of SICA. 6 2001 N L Mitra Committee Proposed a comprehensive bankruptcy code.
  6. In 2005, J J Irani Committee proposed significant changes to make the restructuring and liquidation process speedier, efficient and effective and accordingly amendments were made to (RDDBFI) Act, 1993 and (SARFAESI), 2002.
  7. In 2008 ,Raghuram Rajan Committee proposed improvements to credit infrastructure.
  8. In 2013 Financial Sector Legislative Reforms Commission recommended changes in Indian Financial Sector.
  9. In 2014 Bankruptcy Law Reforms Committee (BLRC) reviewed the existing bankruptcy and insolvency framework in the country and proposed the enactment of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code as a uniform and comprehensive legislation on the subject.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 14.
What was the need for a new law in the form of “Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016”?
Answer:

  • Before the enactment of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, there was no single law in the country to deal with insolvency and bankruptcy.
  • There were multiple overlapping laws and adjudicating forums dealing with financial failure and insolvency of companies and individuals in India.
  • The framework for insolvency and bankruptcy was inadequate, ineffective and resulted in undue delays in resolution.
  • The legal and institutional framework did not aid lenders in effective and timely recovery or restructuring of defaulted assets and causes undue strain on the Indian credit system.
  • Prior to the enactment of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, the provisions relating to insolvency and bankruptcy for companies were made in the Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985, the Recovery of Debt Due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act, 1993, the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002 and the Companies Act, 2013.
  • The liquidation of companies was handled under various laws and different authorities such as High Court, and Debt Recovery Tribunal had overlapping jurisdiction which was adversely affecting the debt recovery process.
  • The objective of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code is to consolidate and amend the laws relating to reorganization and insolvency resolution of corporate persons, partnership firms and individuals in a time bound manner.
  • An effective legal framework for timely resolution of insolvency and bankruptcy will not only encourage entrepreneurship but will also improve Ease of Doing Business, and facilitate more investments leading to higher economic growth and development.

Question 15.
Explain Section 2 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
Answer:
Section 2 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 as amended vide the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Amendment) Act, 2018 provides that the provisions of the Code shall apply to –
(a) any company incorporated under the Companies Act, 2013 or under any previous company law
(b) any other company governed by any special Act for the time being in force
(c) any Limited Liability Partnership incorporated under the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008
(d) such other body incorporated under any law for the time being in force, as the Central Government may, by notification, specify in this behalf
(e) personal guarantors to corporate debtors
(f) partnership firms and proprietorship firms; and
(g) individuals, otherthan persons referred to in clause (e) in relation to their insolvency, liquidation, voluntary liquidation or bankruptcy, as the case may be.

Question 16.
What are the key objectives of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
Answer:
Key objectives of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 are as under:

  • To consolidate and amend the laws relating to reorganisation and insolvency resolution of corporate persons, partnership firms and individuals
  • To provide for a time bound insolvency resolution mechanism
  • To ensure maximisation of value of assets
  • To promote entrepreneurship
  • To increase availability of credit
  • To balance the interests of all the stakeholders including alteration in the order of priority of payment of Government dues and
  • To establish an Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India as a regulatory body. To provide procedure for connected and incidental matters.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 17.
What are the various parts in which Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 is divided?
Answer:
Part I Preliminary (Sections 1 to 3)
Part II Insolvency Resolution and Liquidation for Corporate Persons

  • Chapter I Preliminary (Sections 4 to 5)
  • Chapter II Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (Sections 6 to 32)
  • Chapter III Liquidation Process (Sections 33 to 54)
  • Chapter IV Fast Track Corporate Insolvency Resolution Process (Sections 55 to 58)
  • Chapter V Voluntary Liquidation of Corporate Persons (Section 59)
  • Chapter VI Adjudicating Authority for Corporate Persons (Sections 60 to 67)
  • Chapter VII Offences and Penalties (Sections 68 to 77)

Part III Insolvency Resolution and Bankruptcy for Individuals and Partnership Firms

  • Chapter I Preliminary (Sections 78 to 79)
  • Chapter II Fresh Start Process (Sections 80 to 93)
  • Chapter III Insolvency Resolution Process (Sections 94 to 120)
  • Chapter IV Bankruptcy Order for Individuals and Partnership Finns (Sections 121 to 148)
  • Chapter V Administration and Distribution of the Estate of the Bankrupt (Sections 149 to 178)
  • Chapter VI Adjudicating Authority for Individuals and Partnership Firms (Sections 179 to 187)

Part IV Regulation of Insolvency Professionals, Agencies and Information Utilities

  • Chapter I The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Sections 188 to 195)
  • Chapter II Powers and Functions of the Board (Sections 196 to 198)
  • Chapter III Insolvency Professional Agencies (Sections 199 to 205)
  • Chapter IV Insolvency Professionals (Sections 206 to 208)
  • Chapter V Information Utilities (Sections 209 to 216)
  • Chapter VI Inspection and Investigation (Sections 217 to 220)
  • Chapter VII Finance, Accounts and Audit (Sections 221 to 223)
  • Part V Miscellaneous (Sections 224 to 255)

Question 18.
Discuss in detail the salient features of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016?
Answer:
The salient features of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 are as under:
1. The Insolvency and bankruptcy Code, 2016 offers a uniform, comprehensive insolvency legislation covering all companies, partnerships and individuals. Financial firms are not included in the ambit of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.

2. To ensure a formal and time bound insolvency resolution process, the Code creates a new institutional framework consisting of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI), Adjudicating Authorities (AAs), Insolvency Professionals (IPs), Insolvency Professional Agencies (IPAs) and Information Utilities (lUs).

3. The Code provides for Insolvency Professionals (IPs), a class of regulated but private professionals having minimum standards of professional and ethical conduct, to act as intermediary in the insolvency resolution process. Insolvency Professional Agencies are designated to regulate Insolvency Professionals. These agencies conduct examinations to enrol Insolvency Professionals and enforce a code of conduct for their functioning. Following are the designated Insolvency Professional Agencies (IPAs) established under the Code:
The Indian Institute of Insolvency Professionals of ICAI, ICSI Institute of Insolvency Professionals and Insolvency Professional Agency of Institute of Cost Accountants of India.

4. The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India has framed the IBBI (Insolvency Professional) Regulations, 2016 to regulate the working of Insolvency Professionals. These regulations are amended from time to time by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India.

5. While the Insolvency professionals assist in the insolvency resolution proceedings envisaged in the Code, the Information Utilities, on the other hand, collect, collate, authenticate and disseminate financial information. The purpose of such collection, collation, authentication and dissemination of financial information of debtors in centralised electronic databases is to facilitation swift decision-making in the resolution proceedings.

6. The Code provides for the constitution of a new insolvency regulator i.e., the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI). Its role includes overseeing the functioning of insolvency intermediaries i.e., insolvency professionals, insolvency professional agencies and information utilities as well as regulating the insolvency process. The members of the Board includes representatives from the central government as well as the Reserve Bank of India. The Board is empowered to frame and implement rules to regulate the profession as well as processes envisaged in the Code.

7. The Code proposes two tribunals to adjudicate insolvency resolution cases. In the case of insolvency of companies and Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs), the adjudication authority is the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), while the cases involving individuals and partnership firms are handled by the Debts Recovery Tribunals (DRTs).

8. To initiate an insolvency process for corporate debtors, the default should be at least INR 100,000. This limit may be increased by the Government up to INR 10,000,000. For individuals and unlimited partnerships, the minimum default amount is INR 1000. The Government may revise the minimum amount of default to a higher threshold.

9. In resolution process for corporate persons, the Code proposes two independent stages: (i) Insolvency Resolution Process, during which the creditors assess the viability of debtor’s business and the options for its rescue and revival, (ii) Liquidation, in case the insolvency resolution process fails or financial creditors decide to wind up and distribute the assets of the debtor.

10. The Code envisages two distinct processes in case of Insolvency Resolution Process (IRP) for Individuals/Unlimited Partnerships (i) Fresh Start Process (ii) Insolvency Resolution.

11. The Code provides a Fresh Start Process for individuals under which they will be eligible for a prescribed debt waiver. The individual will be eligible for the waiver subject to certain limits prescribed under the Code. Under the fresh start process, eligible debtors can apply to the Debt Recovery Tribunal (DRT) for discharge from certain debts not exceeding a specified threshold, allowing them to start afresh.

12. A financial creditor (for a defaulted financial debt) or an operational creditor (for an unpaid operational debt) can initiate an Insolvency Resolution Process (IRP) against a corporate debtor. The defaulting corporate debtor, its shareholders or employees, may also initiate voluntary insolvency proceedings.

13. The Code provides for a time bound Insolvency Resolution Process for companies and individuals.

14. The Code makes significant changes in the priority of claims for distribution of liquidation proceeds. In case of liquidation, the assets will be distributed in the following order:

  • fees of insolvency professional and costs related to the resolution process
  • workmen’s dues for the preceding 24 months and secured creditors
  • employee wages
  • unsecured creditors
  • government dues and remaining secured creditors (any remaining debt if they enforce their collateral)
  • any remaining debt, and
  • shareholders.

Before the enactment of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, the Government dues were immediately below the claims of secured creditors and workmen in order of priority. Now the Central and State Government’s dues stand below the claims of secured creditors, workmen dues, employee dues and other unsecured financial creditors.

15. The Code provides for the creation of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Fund. Section 224 of the Code provides that the following amounts shall be credited to the fund
(a) the grants made by the Central Government for the purposes of the Fund
(b) the amount deposited by persons as contribution to the Fund
(c) the amount received in the Fund from any other source; and
(d) the interest or other income received out of the investment made from the Fund.

16. In case of cross-border insolvency proceedings, the central government may enter into bilateral agreements and reciprocal arrangements with other countries to enforce provisions of the Code.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 19.
Write a note on Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI)?
Answer:

  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 provides forthe constitution of an insolvency regulator i.e., the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI).
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India was established on 1st October 2016.
  • It is a unique regulator which regulates a profession as well as processes under the Code.
  • Its role includes overseeing the functioning of insolvency intermediaries i.e., insolvency professionals, insolvency professional agencies and information utilities.
  • The Board is responsible for implementation of the Code that consolidates and amends the laws relating to insolvency resolution of corporate persons, partnership firms and individuals in a time bound manner.
  • The Board is empowered to frame and enforce rules for various processes under the Code, namely, corporate insolvency resolution, corporate liquidation, individual insolvency resolution and individual bankruptcy.
  • Section 188(2) of the Code provides that the Board shall be a body corporate having perpetual succession and a common seal, with power, subject to the provisions of this Code, to acquire, hold and dispose of property, both movable and immovable, and to contract, and shall, by the said name, sue or be sued.
  • As per section 189(4), the term of office of the Chairperson and members (other than ex officio members) shall be five years or till they attain the age of sixty-five years, whichever is earlier, and they shall be eligible for reappointment.

Question 20.
Write a note on powers and functions of Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI).
Answer:
Section 196(1) of the Code (as amended by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (Second Amendment) Act, 2018) provides that the Board shall, subject to the general direction of the Central Government, perform all or any of the following functions namely:
(a) Register insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities and renew, withdraw, suspend or cancel such registrations.
(aa) promote the development of, and regulate, the working and practices of, insolvency professionals, insolvency professional agencies and information utilities and other institutions, in furtherance of the purposes of this Code.
(b) Specify the minimum eligibility requirements for registration of insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities.
(c) Levy fee or other charges for carrying out the purposes of this Code, including fee for registration and renewal of insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities.
(d) Specify by regulations standards for the functioning of insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities.
(e) Lay down by regulations the minimum curriculum for the examination of the insolvency professionals for their enrolment as members of the insolvency professional agencies.
(f) Carry out inspections and investigations on insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities and pass such orders as may be required for compliance of the provisions of this Code and the regulations issued hereunder.
(g) Monitor the performance of insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities and pass any directions as may be required for compliance of the provisions of this Code and the regulations issued hereunder.
(h) Call for any information and records from the insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities.
(i) Publish such information, data, research studies and other information as may be specified by regulations.
(j) Specify by regulations the manner of collecting and storing data by the information utilities and for providing access to such data.
(k) Collect and maintain records relating to insolvency and bankruptcy cases and disseminate information relating to such cases.
(l) Constitute such committees as may be required including in particular the committees laid down in Section 197.
(m) Promote transparency and best practices in its governance.
(n) Maintain websites and such other universally accessible repositories of electronic information as may be necessary.
(o) Enter into memorandum of understanding with any other statutory authorities
(p) Issue necessary guidelines to the insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities.
(q) Specify mechanism for redressal of grievances against insolvency professionals, insolvency professional agencies and information utilities and pass orders relating to complaints filed against the aforesaid for compliance of the provisions of this Code and the regulations issued hereunder.
(r) Conduct periodic study, research and audit the functioning and performance of to the insolvency professional agencies, insolvency professionals and information utilities at such intervals as may be specified by the Board.
(s) Specify mechanisms for issuing regulations, including the conduct of public consultation processes before notification of any regulations.
(t) Make regulations and guidelines on matters relating to insolvency and bankruptcy as may be required under this Code, including mechanism for time bound disposal of the assets of the corporate debtor or debtor.
(u) Perform such other functions as may be prescribed.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 21.
Write a note on Insolvency Professionals (IPs).
Answer:

  • The Code provides for Insolvency Professionals (IPs) to act as intermediary in the insolvency resolution process.
  • Insolvency professionals are a class of regulated but private professionals having minimum standards of professional and ethical conduct.
  • Section 3(19) of the Code defines an “insolvency professional” as a person enrolled under section 206 with an insolvency professional agency as its member and registered with the Board as an insolvency professional under section 207.
  • An insolvency professional plays a very important role under the Code. He acts as a “resolution professional” in the corporate insolvency resolution process (specified in Part II of the Code which deals with corporate persons) as well as a “resolution professional” under Part III of the (which deals with Insolvency Resolution and Bankruptcy for Individuals and Partnership Firms) for conducting the fresh start process or insolvency resolution process.
  • An insolvency professional also acts as a liquidator in accordance with the provisions of Part II as well as a “bankruptcy trustee” for the estate of the bankrupt under section 125 in Part III of the Code.

Question 22.
Explain the provisions related to enrolment and registration of insolvency professionals.
Answer:

  • Section 206 lays down that no person shall render his services as insolvency professional under this Code without being enrolled as a member of an insolvency professional agency and registered with the Board.
  • Section 207(1) further lays down that every insolvency professional shall, after obtaining the membership of any insolvency professional agency, register himself with the Board within such time, in such manner and on payment of such fee, as may be specified by regulations.
  • Section 207(2) empowers the IBBI to specify the categories of professionals or persons possessing such qualifications and experience in the field of finance, law, management, insolvency or such other field to act as insolvency professionals.
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India has framed the IBBI (Insolvency Professional) Regulations, 2016 to regulate the working of Insolvency Professionals. These regulations are amended from time to time by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India.

Question 23.
State the functions and obligations of insolvency professionals.
Answer:
Section 208(1) of the Code provides that where any insolvency resolution, fresh start, liquidation or bankruptcy process has been initiated, it shall be the function of an insolvency professional to take such actions as may be necessary, in the following matters, namely:
(a) a fresh start order process under Chapter II of Part III
(b) individual insolvency resolution process under Chapter III of Part III
(c) corporate insolvency resolution process under Chapter II of Part II
(d) individual bankruptcy process under Chapter IV of Part III; and
(e) liquidation of a corporate debtor firm under Chapter III of Part II.

Section 208(2) mandates that every insolvency professional shall abide by the following code of conduct-
(a) to take reasonable care and diligence while performing his duties
(b) to comply with all requirements and terms and conditions specified in the bye-laws of the insolvency professional agency of which he is a member
(c) to allow the insolvency professional agency to inspect his records
(d) to submit a copy of the records of every proceeding before the Adjudicating Authority to the Board as well as to the insolvency professional agency of which he is a member; and
(e) to perform his functions in such manner and subject to such conditions as may be specified.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 24.
Write a note on Insolvency Professional Agencies. State its functions.
Answer:

  • Section 3(20) of the Code defines “insolvency professional agency” as any person registered with the Board under section 201 as an insolvency professional agency.
  • Insolvency Professional Agencies are designated to regulate Insolvency Professionals.
  • These agencies conduct examinations to enroll Insolvency Professionals and enforce a code of conduct for their functioning.
  • In exercise of powers conferred by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016, the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI) has framed the following regulations to regulate the working of Insolvency Professional Agencies (IPAs):
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Model Bye-Laws and Governing Board of Insolvency Professional Agencies) Regulations, 2016 and
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (Insolvency Professional Agencies) Regulations, 2016.
  • Following are the Insolvency Professional Agencies (IPAs) designated under the Code:
  • The Indian Institute of Insolvency Professionals of ICAI
  • ICSI Institute of Insolvency Professionals and
  • Insolvency Professional Agency of Institute of Cost Accountants of India.

Question 25.
Write a note on functions of Insolvency Professional Agencies.
Answer:
According to Section 204 of the Code, an insolvency professional agency performs the following functions, namely:
(a) grant membership to persons who fulfil all requirements set out in its byelaws on payment of membership fee
(b) lay down standards of professional conduct for its members
(c) monitor the performance of its members
(d) safeguard the rights, privileges and interests of insolvency professionals who are its members
(e) suspend or cancel the membership of insolvency professionals who are its members on the grounds set out in its bye-laws
(f) redress the grievances of consumers against insolvency professionals who are its members; and
(g) publish information about its functions, list of its members, performance of its members and such other information as may be specified by regulations.

Question 26.
Explain the provisions regarding the adjudicating authority for Insolvency Resolution.
Answer:
National Company Law Tribunal is constituted as the adjudicating authority for insolvency resolution and liquidation of corporate persons as per Section 5 (1) of the Code. NCLT is formed under section 408 of the Companies Act, 2013.
Section 60(5) of the Code further provides that the National Company Law Tribunal shall have jurisdiction to entertain or dispose of –
(a) any application or proceeding by or against the corporate debtor or corporate person
(b) any claim made by or against the corporate debtor or corporate person, including claims by or against any of its subsidiaries situated in India; and
(c) any question of priorities or any question of law or facts, arising out of or in relation to the insolvency resolution or liquidation proceedings of the corporate debtor or corporate person under this Code.
As per Section 63 of the Code, no civil court or authority shall have jurisdiction to entertain any suit or proceedings in respect of any matter on which National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) or the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) has jurisdiction under this Code.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 27.
Discuss the “Adjudicating Authority” for insolvency resolution and bankruptcy for individuals and partnership firms.
Answer:
Section 79(1) of the Code provides that the “Adjudicating Authority” for insolvency resolution and bankruptcy for individuals and partnership firms is the Debt Recovery Tribunal constituted under sub-section (1) of section 3 of the Recovery of Debts Due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act, 1993.
Section 179(1) of the Code provides that subject to the provisions of section 60, the Adjudicating Authority, in relation to insolvency matters of individuals and partnership firms shall be the Debt Recovery Tribunal having territorial jurisdiction over the place where the individual debtor actually and voluntarily resides or carries on business or personally works for gain and can entertain an application under this Code regarding such person.
Section 179(2) of the Code further provides that the Debt Recovery Tribunal shall, have jurisdiction to entertain or dispose of –
(a) any suit or proceeding by or against the individual debtor
(b) any claim made by or against the individual debtor
(c) any question of priorities or any other question whether of law or facts, arising out of or in relation to insolvency and bankruptcy of the individual debtor or firm under this Code.
Section 180 of the Code provides that no civil court or authority shall have jurisdiction to entertain any suit or proceedings in respect of any matter on which the Debt Recovery Tribunal or the Debt Recovery Appellate Tribunal has jurisdiction under this Code.

Question 28.
Discuss the provisions related to appeal against NCLT and DRT.
Answer:
The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code proposes two tribunals to adjudicate insolvency resolution cases. In the case of insolvency of companies and Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs), the adjudication authority is the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), while the cases involving individuals and partnership firms are handled by the Debts Recovery Tribunals (DRTs). Appeals from NCLT orders lie to the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) and thereafter to the Supreme Court of India. For individuals and other persons, the adjudicating authority is the DRT. Appeals from DRT orders lie to the Debt Recovery Appellate Tribunal (DRAT) and thereafter to the Supreme Court.

Question 29.
Define “Information Utility”?
Answer:

  • Section 3(21) of the Code defines an “information utility” as a person who is registered with the Board as an information utility under section 210.
  • The Insolvency professionals assist in the insolvency resolution proceedings envisaged in the Code, the Information Utility, on the other hand, collect, collate, authenticate and disseminate financial information.
  • The purpose of such collection, collation, authentication and dissemination financial information of debtors is to facilitation swift decision making in the resolution proceedings.
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India oversees the functioning of such information utilities.
  • The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India has framed the IBBI (Information Utilities) Regulations, 2017. These regulations are amended from time to time by the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India.

Question 30.
Describe the obligations of information utility.
Answer:
Section 214 describes the obligations of information utility:
(a) create and store financial information in a universally accessible format;
(b) accept electronic submissions of financial information from persons who are under obligations to submit financial information under sub-section (1) of section 215, in such form and manner as may be specified by regulations
(c) accept, in specified form and manner, electronic submissions of financial information from persons who intend to submit such information;
(d) meet such minimum service quality standards as may be specified by regulations
(e) get the information received from various persons authenticated by all concerned parties before storing such information
(f) provide access to the financial information stored by it to any person who intends to access such information in such manner as may be specified by regulations
(g) publish such statistical information as may be specified by regulations;
(h) have interoperability with other information utilities.

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

Question 31.
Define the term “Financial Service”.
Answer:
“Financial Service” includes any of the following services, namely-
(a) accepting of deposits;
(b) safeguarding and administering assets consisting of financial products, belonging to another person, or agreeing to do so;
(c) effecting contracts of insurance;
(d) offering, managing or agreeing to manage assets consisting of financial products belonging to another person;
(e) rendering or agreeing, for consideration, to render advice on or soliciting for the purposes of –
(i) buying, selling, or subscribing to, a financial product;
(ii) availing a financial service; or
(iii) exercising any right associated with a financial product or financial service;
(f) establishing or operating an investment scheme;
(g) maintaining or transferring records of ownership of a financial product;
(h) underwriting the issuance or subscription of a financial product; or
(i) selling, providing, or issuing stored value or payment instruments or providing payment services [Section 3(16)].

Question 32.
Define the following as per the Code.
Answer:
“Board”: the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India established under Sub section (1) of section 188 [Section 3(1)]

“Bye-laws”: the bye-laws made by the insolvency professional agency under section 205 [Section 3(3)].

“Claim”:
(a) a right to payment, whether or not such right is reduced to judgment, fixed, disputed, undisputed, legal, equitable, secured or unsecured;
(b) right to remedy for breach of contract under any law for the time being in force, if such breach gives rise to a right to payment, whether or not such right is reduced to judgment, fixed, matured, unmatured, disputed, undisputed, secured or unsecured [Section 3(6)].

“Charge”: an interest or lien created on the property or assets of any person or any of its undertakings or both, as the case may be, as security and includes a mortgage [Section 3(4)].

“Corporate Person”: a company as defined in clause (20) of section 2 of the Companies Act, 2013, a limited liability partnership, as defined in clause (n) of sub-section (1) of section 2 of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008, or any other person incorporated with limited liability under any law for the time being in force but shall not include any financial service provider [Section 3(7)].

“Corporate Debtor”: person who owes a debt to any person [Section 3(8)].

“Core Services”: services rendered by an information utility for
(a) accepting electronic submission of financial information in such form and manner as may be specified;
(b) safe and accurate recording of financial information;
(c) authenticating and verifying the financial information submitted by a person; and
(d) providing access to information stored with the information utility to persons as may be specified [Section 3(9)].

Creditor: any person to whom a debt is owed and includes a financial creditor, an operational creditor, a secured creditor, an unsecured creditor and a decree holder [Section 3(10)].

“Debt”: a liability or obligation in respect of a claim which is due from any person and includes a financial debt and operational debt [Section 3(11)].

“Default”: non-payment of debt when whole or any part or instalment of the amount of debt has become due and payable and is not paid by the debtor or the corporate debtor, as the case may be [Section 3(12)].

Introduction to Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code - CS Professional Study Material

“Financial Information”:
(a) records of the debt of the person;
(b) records of liabilities when the person is solvent;
(c) records of assets of person over which security interest has been created;
(d) records, if any, of instances of default by the person against any debt;
(e) records of the balance sheet and cash-flow statements of the person; and
(f) such other information as may be specified [Section 3(13)].

“Financial Institution”:
(a) a scheduled bank;
(b) financial institution as defined in section 45-I of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934;
(c) public financial institution as defined in clause (72) of section 2 of the Companies Act, 2013; and
(d) such other institution as the Central Government may by notification specify as a financial institution [Section 3(14)].

“Financial Product”:
securities, contracts of insurance, deposits, credit arrangements including loans and advances by banks and financial institutions, retirement benefit plans, small savings instruments, foreign currency contracts other than contracts to exchange one currency (whether Indian or not) for another which are to be settled immediately, or any other instrument as may be prescribed [Section 3(15)].

Financial Service Provider: a person engaged in the business of providing financial services in terms of authorisation issued or registration granted by a financial sector regulator [Section 3(17)].

“Financial Sector Regulator”: “Financial Sector Regulator” means an authority or body constituted under any law for the time being in force to regulate services or transactions of financial sector and includes the Reserve Bank of India, the Securities and Exchange Board of India, the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India, the Pension Fund Regulatory Authority and such other regulatory authorities as may be notified by the Central Government [Section 3(18)1

“Security Interest”: Right, title or interest or a claim to property, created in favour of, or provided for a secured creditor by a transaction which secures payment or performance of an obligation and includes mortgage, charge, hypothecation, assignment and encumbrance or any other agreement or arrangement securing payment or performance of any obligation of any person: Provided that security interest shall not include a performance guarantee; [Section 3(31)]

“Insolvency Resolution Process Costs”:
(a) the amount of any interim finance and the costs incurred in raising such finance;
(b) the fees payable to any person acting as a resolution professional;
(c) any costs incurred by the resolution professional in running the business of the corporate debtor as a going concern;
(d) any costs incurred at the expense of the Government to facilitate the insolvency resolution process; and
(e) any other costs as may be specified by the Board [Section 5(13)].

“Bankrupt”:
(a) a debtor who has been adjudged as bankrupt by a bankruptcy order under section 126;
(b) each of the partners of a firm, where a bankruptcy order under section 126 has been made against a firm; or
(c) any person adjudged as an undischarged insolvent [Section 79(3)].

“Resolution Applicant”:
Any person, who individually or jointly with any other person, submits a resolution plan to the resolution professional pursuant to the invitation made under clause (h) of sub section (2) of section 25 [Section 5(25)].

“Related Party”:
(a) a person who is a relative of the individual or a relative of the spouse of the individual;
(b) a partner of a limited liability partnership, ora limited liability partnership or a partnership firm, in which the individual is a partner;
(c) a person who is a trustee of a trust in which the beneficiary of the trust includes the individual, or the terms of the trust confers a power on the trustee which may be exercised for the benefit of the individual;
(d) a private company in which the individual is a director and holds along with his relatives, more than two per cent, of its share capital;
(e) a public company in which the individual is a director and holds along with relatives, more than two per cent, of its paid-up share capital;
(f) a body corporate whose board of directors, managing director or manager, in the ordinary course of business, acts on the advice, directions or instructions of the individual;
(g) a limited liability partnership or a partnership firm whose partners or employees in the ordinary course of business, act on the advice, directions or instructions of the individual;
(h) a person on whose advice, directions or instructions, the individual is accustomed to act;
(i) a company, where the individual or the individual along with its related party, own more than fifty per cent, of the share capital of the company or controls the appointment of the board of directors of the company.

“Associate” of the debtor:
(a) a person who belongs to the immediate family of the debtor;
(b) a person who is a relative of the debtor or a relative of the spouse of the debtor;
(c) a person who is in partnership with the debtor;
(d) a person who is a spouse or a relative of any person with whom the debtor is in partnership;
(e) a person who is employer of the debtor or employee of the debtor;
(f) a person who is a trustee of a trust in which the beneficiaries of the trust include a debtor, or the terms of the trust confer a power on the trustee which may be exercised for the benefit of the debtor; and
(g) a company, where the debtor or the debtor along with his associates, own more than fifty percent, of the share capital of the company or control the appointment of the board of directors of the company.

“Resolution Plan”: A plan proposed by resolution applicant for insolvency resolution of the corporate debtor as a going concern in accordance with Part II [Section 5(26)].

“Resolution Professional”: An insolvency professional appointed to conduct the corporate insolvency resolution process and includes an interim resolution professional [Section 5(27)].

“Voting share”: The share of the voting rights of a single financial creditor in the committee of creditors which is based on the proportion of the financial debt owed to such financial creditor in relation to the financial debt owed by the corporate debtor [Section 5(28)].

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 1 Insolvency Concepts and Evolution – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Notes is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution – CS Professional Insolvency Law and Practice Study Material

Question 1.
Explain the concept of Insolvency/ Bankruptcy.
Answer:
Insolvency is a state when an individual, corporation, or other organization cannot meet its financial obligations for paying debts as they become due. Bankruptcy is not exactly the same as insolvency. Technically, bankruptcy occurs when a court has determined insolvency, and given legal orders for it to be resolved. Bankruptcy is a determination of insolvency made by a court of law with resulting legal orders intended to resolve the insolvency. Insolvency describes a situation where the debtor is unable to meet his/her obligations. Bankruptcy is a legal scheme in which an insolvent debtor seeks relief.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
What historical developments of Insolvency laws took place in India?
Answer:

  • The law of Insolvency in India owes its origin to English law. Before the British came to India there was no law of Insolvency in the country.
  • The earliest insolvency legislation can be traced to sections 23 and 24 of the Government of India Act, 1800 (39 and 40 Geo III c 79), which conferred insolvency jurisdiction on the Supreme Court.
  • The passing of Statute 9 in 1828 (Geo- IV c 73) can be said to be the beginning of the special insolvency legislation in India.
  • Under this Act, the relief for insolvent debtors were provided in the Presidency-towns.
  • A further step in the development of Insolvency Law was taken when the Indian Insolvency Act, 1848 was passed. However, the Provisions were found to be inadequate to meet the changing conditions.
  • The Act of 1848 was in force in the Presidency-towns until the enactment in 1909 of the Presidency-towns Insolvency Act, 1909. The Presidency Towns Insolvency Act, 1909 and Provisional Insolvency Act, 1920 are two major enactments that deal with personal insolvency and have parallel provisions and their substantial content is also similar but the two differ in respect of their territorial jurisdiction.
  • While Presidency Towns Insolvency Act, 1909 applies in Presidency towns namely, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai, Provincial Insolvency Act, 1920 applies to all provinces of India.
  • These two Acts are applicable to individuals as well as to sole proprietorships and partnership firms. Under the Constitution of India ‘Bankruptcy & Insolvency’ is provided in Entry 9 List III – Concurrent List, (Article 246 -Seventh Schedule to the Constitution) i.e. both Center and State Governments can make laws relating to this subject.
  • The major legislations governing Corporate Insolvency were I Companies Act, 1956, relating to winding up of companies. I The Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985.

Question 3.
What reforms took place in insolvency law in last two decades?
Answer:

  • The Indian financial system has undergone tremendous transformation in last two decades. Various financial sector reforms have been initiated aimed at promoting an efficient, well-diversified and competitive financial system with the ultimate objective of improving the allocative efficiency of resources so as to accelerate economic development.
  • As India swiftly moves to the centre stage of world economy there has been a consistent effort by the policy makers to undertake comprehensive reforms in the laws and systems to bring them at par with international standards and incentives the foreign investors to invest in the Indian economy.

Question 4.
How did SICA and BIFR came into existence?
Answer:

  • Industrial sickness had started right from the pre-Independence days.
  • Government had earlier tried to counter the sickness with some ad-hoc measures
  • Nationalisation of Banks and certain other measures provided some temporary relief
  • RBI monitored the industrial sickness
  • A study group, came to be known as Tandon Committee was appointed by RBI in 1975
  • In 1976, H.N. Ray committee was appointed
  • In 1981, Tiwari Committee was appointed to suggest a comprehensive special legislation designed to deal with the problem of sickness laying down its basic objectives and parameters, remedies necessary for revival of sick Units
  • The committee submitted its report to the Govt, in September 1983 and suggested the following:
    (a) Need for a special legislation
    (b) Need for setting up of exclusive quasi-judicial body.
  • Thus, the SICA came into existence in 1985 and BIFR started functioning from 1987.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 5.
Why and how was Eradi Committee formed?
Answer:

  • In the year 1999, the Government of India set up a High Level Committee headed by Justice V.B. Eradi, to examine and make recommendations with regard to the desirability of changes in existing law relating to winding up of companies so as to achieve more transparency and avoid delays in the final liquidation of the companies.
  • The Committee recognized after considering international practices that the law of insolvency should not only provide for quick disposal of assets but in Indian economic scene, it should first look at the possibilities of rehabilitation and revival of companies.
  • The Committee also recommended that the jurisdiction, power and authority relating to winding up of companies should be vested in a National Company Law Tribunal instead of the High Court as at present.
  • The Committee strongly recommended appointing Insolvency Professionals who are members of ICAI, ICSI, ICWAI, Bar Councils or corporate managers who are well versed in Corporate management on lines of U.K. Insolvency Act.

Question 6.
Explain the key points addressed and recommended by Eradi Committee
Answer:

  • The Committee recognized after considering international practices that the law of insolvency should not only provide for quick disposal of assets but, should first look at the possibilities of rehabilitation and revival of companies.
  • The Committee noted that there are three different agencies namely, (i) the High Courts, which have powers to order winding up of companies under the provisions of the Companies Act, 1956; (ii) the Company Law Board to exercise powers conferred on it by the Act or the powers of the Central Government delegated to it and (iii) Board for Industrial and Financial Reconstruction (BIFR) which deals with the references relating to rehabilitation and revival of sick industrial companies.
  • The committee brought out the dismal of time taken to wind up a company in India – it may run on an average upto 25 years.

Question 7.
What are the recommendations made by N L Mitra Advisory group?
Answer:

  • The Advisory Group examined the details of conflicting decisions on tribunalisation of justice. Tribunalised justice is a special character of civil law system.
  • In a common law culture, there is an emphasis on judicial form and formalities.
  • The conflict between the two systems is nothing new in India.
  • Both the systems, that is the common law and the civil law systems, are now coming closer, common law systems adopting structure of administrative authority including administrative justice for the management of various state functions: and the civil law system on the other hand, incorporating the principles of accusive system and judicial process.
  • In India, we have under the present constitutional paradigm partially adopted tribunalised form of justice under article 323 A and 323 B20. But there are also judicial observations. It is true that in L. Chandrakumar21, Supreme Court finally gave its nod in favour of tribunalised system of justice. But the reservation of judiciary against the erosion of judicial power especially at the High Court level is quite evident. It is not possible to oust the jurisdiction of the High Court under Articles 226 and 227 without amending the provision of Article 323B.

Question 8.
What two methods were given by the N L Mitra Advisory Group?
Answer:
The advisory group discussed in details the possibility of avoiding the
dualism in the system so that the whole process can be put into a straight
line to avoid delay. In that context the following two methods have been
discussed.
(a) Constituting a National Tribunal with benches at the jurisdiction of each High Court to receive and deal with all petitions for bankruptcy, restructuring and finally for insolvency with an appeal lying to the High Court and SLP to the Supreme Court; and
(b) Having a completely dedicated bench in each High Court dealing with the entire matter of bankruptcy; reorganisation; and insolvency proceedings ensuring fast track liquidation, the only appeal being by way of a special leave petition to the Supreme Court.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 9.
Give the highlights of J J Irani Committee (2005).
Answer:
The Insolvency Tribunal should have a general, non-intrusive and supervisory role in the rehabilitation and liquidation process. Greater intervention of the Tribunal is required only to resolve disputes by adopting a fast track approach. The Tribunal should adopt a commercial approach to dispute resolution observing the established legal principles of fairness in the process.

  • The Tribunal should set standards of high quality and be able to meet requisite level of public expectations of fairness, impartiality, transparency and accountability. Selection of President and Members of the Tribunal should be such so as to enable a wide mix of expertise for conduct of its work.
  • The Tribunal will require specialized expertise to address the issues referred to it. The law should prescribe an adequate qualification criterion for appointment to the Tribunal as well as training and continuing education forjudges/members.
  • Rules should be made in such way that ensure ready access to court records, court hearings, debtors and financial data and other public information.
  • Standards to measure the competence, performance and services of the Tribunal should be framed and adopted so that proper evaluation is done and further improvements can be suggested.
  • The Tribunal should have clear authority and effective methods of enforcing its judgments. It should have adequate powers to deal with illegal activity or abusive conduct.

Question 10.
What were the highlights of the BLRC COMMITTEE (2014)?
Answer:

  • Post announcement by the Hon’ble Finance Minister in his Budget Speech of 2014-15 that an entrepreneur friendly legal bankruptcy framework would be developed for SMEs to enable easy exit, Bankruptcy Law Reforms Committee (BLRC) was set up under Shri TK Viswanathan, former Secretary General, Lok Sabha and former Union Law Secretary, on 22.8.2014 to study the corporate bankruptcy legal framework in India and submit a report.
  • The objectives of the Committee were to resolve insolvency with lesser time involved, lesser loss in recovery, and higher levels of debt financing across instruments.
  • The Committee has recommended a consolidation of the existing legal framework, by repealing two laws and amending six others. It has proposed to repeal the Presidency Towns Insolvency Act, 1909 and the Provincial Insolvency Act, 1920. In addition, it has proposed to amend: (i) Companies Act, 2013, (ii) Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Repeal Act, 2013, (iii) Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008, (iv) Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002, (v) Recovery of Debts Due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act, 1993 and (vi) Indian Partnership Act, 1932.
  • The Committee has proposed to establish a creditors committee, where the financial creditors will have votes in proportion to their magnitude of debt. The creditors committee will undertake negotiations with the debtor, to come up with a revival or repayment plan.
  • The report outlines the procedure for insolvency resolution for companies and individuals. The process may be initiated by either the debtor or the creditors.
  • Presently, only secured financial creditors (creditors holding collateral against loans), can file an application for declaring a company sick. The Committee has proposed that operational creditors, such as employees whose salaries are due, be allowed to initiate the insolvency resolution process (IRP).
  • The entire IRP will be managed by a licensed insolvency professional. During the IRP, the professional will control and manage the assets of the debtor, to ensure that they are protected, while the negotiations take place.
  • The Committee has proposed to set up Insolvency Professional Agencies. The agencies will admit insolvency professionals as members and develop a code of conduct.
  • The report recommends speedy insolvency resolution and time bound negotiations between creditors and the debtors. To ensure this, a 180 day time period for completion of the IRP has been recommended. For cases with high complexity, this time period may be extended by 90 days, if 75% of the creditors agree.
  • The committee has proposed to establish information utilities which will maintain a range of information about firms, and thus avoid delays in the IRP, typically caused by a lack of data.
  • The Committee has proposed to establish the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India as the regulator, to maintain oversight over insolvency resolution in the country. The Board will regulate the insolvency professional agencies and information utilities, in addition to making regulations for insolvency resolution in India.
  • The Committee proposed two tribunals to adjudicate grievances under the law: (i) the National Company Law Tribunal will continue to have jurisdiction over insolvency resolution and liquidation of companies and limited liability partnerships; and (ii)the Debt Recovery Tribunal will have jurisdiction over insolvency and bankruptcy resolution of individuals.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 11.
Give the framework of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Answer:
Framework of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code 2016
Insolvency- Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material 1

The framework of Part II- Insolvency Resolution and Liquidation for Corporate Persons
Insolvency- Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material 2

Question 12.
Explain the regulatory mechanism of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016.
Answer:
Insolvency- Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material 3

The Insolvency Adjudication Process
Insolvency- Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material 4

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 13.
Explain the regulatory framework of Insolvency Code in UK.
Answer:

  • The 1982 Report of the Insolvency Law review Committee, Insolvency Laws and Practice (commonly known as “the Cork Report”) recommended the adoption in the United Kingdom of Unified Insolvency legislation.
  • The Insolvency Act, 1986 deals with the insolvency of individuals and companies.
  • The Act is divided into three groups and 14 Schedules as follows:
  • Group 1 deals with Company Insolvency
  • Group 2 deals with Insolvency of Individuals and
  • Group 3 deals with Miscellaneous Matters bearing on both Company and Individual Insolvency.
  • Basically, a company in financial difficulties may be made subject to any of five statutory procedures.
    1. administration
    2. company voluntary arrangement
    3. scheme of arrangement
    4. receivership (including administrative receivership); and
    5. liquidation (winding-up).
  • With the exception of schemes of arrangement, which fall within the ambit of the Companies Act, 2006, these are formal insolvency procedures governed by the Insolvency Act, 1986.
  • The administration procedure was introduced by the insolvency Act, 1986 and substantially revised by the Enterprise Act, 2002 to include a streamlined procedure allowing the company or (more often) its directors to appoint an administrator without the involvement of the Court subject to conditions.
  • Firms are in fact liquidated if they become the subject of a compulsory liquidation order obtained from the court by a creditor, shareholder or director. Alternatively, the company may itself decide to pass a liquidation resolution – subject to the approval of a creditors’ meeting – for the company to be wound-up (a Creditors Voluntary Liquidation).
    Either way, the result of both these procedures is the winding-up of the company. Neither process makes any attempt to rescue or sustain the company as a legal entity.
  • The Insolvency Act 1986 also introduced three new procedures that held out the possibility of a company being brought back to life as a viable entity. These measures represented an attempt to emulate the ‘rescue culture’ that characterised the corporate sector in the US. The first of these procedures – ‘company voluntary arrangements’ (CVAs) – provides a way in which a company in financial difficulty can come to a binding agreement with its creditors. The second procedure – ‘administration’ – offers companies a breathing space during which creditors are restrained from taking action against them. During this period, an administrator is appointed by a court to put forward proposals to deal with the company’s financial difficulties. A third option – ‘administrative receivership’ – permits the appointment of a receiver by certain creditors (normally the holders of a floating charge) with the objective of ensuring repayment of secured debts.
  • The Enterprise Act 2002 attempted to embed a rescue culture by creating entry routes into administration that did not require a court order, and simplified the means by which a company could ‘emerge’ from administration. It also prohibited – with certain exceptions – the right of creditors to appoint an administrative receiver (which had previously blocked a company’s ability to opt for administration). In addition, the Act explicitly established a ‘hierarchy of purposes’ for the administration process. The primary duty of administrators was defined as rescuing the company as a going concern (a duty that does not exist for an administrative receiver).

Question 14.
Brief note on US Bankruptcy laws.
Answer:

  • The English bankruptcy system was the model for bankruptcy laws in the English colonies in America and in the American states after independence from England in 1776.
  • Early American bankruptcy laws were only available to merchants and generally involved imprisonment until debts were paid or until property was liquidated or creditors agreed to the release of the debtor. The laws were enacted by each individual state and were inconsistent and discriminatory.
  • The system was not uniform and some states became known as debtor’s havens because of their unwillingness to enforce commercial obligations. The lack of uniformity in bankruptcy and debt enforcement laws hindered business and commerce between the states.
  • The United States Constitution as adopted in 1789 provides in Article I, Section 8, Clause 4 that the states granted to Congress the power to establish uniform laws on the subject of bankruptcies throughout the United States. However, until 1898 there was no bankruptcy law in continuous effect in the United States.
  • The Congress enacted temporary bankruptcy statutes in 1800,1841 and 1867 to deal with economic downturns. However, those laws were temporary measures and were repealed as soon as economic conditions stabilized. The Act of 1800 was repealed in 1803.
  • The Act of 1841 was repealed in 1843 and the Act of 1867 only lasted until 1878. These early laws only permitted merchants, traders, bankers and factors to be placed in bankruptcy proceedings. The Acts of 1800 and 1841 vested jurisdiction in the federal district courts.
  • The district court judges were given the power to appoint commissioners or assignees to take charge of and liquidate a debtor’s property. A permanent bankruptcy statute was not enacted until 1898. The National Bankruptcy Act of 1898 was based upon the liquidation of a debtor’s non-exempt assets to pay creditors. In 1938 the law was amended to provide for the rehabilitation or reorganization of a debtor as an alternative to liquidation of assets.
  • The Bankruptcy Act of 1898, together with its amendments, was known as the Bankruptcy Act. Under the Bankruptcy Act, the district court had jurisdiction over bankruptcy cases, but could appoint a referee in bankruptcy to oversee the administration of bankruptcy cases, the allowance of claims and the distribution of payments to creditors.
  • The Bankruptcy Act governed bankruptcy in the United States for 80 years. After a series of critical studies and review of the then existing law and practice, Congress passed the Bankruptcy Reform Act of 1978.

Insolvency Concepts and Evolution - CS Professional Study Material

Question 15.
Brief note on US Bankruptcy Code, 1978.
Answer:

  • The US Congress enacted the “Bankruptcy Code” in 1978. The Bankruptcy Code, which is codified as title 11 of the United States Code, has been amended several times since its enactment. It is the uniform federal law that governs all bankruptcy cases.
  • The procedural aspects of the bankruptcy process are governed by the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure (often called the “Bankruptcy Rules”) and local rules of each bankruptcy court.
  • The Bankruptcy Rules contain a set of official forms for use in bankruptcy cases. The Bankruptcy Code and Bankruptcy Rules (and local rules) set forth the formal legal procedures for dealing with the debt problems of individuals and businesses.

Six basic types of bankruptcy cases are provided for under the Bankruptcy Code.

  1. Chapter 7 bankruptcy leading to liquidation. In this type of bankruptcy, a court-appointed trustee or administrator takes possession of any nonexempt assets, liquidates these assets (for example, by selling at an auction), and then uses the proceeds to pay creditors.
  2. Chapter 9, entitled Adjustment of Debts of a Municipality, provides essentially for reorganization. Only a “municipality” may file under chapter 9, which includes cities and towns, as well as villages, counties, taxing districts, municipal utilities, and school districts.
  3. Chapter 11 entitled Reorganization, ordinarily is used by commercial enterprises that desire to continue operating a business and repay creditors concurrently through a court-approved plan of reorganization.
  4. Chapter 12 allows a family farmer or fisherman to continue to operate the business while the plan is being carried out.
  5. Chapter 13 enables individuals with regular income to develop a plan to repay all or part of their debts. Under this chapter, debtors propose a repayment plan to make instalments to creditors over three to five years.
  6. Chapter 15 is to provide effective mechanisms for dealing with insolvency cases involving debtors, assets, claimants, and other parties of interest involving more than one country.

Business Model Analysis – CS Professional Study Material

Chapter 14 Business Model Analysis – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material is designed strictly as per the latest syllabus and exam pattern.

Business Model Analysis – CS Professional Valuations and Business Modelling Study Material

Question 1.
Explain Working Capital Management through business modeling with practical example. (June 2019, 5 marks)
Answer:
Working capital management refers to a company’s managerial accounting strategy designed to monitor and utilize the two components of working capital, current assets and current liabilities, to ensure the most financially efficient operation of the company.

The primary purpose of working capital management is to make sure the company always maintains sufficient cash flow to meet its short-term operating costs and short-term debt obligations.

Working capital management commonly involves monitoring cash flow, assets, and liabilities through the ratio analysis of key elements of operating expenses, including the working capital ratio, collection ratio, and the inventory turnover ratio. Efficient working capital management helps maintain / the smooth operation of the operating cycle (the minimum amount of time required to convert net current assets and liabilities into cash) and can also help to improve the company’s earnings and profitability.

Management of working capital includes inventory management and management of accounts receivable and accounts payables. The main objective of working capital management include maintaining the working capital operating cycle and ensuring its ordered operation, minimizing the cost of capital spent on the working capital, and maximizing the return on current assets investments.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

For many Firms, the analysis and management of the operating cycle is the key to healthy operations. For example, imagine the appliance retailer / ordered too much inventory – its cash will be tied up and unavailable for spending on other things (such as fixed assets and salaries). Moreover, it will ) need larger warehouses. Will have to pay for unnecessary storage, and will have no space to house other inventory.

Imagine that in addition to buying too much inventory, the retailer is lenient with payment terms to its own customers (perhaps to stand.out from the competition). This extends the amount of time cash is tied up and adds a layer of uncertainty and risk around collection.

Now imagine our appliance retailer mitigates these issues by paying for the inventory on credit (often necessary as the retailer only gets cash once it sells the inventory). Cash is no longer tied up, but effective working capital management is even more important since the retailer may be forced to discount more aggressively (lowering margins or even taking loss) to move inventory in order to meet vendor payments and escape facing penalties. Taken together, this process represents the operating cycle (also called the cash conversion cycle). Companies with significant working capital consideration must carefully and actively manage working capital to avoid inefficiencies and possible liquidity problems.

In our example, a perfect solution could look like this:

  1. If the retailer bought excess inventory on credit with short repayment terms
  2. Economy is slow, customer aren’t paying as fast as was expected
  3. Demand for the retailer’s product offerings changes and some inventory flies off the shelves while other inventory is not selling.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 2.
‘Business leader of business model innovation need to embrace uncertainty, come to the work with a sense of curiosity and patience, and take the time to unpack the learning from what they are seeing around them.’ Brief the important principles of designing successful business model. (Dec 2019, 5 marks)

Question 3.
ABC Limited is engaged in the business of Manufacturing alloy components. The CFO of the Company estimates that the Turnover of Company for the forthcoming Financial Year will be ₹ 100 crore and thereafter year on year the Company can achieve 10% growth. He has also estimated that Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisations (EBITDA) for the forthcoming Financial Year will be 25% on Turnover. He also informs the Management that the Company can maintain the 25% EBITDA, provided there is not much change in the expenditure, as the 80% of expenditure of the Company is variable in nature.

However, the purchase head of the Company comes out with the information that price for one of important Raw Material  – ‘A’, which forms 50% of the total raw materials is likely to rise upto 30% during the next Financial Year. (Raw Material cost is estimated to be 60% of the Total Variable Cost). An alternate Raw Material – ‘P’ is available, however it is costlier and it will bring down present EBITDA margin to 20%. It is expected that price of Material – ’P’ will be stable in the next Financial Year. Assume there is no change in fixed or other variable expenses except change in Material ‘A’s price, as a part of the management you are required to : (June 2019)

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

(i) Find out the impact on profitability by preparing a Sensitivity Analysis table, if the price of the Raw Material —‘A’ is increases by 10%, 20% and 30% for the next Financial Year. (5 marks)
(ii) Find out % of Variable and Raw Material cost on Sales if Material — ‘P’ is used and also find out at what levels of increase in Material — ‘A’s price, the Company can opt for use of Raw Material — ‘P’. (5 marks)
Answer:
(i) Sentivity Table
Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material 1

(ii) Usage of Material ‘P’
Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material 2
Upto 27.78% of Material A’s price raise it can be used, beyond that Material P can be opted.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 4.
Sibaca Textiles Limited is carrying on dyeing and printing of fabrics. The business of the Company is of a seasonal nature. Peak seasons for the business are January to March and July to September. During peak season period monthly sale will be ₹ 2,000 Lakh per month.

During each of the off season month the monthly Sales will only be 50% of the Peak season sale. Out of Total Sales, 10% is cash sale and Credit Sale is 90% and normal credit period allowed is 60 days (received at the end of second month ex. January Sale is received during March). Presently, out of credit sales customers’ at least 30% delay the payment and makes payment only at the end of third month.

Fixed Expenses are ₹ 400 Lakh per month and Variable expenses are 60% of the monthly sales of that month and payment for the same have to be made at the end of second month. In the month of September the Company requires ₹ 2,000 lakh for new machinery. Bankers of the Company are ready to fund upto ₹ 1,700 Lakh.

Opening Cash and Bank Account available is ₹ 500 Lakh. Cash Management policy of the company is to maintain atleast ₹ 500 Lakh as minimum Balance.
The Management is requesting you to prepare:
(i) Cash projections for 6 months commencing from July to December with your suggestion that how much the Company need to borrow for new machinery.
(ii) Prepare sensitivity analysis of projections, if credit sales customers who are delaying payment (payment received at the end of third month) increases from 30% to 40%. Will it have any impact on new machinery to be bought in September and amount to be borrowed for the same? (Dec 2019, 10 marks)

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 5.
Write note on Decomposition of revenue.
Answer:
Decomposition of Revenue
The modeller’s ultimate objective is to develop a forecast for the total revenue of a business. This can be decomposed into a number of elements. The individual elements that comprise the total revenue for a business will depend on the industry in which it operates. In several industries total revenue can be computed from an estimate of the number of customers who demand a product or service; the quantity of that product or service that they demand; and the price charged per unit of that product or services.

The exact definitions of customers, products and services, and prices may differ, but the general approach will usually prove valid. Decomposing a forecast into the individual elements allows the modeller to observe to what extent a change in total revenue is a result of changes in quantities (sometimes referred to as volume changes) and changes in price.

Historically, in the case of the mobile communication industry, a major proportion of the total revenue was generated by voice traffic. The voice revenue could be decomposed into a number of readily identifiable elements:
(a) The number of customers using the network.
(b) The average number of minutes of voice calls made by each customer.
(c) The average price charged for each minute of use.
The total voice revenue for a mobile business could be calculated using the following equation:
Average number of customers × Average number of voice minutes × Average price per minute

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 6.
What do you mean by sensitivity analysis. Discuss the various methods and uses of sensitivity analysis.
Answer:
Sensitivity Analysis
The technique used to determine how independent variable values will impact a particular dependent variable under a given set of assumptions is defined as sensitive analysis. It’s usage will depend on one or more input variables within the specific boundaries, such as the effect that changes in interest rates will have on a bond’s price.

It is also known as the what – if analysis. Sensitivity analysis can be used for any activity or system. All from planning a family vacation with the variables in mind to the decisions at corporate levels can be done through sensitivity analysis.

It helps in analyzing how sensitive the output is, by the changes in one input while keeping the other inputs constant.

Sensitivity analysis works on the simple principle: Change the model and observe the behaviour.

The parameters that one needs to note while doing the above are:
1. Experimental Design : It includes combination of parameters that are to be varied. This includes a check on which and how many parameters need to vary at a given point in time, assigning values (maximum and minimum levels) before the experiment, study the correlations: positive or negative and accordingly assign values for the combination.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

2. What to Vary: The different parameters that can be chosen to vary in the model could be:
(a) the number of activities
(b) the objective in relation to the risk assumed and the profits expected
(c) technical parameters
(d) number of constraints and its limits

3. What to Observe:
(a) the value of the objective as per the strategy
(b) value of the decision variables
(c) value of the objective function between two strategies adopted Measurement of sensitivity analysis

Below are mentioned the steps used to conduct sensitivity analysis:

  1. Firstly the base case output is defined; say the NPV at a particular base case input value (V1) for which the sensitivity is to be measured. All the other inputs of the model are kept constant.
  2. Then the value of the output at a new value of the input (V2) while keeping other inputs constant is calculated.
  3. Find the percentage change in the output and the percentage change in the input.
  4. The sensitivity is calculated by dividing the percentage change in output by the percentage change in input.

This process of testing sensitivity for another input (say cash flows growth rate) while keeping the rest of inputs constant is repeated till the sensitivity figure for each of the inputs is obtained. The conclusion would be that the higher the sensitivity figure, the more sensitive the output is to any change in that input and vice versa.

Methods of Sensitivity Analysis
There are different methods to carry out the sensitivity analysis:

  • Modelling and simulation techniques
  • Scenario management tools through Microsoft excel There are mainly two approaches to analyzing sensitivity:
    (a) Local Sensitivity Analysis
    (b) Global Sensitivity Analysis

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

(a) Local Sensitivity Analysis: Local sensitivity analysis is derivative based (numerical or analytical). The term local indicates that the derivatives are taken at a single point. This method is apt for simple cost functions, but not feasible for complex models, like models with discontinuities do not always have derivatives.

Mathematically, the sensitivity of the cost function with respect to certain parameters is equal to the partial derivative of the cost function with respect to those parameters.

Local sensitivity analysis is a one-at-a-time (OAT) technique that analyzes the impact of one parameter on the cost function at a time, keeping the other parameters fixed.

(b) Global Sensitivity Analysis: Global sensitivity analysis is the second approach to sensitivity analysis, often implemented using Monte Carlo techniques. This approach uses a global set of samples to explore the design space.

The various techniques widely applied include:
Differential sensitivity analysis: It is also referred to the direct method. It involves solving simple partial derivatives to temporal sensitivity analysis. Although this method is computationally efficient, solving equations is intensive task to handle.

One at a time sensitivity measures: It is the most fundamental method with partial differentiation, in which varying parameters values are taken one at a time. It is also called as local analysis as it is an indicator only for the addressed point estimates and not the entire distribution.

Factorial Analysis: It involves the selection of given number of samples for a specific parameter and then running the model for the combinations. The outcome is then used to carry out parameter sensitivity.

Through the sensitivity index one can calculate the output % difference
when one input parameter varies from minimum to maximum value.

  • Correlation analysis helps in defining the relation between independent and dependent variables.
  • Regression analysis is a comprehensive method used to get responses for complex models.
  • Subjective sensitivity analysis: In this method the individual parameters are analyzed. This is a subjective method, simple, qualitative and an easy method to rule out input parameters.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Using Sensitivity Analysis for decision making
One of the key applications of Sensitivity analysis is in the utilization of models by managers and decision makers. All the content needed for the decision model can be fully utilized only through the repeated application of sensitivity analysis. It helps decision analysts to understand the uncertainties, pros and cons with the limitations and scope of a decision model.

Most if not all decisions are made under uncertainty. It is the optimal solution in decision making for various parameters that are approximations. One approach to come to conclusion is by replacing all the uncertain parameters with expected values and then carry out sensitivity analysis. It would be a breather for a decision maker if he / she has some indication as to how sensitive will the choices be with changes in one or more inputs.

Uses of Sensitivity Analysis

  1. The key application of sensitivity analysis is to indicate the sensitivity of simulation to uncertainties in the input values of the model.
  2. They help in decision making.
  3. Sensitivity analysis is a method for predicting the outcome of a decision if a situation turns out to be different compared to the key predictions.
  4.  It helps in assessing the riskiness of a strategy.
  5. Helps in identifying how dependent the output is on a particular input value. Analyses if the dependency in turn helps in assessing the risk associated.
  6. Helps in taking informed and appropriate decisions
  7. Aids searching for errors in the model.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 7.
Write note on forecasting revenue.
Answer:
Forecasting Revenue
Forecasting revenue is one the biggest challenges for the business modeller. The first problem is producing a meaningful and useful definition of the market place. In the telecommunications, information technology and media sectors, for instance, there is such a high degree of convergence that it is becoming increasingly difficult to distinguish between the separate markets.

Modellers may also have incomplete or inaccurate data as a basis for their forecasts. Even when an industry-wide revenue forecast has been produced, estimating a business’s market share of that revenue can be even more difficult. Market share has many determinants and some important factors, like, brand strength, are difficult to gauge and incorporate in the model.

Approaches to Revenue Forecasting
The different approaches to forecasting can be classified in several ways. A useful classification is as follows:
(i) Extrapolation techniques: Extrapolation techniques, like, time series analysis, implicitly assume that the past will be a reasonable predictor of the future. This assumption may be valid for mature and stable businesses, like the water and gas utilities. However, many industry sectors are experiencing rising levels of structural change. The use extrapolative techniques for these sectors may provide poor results.

(ii) Causative techniques: Causative techniques, such as, multiple regression, attempt to comprehend the basic relationships, that determine the dynamics of a market. This understanding, combined with a set of assumptions about the future, provides the basis for the forecast. Because the underlying relationships are often estimated from historical data, these techniques are useful when only small, incremental changes in assumptions are expected in the future.

(iii) Judgmental techniques: Modellers may often be asked to produce a forecast for a new product or market where there are no available historic data. In these cases, forecasting can become judgmental and highly subjective. Although the forecasts can be refined through studying the results of market research and by examining the experiences of similar or related products in other markets and countries, the task of forecasting becomes more like an art than a science.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

Question 8.
Discuss the working capital management through Business Modelling.
Answer:
Working Capital Management through Business Modelling
Working capital is one of the toucjhest concepts for the entrepreneurs to comprehend, especially, for the owners of small business. In fact, the term means a lot of different things to a lot of different people. By definition, working capital is the amount by which current assets exceed current liabilities.

There are various approaches to estimate the working capital requirements. However, one of the useful tools for ascertaining working capital needs is the operating cycle. The operating cycle analyzes the accounts receivable, inventory and accounts payable cycles in terms of days.

In other words, accounts receivable are analyzed by the average number of days it takes to collect an account. Inventory is analyzed by the average number of days it takes to turn over the sale of a product. Accounts payable are analyzed by the average number of days it takes to pay a supplier invoice.

Most businesses need short-term working capital at some point in their operations. For instance, retailers must find working capital to fund seasonal inventory build-up between September and November for Christmas sales. But even a business that is not seasonal occasionally experiences peak months when orders are unusually high. This creates a need for working capital to fund the resulting inventory and accounts receivable build-up. The other methods for estimating working capital requirements are as follows:

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

(i) Percentage of Sales Method: This method of estimating working capital requirements is based on the assumption that the level of working capital for any firm is directly related to its sales value. If past experience indicates a stable relationship between the amount of sales and working capital, then this basis may be used to determine the requirements of working capital for future period.

Thus, if sales for the year 2007 amounted to ₹ 30,00,000 and working capital required was ₹ 6,00,000; the requirement of working capital for the year 2008 on an estimated sales of ₹ 40,00,000 shall be ₹ 8,00,000; i.e. 20% of ₹ 40,00,000.

The individual items of current assets and current liabilities can also be estimated on the basis of the past experience as a percentage of sales. This method is simple to understand and easy to operate but it cannot be applied in all cases because the direct relationship between sales and working capital may not be established.

(ii) Regression Analysis Method (Average Relationship between Sales and Working Capital): This method of forecasting working capital requirements is based upon the statistical technique of estimating or predicting the unknown value of a dependent variable from the known value of an independent variable. It is the measure of the average relationship between two or more variables, i.e.; sales and working capital, in terms of the original units of the data.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

The relationships between sales and working capital are represented by the equation:
y = a + bx
Where, y = Working capital (dependent variable)
a = Intercept of the least square
b = Slope of the regression line
x = Sales (independent variable)
For determining the values ‘a’ and ‘b’ two normal equations are used which can be solved simultaneously:
Σ y = na + bΣ X
Σ xy = aΣ x + bΣ X2

(iii) Cash Forecasting Method: This method of estimating working capital requirements involves forecasting of cash receipts and disbursements during a future period of time. Cash forecast will include all possible sources from which cash will be received and the channels in which payments are to be made so that a consolidated cash position is determined.

This method is similar to the preparation of a cash budget. The excess of receipts over payments represents surplus of cash and the excess of payments over receipts causes deficit of cash or the amount of working capital required.

Business Model Analysis - CS Professional Study Material

(iv) Projected Balance Sheet Method: Under this method, projected balance sheet for future date is prepared by forecasting of assets and liabilities by following any of the methods stated above. The excess of estimated total current assets over estimated current liabilities, as shown in the projected balance sheet, is computed to indicate the estimated amount of working capital required.